trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@114 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

70 files changed, 15773 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/History b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/History
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dfa7bbf787e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/History
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+plain/js-misc/History				30 Jul 95  -*- Indented-Text -*-
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+	deutsch.tex uses german.sty. (With babel 3.5, germanb.sty
+	cannot be used with plain TeX any more.) [1]
+
+
+Version 1.3	07 May 95
+
+	xfig.tex handles \SetFigFont variants (from transfig versions
+	2.1 & 3.1) automatically.
+
+
+Version 1.2	17 Apr 95
+
+	Typo in sperr.tex prevented it from working.
+
+	Don't allocate registers in xfig.tex globally, to allow
+	reading it several times in a group.
+
+
+Version 1.1	16 Mar 95
+
+	First public release.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/INSTALL b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/INSTALL
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..540e67301ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/INSTALL
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+$Id: INSTALL,v 1.1 1995/03/16 01:18:22 schrod Exp $
+------------------------------------------------------------
+
+These instructions are written for the installation of this package on
+a TDS-compliant TeX system. (TDS is the forthcoming standard for TeX
+installations, refer to ftp.th-darmstadt.de:/pub/tex/TDS-compliant/draft/
+for more information.) If you don't have such a system, you have to
+figure out your directory names yourself.
+
+If you're on a Unix system and want to use make for installation, read
+further. Otherwise skip forward to ``MANUAL INSTALLATION''.
+
+
+------------------------------------------------------------
+INSTALLATION BY MAKE:
+
+Edit the Makefile and adapt the values of the following variables to
+your system. Sorry, but the values are not collected at the top of the
+Makefile, use your editor to locate them. (The Makefile is generated
+by Imake, I don't touch it... :-)
+
+    MAKEDIR	[Default: mkdir -p]
+		A command to create a directory, including all
+		non-existent intermediate ones.
+
+    DESTDIR	[Default is empty]
+		This is a prefix that's prepended in front of all
+		destination directories, in case your installation
+		structure is somewhere else than your run-time
+		location.
+
+    INSTALL	[Default depends on the machine I generated the distribution]
+		A BSD install program.
+		If you have a System V Unix, and you have X11, you can
+		use a script named bsdinst.sh or bsdinst or
+		install.sh that's located your X11 bin directory.
+		If you don't have a BSD install program, you must use
+		the manual installation, described below.
+
+    TEXMF	[Default: /usr/local/lib/texmf]
+		The root of your (TDS) TeX tree.
+
+Now, type "make install" and everything should be OK.
+
+
+
+------------------------------------------------------------
+MANUAL INSTALLATION:
+
+
+The Imakefile features definitions that look like
+InstallTeX<category>(<package>,<files>).
+
+Copy all <files> to a directory that is appropriate for this
+<category> and this <package>. (The <category> `Generic' denotes macro
+files that can be used with many TeX formats, including plain TeX,
+LaTeX, and AmS-TeX.)
+    The TDS directory names are $TEXMF/tex/<category>/<package>/,
+where $TEXMF is your TDS root directory and <category> is
+all-lowercase.
+
+
+------------------------------------------------------------
+# LocalWords:  tex MAKEDIR DESTDIR bsdinst sh usr lib texmf Imakefile AmS
+# LocalWords:  InstallTeX
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/Imakefile b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/Imakefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4592d64acc9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/Imakefile
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+XCOMM $Id: Imakefile,v 1.5 1995/05/28 00:30:55 schrod Exp $
+/* ---------------------------------------------------------------------- */
+
+/*
+ * Imakefile for plain TeX macro package `js-misc'
+ *
+ * (history at end)
+ */
+
+
+/* needed modules */
+#include <install/TeX.imk>
+#include <makeprog.imk>
+#include <TeX.imk>
+
+XCOMM ------------------------------------------------------------
+XCOMM continue in Imakefile
+
+
+/*
+ * The plain TeX package `js-misc' consists of the following macro files:
+ *
+ *     cassette		-- Labels for audio cassettes
+ *     deutsch		-- German texts with plain TeX
+ *     idverb		-- Verbatim identifiers a la WEB
+ *     names.sty	-- Logos
+ *     schild		-- Make a label (for doors, books, etc.)
+ *     sperr		-- Letterspace text (but don't steel sheep...)
+ *     xfig		-- Incorporate xfig output in plain TeX documents
+ */
+
+#ifdef ITI_Site
+    DESTDIR = /archives/tex/Install
+#endif
+
+InstallTeXPlain(js-misc,cassette.tex deutsch.tex idverb.tex \
+			schild.tex sperr.tex xfig.tex)
+InstallTeXGeneric(misc,names.sty)
+InstallTeXDoc(plain,js-misc.dvi)
+
+
+MpDoc2TeXTarget(deutsch,tex)
+MpDoc2TeXTarget(idverb,tex)
+
+TeXTarget(ftex,js-misc)
+
+
+/*
+ * creating a source-distribution of this macro package
+ */
+
+TeXFileTarget(tex,deutsch,doc)
+TeXFileTarget(tex,idverb,doc)
+
+export:: deutsch.dvi idverb.dvi
+	$(MAKE) all
+	$(RM) *.log
+
+/* This will get a module, too. */
+export::
+	touch site.imk
+	$(MAKE) Makefile IMAKE_INCLUDES=-I.
+	$(RM) -r site.imk Makefile.bak
+	cp $(HOME)/Notes/Copying.gpl License
+	pwd=`pwd` ; pwd=`suffix $$pwd /` ; cd .. ; \			@@\
+	    gtar -czvf $$pwd.tar.gz \					@@\
+		--exclude=CVS --exclude=.cvsignore $$pwd ; \		@@\
+	    cp $$pwd/README $$pwd.README
+
+
+/* ============================================================
+ *
+ * $Log: Imakefile,v $
+ * Revision 1.5  1995/05/28  00:30:55  schrod
+ *     On export, exclude CVS files by gtar options, not be removing
+ * them. Do also export the README file.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.4  1995/04/16  23:21:04  schrod
+ *     Moved itinames.sty & TH viscards to plain-iti package.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.3  1995/03/16  02:22:12  schrod
+ *     Export also DVI versions of DOC files.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.2  1995/03/16  01:17:45  schrod
+ *     Use TeX module.
+ *     Add export target.
+ *
+ * Revision 1.1  1995/03/13  23:18:09  schrod
+ *     Started to manage this package with CVS. Made minor code cleanup.
+ *
+
+ * ------------------------------------------------------------
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: Indented-Text
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/License b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/License
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a43ea2126fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/License
@@ -0,0 +1,339 @@
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+		       Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+                          675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+			    Preamble
+
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.  This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it.  (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.)  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+		    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+   TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+  0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License.  The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language.  (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".)  Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+  1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+  2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+    stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+    b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+    whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+    part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+    parties under the terms of this License.
+
+    c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+    when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+    interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+    announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+    notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+    a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+    these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+    License.  (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+    does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+    the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+  3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+    a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+    source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+    1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+    years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+    cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+    machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+    distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+    customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+    c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+    to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+    allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+    received the program in object code or executable form with such
+    an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable.  However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.  Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+  6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+  7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all.  For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+  9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+  10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this.  Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+			    NO WARRANTY
+
+  11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+		     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+	Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) 19yy  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+    Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19yy name of author
+    Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+  Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+  `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+  <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+  Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..492717b7700
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,288 @@
+# Makefile generated by imake - do not edit!
+# $XConsortium: imake.c,v 1.91 95/01/12 16:15:47 kaleb Exp $
+
+# $ITI: Imake.tmpl,v 1.5 1995/01/24 17:48:12 schrod Exp $
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Makefile generated from "Imake.tmpl" and <Imakefile>
+#
+# Top level imake template of `Imake module edition'.
+#
+
+default: all
+
+# ======================================================================
+# MIT & XFree configuration files
+# $ITI: MIT-config.imk,v 1.3 1994/12/19 19:16:35 schrod Exp $
+
+# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# site-specific configuration parameters that need to come before
+# the platform-specific parameters - edit site.def to change
+
+# $ITI: site.def,v 1.7 1995/03/27 14:41:35 herr Exp $
+#
+# ITI site definitions
+#
+# starting from original MIT version
+
+# site:  $XConsortium: site.def,v 1.2 91/07/30 20:26:44 rws Exp $
+
+# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# platform-specific configuration parameters - edit x386.cf to change
+
+# $ITI: x386.cf,v 1.3 1994/06/30 17:03:54 schrod Exp $
+# $XFree86: mit/config/x386.cf,v 2.44 1994/04/16 04:20:56 dawes Exp $
+# platform:  $XConsortium: x386.cf,v 1.7 91/08/16 19:30:10 gildea Exp $
+
+# operating system:  Linux
+
+# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# site-specific configuration parameters that go after
+# the platform-specific parameters - edit site.def to change
+
+# $ITI: site.def,v 1.7 1995/03/27 14:41:35 herr Exp $
+#
+# ITI site definitions
+#
+# starting from original MIT version
+
+# site:  $XConsortium: site.def,v 1.2 91/07/30 20:26:44 rws Exp $
+
+    KMEMGROUP = kmem
+
+# ======================================================================
+# Imake template with basic definitions
+# $ITI: Base.imk,v 1.5 1994/11/28 20:57:37 schrod Exp $
+
+    LOCALDIR = /usr/local
+
+# ------------------------------------------------------------
+# Imake template for operations on files
+# $ITI: files.imk,v 1.5 1994/12/02 19:46:44 schrod Exp $
+
+    COPYIF = copyif
+    CPP = /lib/cpp
+    LN = ln -s
+    MAKEDIR = mkdir -p
+    MV = mv
+    RM = /bin/rm -f
+
+
+
+# ------------------------------------------------------------
+# Imake template for use of imake & makedepend
+# $ITI: imake.imk,v 1.9 1995/06/30 16:29:13 schrod Exp $
+
+
+
+    IMAKE = imake
+
+    IMAKE_STD_OPTIONS =
+    IMAKE_STD_INCLUDES = -I$(LOCALDIR)/lib/imake
+    IMAKE_STD_DEFINES =
+
+    IMAKE_FLAGS = $(IMAKE_OPTIONS) $(IMAKE_EXTRA_OPTIONS) $(IMAKE_STD_OPTIONS) 	       $(IMAKE_INCLUDES) $(IMAKE_EXTRA_INCLUDES) $(IMAKE_STD_INCLUDES) 	          $(IMAKE_DEFINES) $(IMAKE_EXTRA_DEFINES) $(IMAKE_STD_DEFINES)
+
+
+
+    MAKE = make
+    SHELL = /bin/sh
+
+
+
+    TOPDIR = .
+    CURDIR = .
+    THISDIR = `basename $(CURDIR)`
+
+    MAKEOVERRIDES =
+
+
+
+depend::
+	touch .dependdummy
+	$(DEPEND) $(DEPENDFLAGS) -s "# DO NOT DELETE" .dependdummy
+	$(RM) .dependdummy
+
+    DEPEND = makedepend
+    DEPENDFLAGS =
+
+
+
+    SUBDIRS =
+
+###########################################################################
+# start of Imakefile
+
+# $Id: Imakefile,v 1.5 1995/05/28 00:30:55 schrod Exp $
+
+# ======================================================================
+# Imake template for installation of TeX files
+# $ITI: TeX.imk,v 1.2 1995/03/14 12:55:51 schrod Exp $
+
+# ======================================================================
+# Imake template for software installation
+# $ITI: install.imk,v 1.2 1995/03/14 12:56:05 schrod Exp $
+
+    DESTDIR =
+
+    INSTALL = install
+    INSTALL_OWNER = $(USER)
+    INSTALL_GROUP = `id -gn`
+
+    INSTALL_DATA_RIGHTS = 644
+    INSTALL_PROGRAM_RIGHTS = 755
+    INSTALL_SCRIPT_RIGHTS = 755
+
+    TEXMF = /usr/local/lib/texmf
+
+# ======================================================================
+# Imake template for MAKEPROG, the Literate Documentation system
+# $ITI: makeprog.imk,v 1.2 1995/03/14 12:55:29 schrod Exp $
+
+    MP_DOC2TEX = doc2tex
+    MP_TEX2DOC = tex2doc
+
+# ======================================================================
+# Imake template for TeX & friends
+# $ITI: TeX.imk,v 1.1 1995/03/14 19:40:12 schrod Exp $
+
+    TEX_IT = tex-it
+
+# ------------------------------------------------------------
+# continue in Imakefile
+
+install::
+	$(MAKEDIR) $(DESTDIR)/$(TEXMF)/tex/plain/js-misc
+	@test "cassette.tex deutsch.tex idverb.tex schild.tex sperr.tex xfig.tex" -o "cassette.tex deutsch.tex idverb.tex schild.tex sperr.tex xfig.tex" = "NullParameter"  && \
+	for file in cassette.tex deutsch.tex idverb.tex 			schild.tex sperr.tex xfig.tex '' ; \
+	do 	if [ empty$$file != empty ] ; \
+	then		(set -x; $(INSTALL) -c 	-o $(INSTALL_OWNER) -g $(INSTALL_GROUP) -m $(INSTALL_DATA_RIGHTS) $$file $(DESTDIR)/$(TEXMF)/tex/plain/js-misc) ; \
+	fi ; \
+	done  || \
+	exit 0
+
+install::
+	$(MAKEDIR) $(DESTDIR)/$(TEXMF)/tex/generic/misc
+	@test "names.sty" -o "names.sty" = "NullParameter"  && \
+	for file in names.sty '' ; \
+	do 	if [ empty$$file != empty ] ; \
+	then		(set -x; $(INSTALL) -c 	-o $(INSTALL_OWNER) -g $(INSTALL_GROUP) -m $(INSTALL_DATA_RIGHTS) $$file $(DESTDIR)/$(TEXMF)/tex/generic/misc) ; \
+	fi ; \
+	done  || \
+	exit 0
+
+install::
+	$(MAKEDIR) $(DESTDIR)/$(TEXMF)/doc/plain
+	@test "js-misc.dvi" -o "js-misc.dvi" = "NullParameter"  && \
+	for file in js-misc.dvi '' ; \
+	do 	if [ empty$$file != empty ] ; \
+	then		(set -x; $(INSTALL) -c 	-o $(INSTALL_OWNER) -g $(INSTALL_GROUP) -m $(INSTALL_DATA_RIGHTS) $$file $(DESTDIR)/$(TEXMF)/doc/plain) ; \
+	fi ; \
+	done  || \
+	exit 0
+
+deutsch.tex: deutsch.doc
+	$(MP_DOC2TEX) deutsch.doc deutsch.tex
+
+all:: deutsch.tex
+
+clean::
+	$(RM) deutsch.tex
+
+idverb.tex: idverb.doc
+	$(MP_DOC2TEX) idverb.doc idverb.tex
+
+all:: idverb.tex
+
+clean::
+	$(RM) idverb.tex
+
+all:: js-misc.dvi
+
+js-misc.dvi: js-misc.tex
+	$(TEX_IT) ftex js-misc.tex
+
+clean::
+	$(RM) js-misc.dvi js-misc.log js-misc.aux js-misc.toc js-misc.blg
+
+realclean::
+	$(RM) js-misc.bbl
+
+deutsch.dvi: deutsch.doc
+	$(TEX_IT) tex deutsch.doc
+
+clean::
+	$(RM) deutsch.dvi deutsch.log deutsch.aux deutsch.toc deutsch.blg
+
+realclean::
+	$(RM) deutsch.bbl
+
+idverb.dvi: idverb.doc
+	$(TEX_IT) tex idverb.doc
+
+clean::
+	$(RM) idverb.dvi idverb.log idverb.aux idverb.toc idverb.blg
+
+realclean::
+	$(RM) idverb.bbl
+
+export:: deutsch.dvi idverb.dvi
+	$(MAKE) all
+	$(RM) *.log
+
+export::
+	touch site.imk
+	$(MAKE) Makefile IMAKE_INCLUDES=-I.
+	$(RM) -r site.imk Makefile.bak
+	cp $(HOME)/Notes/Copying.gpl License
+	pwd=`pwd` ; pwd=`suffix $$pwd /` ; cd .. ; \
+	    gtar -czvf $$pwd.tar.gz \
+		--exclude=CVS --exclude=.cvsignore $$pwd ; \
+	    cp $$pwd/README $$pwd.README
+
+# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# common rules for all Makefiles - do not edit
+
+Makefile::
+	@if [ -f Makefile ]; \
+	then set -x; \
+	$(RM) Makefile.bak; $(MV) Makefile Makefile.bak; \
+	else set -x; fi ; \
+	$(IMAKE) $(IMAKE_FLAGS)	-DImakeTopDir=$(TOPDIR) -DImakeCurrentDir=$(CURDIR); \
+	set +x
+
+Makefiles::
+	@case "$(MAKEFLAGS)" in *[ik]*) set +e;; esac; \
+	case "$(TOPDIR)" in \
+	/?*) newtop=$(TOPDIR) ;; \
+	*)	newtop=../$(TOPDIR) ;; \
+	esac; \
+	test "$(SUBDIRS)" -o "$(SUBDIRS)" = "NullParameter"  && \
+	for d in $(SUBDIRS) '' ; \
+	do 	if [ empty$$d != empty ] ; \
+	then		echo "making Makefiles in $(CURDIR)/$$d ..."; \
+	$(MAKE) subdirMakefiles SUBDIR=$$d TOPDIR=$$newtop	CURDIR=$(CURDIR)/$$d	 ; \
+	fi ; \
+	done  || \
+	exit 0
+
+subdirMakefiles::
+	@cd $(SUBDIR) ; \
+	if [ -f Makefile ]; \
+	then set -x; \
+	$(RM) Makefile.bak; $(MV) Makefile Makefile.bak; \
+	else set -x; fi ; \
+	$(IMAKE) $(IMAKE_FLAGS)	-DImakeTopDir=$(TOPDIR) -DImakeCurrentDir=$(CURDIR); \
+	set +x ; \
+	$(MAKE) Makefiles
+
+clean::
+	$(RM) $(CLEAN_EXTRA_FILES) *.CKP *.ln *.BAK *.bak *.o core errs ,* *~ *.a	.emacs_* tags TAGS make.log MakeOut "#"*
+
+# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# default rules for Imakefiles that do not generate them - do not edit
+
+all::
+
+# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# dependencies generated by makedepend
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/README b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..14e8bf3f5c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/README
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+$Id: README,v 1.2 1995/05/07 16:58:21 schrod Exp $
+------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+The plain/js-misc package collects some small miscellaneous plain TeX
+macros I wrote and use quite regularly. You'll find a complete list of
+the package's macro files at the start of Imakefile.
+
+In my opinion, of particular importance are
+
+    idverb.tex		Typesetting verbatim by |...|
+    xfig.tex		Typeset figures created by xfig (transfig, actually)
+
+There does not exist a user manual for most macros. A German
+description of two minor macro files (cassette.tex & schild.tex) is
+available in js-misc.{tex,dvi}. Other DVI files in this distribution
+feature explanations of specific macro files, typically with
+implementation info as well. The rest has user documentation at the
+top of the macro files, as comments.
+
+For installation instructions, check the file INSTALL.
+
+
+Reference anonymous ftp site:
+	ftp.th-darmstadt.de [130.83.47.112]
+	directory pub/tex/plain
+	file js-misc-<version>.tar.gz
+		where <version> is the current version number
+		(a gzipped tar file)
+
+CTAN directory:
+	macros/plain/contrib/js-misc/
+		version info is in file History
+
+
+Enjoy,
+	Joachim
+
+--
+=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=
+Joachim Schrod			Email: schrod@iti.informatik.th-darmstadt.de
+Computer Science Department
+Technical University of Darmstadt, Germany
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/TODO b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/TODO
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..dc42a352abf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/TODO
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/names.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/names.sty
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..57452c17b52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/names.sty
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+% $Id: names.sty,v 1.2 1995/03/13 23:18:13 schrod Exp $
+%------------------------------------------------------------
+
+%
+% Verfuegbarkeit von haeufigen Abkuerzungen/Logos in
+% LaTeX und Formate bei Grund-Schriftgroesse 10pt.
+%
+% alle Logos nur in Roman
+% TeX related Logos:
+%       \TeX
+%       \INITeX
+%       \Plain           Plain TeX
+%       \LaTeX
+%       \BibTeX
+%       \SliTeX
+%       \MakeIndex       (kursiv)
+%       \AmSTeX          AmS-TeX
+%       \LAMSTeX	 LAmS-TeX
+%       \MF              METAFONT
+%       \INIMF
+%       \WEB
+%       \CWEB
+%       \TIE
+%       \stTeX
+%       \stMF
+% Dateitypen (alle in teletype):
+%       \LOG
+%       \DVI
+%       \FMT
+%       \TFM
+%       \GF
+%       \PK
+%       \PXL
+% andere Logos:
+%	\C++
+
+
+\font\tenlogo=logo10
+\let\logo=\tenlogo
+\ifx \mc\undefined  \let\mc=\small  \fi  % fuer LaTeX, `medium caps'
+
+
+% FIXME: should the space factor be set to 1000 afterwards?
+% is it a global value? otherwise it would be a faulty design within TeX...
+\def\TeX{{\rm T\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}
+\def\INITeX{{\rm INI\TeX}}
+
+\def\Plain{{\rm Plain~\TeX}}
+
+% LaTeX-Definition mit Original-TeX-Logo!
+% Entspricht nicht der Definition von L. Lamport, ist aber konsistenter
+\def\LaTeX{{\rm L\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc a}\kern-.15em\TeX}}
+\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em\TeX}}
+\def\SliTeX{{\rm S\kern-.06em{\sc l\kern-.035em i}\kern-.06em\TeX}}
+\def\MakeIndex{{\it MakeIndex\/}}
+
+\def\AmSTeX{%
+   $\cal A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal M$}\kern-.125em S$%
+   -\TeX
+   }
+\def\LAMSTeX{%
+   L\raise.42ex\hbox{$\scriptstyle\kern-.3em\cal A$}\kern-.2em
+   \lower.376ex\hbox{$\cal M$}\kern-.125em $\cal S$%
+   -\TeX
+   }
+
+
+\def\MF{{\logo META}\-{\logo FONT\/}}
+\def\INIMF{{\mc INI}{\logo MF}}
+
+
+\def\WEB{{\tt WEB\/}}
+\def\CWEB{{\mc CWEB}}
+\def\TIE{{\tt TIE\/}}
+
+
+\def\stTeX{{\sc st\rm\kern-0.13em\TeX}} % unser stTeX (TeXsys)
+\def\stMF{{\sc st}{\logo MF}}           % unser stMF
+
+
+\def\LOG{{\tt LOG\/}}
+\def\DVI{{\tt DVI\/}}
+\def\FMT{{\tt FMT\/}}
+\def\TFM{{\tt TFM\/}}
+
+\def\GF{{\tt GF\/}}
+\def\PK{{\tt PK\/}}
+\def\PXL{{\tt PXL\/}}
+
+
+
+\def\C++{C\raise .4ex\hbox{$\scriptstyle +\!+$}}
+
+
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-2.1-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-2.1-doc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ed37a84508c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-2.1-doc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+% $Id: text-2.1-doc.tex,v 1.1 1995/05/07 16:52:36 schrod Exp $
+%------------------------------------------------------------
+
+%
+% Test for xfig text typesetting of transfig 2.1 output
+%
+
+
+\input ../xfig.tex
+
+$$
+\hbox{\input text-2.1.latex }
+$$
+
+
+
+\bye
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Local Variables:
+mode: plain-TeX
+TeX-parse-self: nil
+TeX-auto-save: nil
+TeX-master: t
+End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-2.1.fig b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-2.1.fig
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..21c740e0675
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-2.1.fig
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+#FIG 2.1
+80 2
+4 0 0 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 2 13 58 26 29 Hello, World

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-2.1.latex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-2.1.latex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9eccd773f82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-2.1.latex
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+\setlength{\unitlength}{0.012500in}%
+%
+\begingroup\makeatletter\ifx\SetFigFont\undefined
+% extract first six characters in \fmtname
+\def\x#1#2#3#4#5#6#7\relax{\def\x{#1#2#3#4#5#6}}%
+\expandafter\x\fmtname xxxxxx\relax \def\y{splain}%
+\ifx\x\y   % LaTeX or SliTeX?
+\gdef\SetFigFont#1#2#3{%
+  \ifnum #1<17\tiny\else \ifnum #1<20\small\else
+  \ifnum #1<24\normalsize\else \ifnum #1<29\large\else
+  \ifnum #1<34\Large\else \ifnum #1<41\LARGE\else
+     \huge\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \csname #3\endcsname}%
+\else
+\gdef\SetFigFont#1#2#3{\begingroup
+  \count@#1\relax \ifnum 25<\count@\count@25\fi
+  \def\x{\endgroup\@setsize\SetFigFont{#2pt}}%
+  \expandafter\x
+    \csname \romannumeral\the\count@ pt\expandafter\endcsname
+    \csname @\romannumeral\the\count@ pt\endcsname
+  \csname #3\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\fi\endgroup
+\begin{picture}(0,13)(27,810)
+\put( 27,810){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{\smash{\SetFigFont{10}{12.0}{rm}Hello, World}}}
+\end{picture}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-3.1-doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-3.1-doc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2bde7ee926c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-3.1-doc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+% $Id: text-3.1-doc.tex,v 1.1 1995/05/07 16:52:38 schrod Exp $
+%------------------------------------------------------------
+
+%
+% Test for xfig text typesetting of transfig 3.1 output
+%
+
+
+\input ../xfig.tex
+
+$$
+\hbox{\input text-3.1.latex }
+$$
+
+
+
+\bye
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Local Variables:
+mode: plain-TeX
+TeX-parse-self: nil
+TeX-auto-save: nil
+TeX-master: t
+End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-3.1.latex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-3.1.latex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c35c42a91a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/jsmisc/xfig/text-3.1.latex
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+\setlength{\unitlength}{0.01250000in}%
+%
+\begingroup\makeatletter\ifx\SetFigFont\undefined%
+\gdef\SetFigFont#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \reset@font\fontsize{#1}{#2pt}%
+  \fontfamily{#3}\fontseries{#4}\fontshape{#5}%
+  \selectfont}%
+\fi\endgroup%
+\begin{picture}(0,13)(27,808)
+\put( 27,810){\makebox(0,0)[lb]{\smash{\SetFigFont{10}{12.0}{\familydefault}{\mddefault}{\updefault}Hello, World}}}
+\end{picture}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c1da39eb921
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/changes.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,239 @@
+Thu Apr  6 12:32:28 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@booth35.ecs>
+
+	* pdcguide.tex: Added dtxtags to file lists and TAGS to Makefile
+	targets.  Shortened a couple of table entries by a word each so
+	that the GPL doesn't overflow onto the next page.
+
+	* maamac.dtx (\toksa): Added definition of toksa
+
+	* pdcfmt2.dtx (\alphabetletter): Added missing backslash.
+
+	* pdcoput5.dtx (section{Routines for balanced columns}): Removed
+	spurious space from \makepartialpage
+
+	* dtxtags: New shellscript, generates an etags-format tags file.
+	* makefile.in (mostlyclean): Added support for dtxtags.
+
+
+Thu Mar 30 17:16:01 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@booth10.ecs>
+
+	* Release 1.1
+
+	* makefile.in (dist): Made version.txt format prettier.
+
+	* Changed all header comments to say doc/plain/pdcmac for the sake
+	of TWG-TDS 0.61.
+
+Tue Mar 28 13:18:47 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdccode.dtx: Recognizes the "locker" field of RCS id.
+	Puts line numbers in headline.
+
+	* pdcfsel.dtx: Tidied documentation.  Changed \fsel_... to \FSEL...
+
+Fri Mar 24 17:08:36 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+
+	* pinstall: Created a shellscript `pinstall' to replace `install'
+	command on systems without GNU `install'.  Trying to keep track of
+	all the stupid variants of `install' is pointlessly difficult.
+	* configure: uses 'pinstall' script if not gnu 'install'.
+	* makefile.in (install): much simplified by assuming either GNU
+	"install" or my "pinstall".  Changed "mkdirhier" ro "pmkdir" at
+	the same time.  Added manpages for the three shellscripts included
+	with the package.
+	
+	* pdcmisc.dtx (section{PDCIMTH}): Added version ID \message.
+
+	* makefile.in: Added new target, version.txt, which is the version
+	IDs of all the DTX files.  Checked all the DTX files in to RCS (at
+	long last).
+
+Thu Mar 16 12:52:02 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdccode.dtx: notepars now allow \rightskip to shrink.
+
+	* pdcfmt2.dtx: chased down some overfull hboxes
+
+	* pdcsty.dtx (section{Starting up}): Changed name of pdcmasub to
+	the more sensible pdccmsub.
+
+Tue Mar 14 12:58:09 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@booth8.ecs>
+
+	* pdcadobe.dtx: Corrected definition or rbrace.
+
+Thu Mar  9 16:42:07 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcmisc.dtx (pdccmsub.dtx): new name for pdcmasub.dtx.
+	\currency, \orda, \ordo, \florin, \brdecimal, \permille.
+
+Wed Mar  8 16:53:36 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcsty.dtx (\abstract): Stop from generating underfull
+        hbox.
+
+	* pdcadobe.dtx (\brdecimal): Removed spurious redefinition.
+
+	* pdcguide.tex: Added list of file suffixes.  Added
+	pdcadobe.{dtx,tex} and pdcl1maa.{dtx,tex} to lists of files.
+	Added PostScript title for when POstScript fonts available.
+
+Mon Mar  6 16:54:15 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcl1maa.dtx: New file
+
+	* pdcsty.dtx: Chased down some overful hboxes.
+
+Fri Mar  3 18:12:02 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+        * pdcfmt2.dtx (verbatim): added \ttminus, so that PostScript fonts
+	used as typewriter fonts can change hyphens to minus signs.
+
+	* pdcsty.dtx: Added use of \asyfam, etc.  
+
+	* pdcadobe.dtx: Tested with pdcguide and tested ISO Latin-1
+	support, found several bugs.
+
+Thu Mar  2 18:08:48 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcsty.dtx: Added rudimentary  support for PostScript fonts.
+
+	* pdcadobe.dtx: New file!!
+
+Tue Feb 28 10:17:40 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcsty.dtx: Removed attempts to make a Concrete style; there
+	really doesn't seem to be much point.  Put more of the common code
+	in pdc{lft,doc}1.tex.
+
+	* pdcguide.tex: reorganized sections, expanded user guide and
+	installation sections.
+
+Mon Feb 27 14:43:43 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcguide.tex: Made it into a "doc" not a "lft"; expanded
+	installation section (unfinished)
+
+	* pdccode.dtx: Added summary to end of file, and some backgorund
+	info at the start.
+	(section{Layout}): CHanged width to 72 \tentt characters not 36
+	\tenrm ems.
+
+Fri Feb 24 18:55:30 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcguide.tex: Removed use of PostScript fonts -- now does a
+	title using the circlew10 font!
+
+Thu Feb 23 16:50:33 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* install.txt: new file
+
+	* configure (INSTALL): sets INSTALL and INSTALL_DATA to "cp
+	-p" and puts package name at end of "$docdir". 
+
+	* magrman.tex (\twocolgr): adjusted to use new \rigidbalance syntax
+
+	* pdcoput5.dtx (section{Making a page vbox}): adjust colht by
+	
+	(section{Routines for balanced coumns}): \rigidpalane no longer
+	takes an argukent for the width of the completed columns; instead
+	one should enclose \rigidbalance in \hbox to ...{...}.  Eliminated
+	some variables (\RGDfirstcol etc.).
+
+	*depth* of topbox and partialpage as well as height.
+
+	* pdccode.dtx: New file, which generates tmp.tex (the Makefile
+	checks it isn't truncated before renaming it to pdccode.tex).
+	(section{Code sections}): added \~ for a tilde in expanded lines.
+
+	Changed text width and suppressed parindent at start of sections.
+	Copied verbatim text from pdcfmt2.dtx.  Added \filelocker; this is
+	empty if the file has been checked in.
+
+Wed Feb 22 15:46:06 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcoput5.dtx: Added section headings and brief comments on the
+	rest of the file.  Seached out overfull hboxes in the text so
+	far.
+	
+	(section{Routines for balanced coumns}): Added
+	\rigidbalancedpartialpage.
+
+Thu Feb 16 18:04:55 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcfmt2.dtx: Adjusted a little so that it now TeXs without hbox
+        warnings.
+
+	* pdccode.tex: Changed to allow ragged-right printing inside
+	footnotes.  Added \title and \author commands, and set \everycode
+	and \evercodeline so that some common code at the start of DTX
+	files is factored out.
+
+Wed Feb 15 15:45:30 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcsty.dtx (section{Starting up}): pdcoput->pdcoput5
+
+	* configure (cfgdate): Configuration shellscript, made by cutting
+	down the pdctt configure script.
+
+	* pdcoput5.dtx: Changed name to prevent conflict with old version
+	of pdcoput (since the calling interface is changing).
+
+Tue Feb 14 12:20:41 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcoput.dtx (section{How to make one column}): Change to just
+	use vertical mode material to do illustrations insteasd of
+	separate <dimen> and caption arguments.  Added \topillustration
+	and \botillustration commands.
+
+	* pdcsty.dtx (section{Layout}): foomarge->foomg to match pdcoput.dtx
+
+	* config.status.sh: placeholder for configuration script.
+
+Mon Feb 13 14:23:50 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcoput.dtx: New file, made from pdcoput.tex 4.1.7.
+
+Fri Feb 10 13:46:10 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdcguide.tex: Added a copy of the GNU GPL to the end.
+
+	* copying.tex: new file -- a formatted copy of copying.txt, which
+	is the GNU General Public License.
+
+	* *.dtx: Updated header comments to include GPL.
+
+Thu Feb  9 10:38:59 1995  Damian Cugley  <pdc@boothp1.ecs>
+
+	* pdccode2.tex: a new version of pdccode that allows multiple
+	files to be generated.
+
+	* pdcsty.dtx:  replaces ma55doc.dtx, pdccm*.dtx.  Uses pdccode2 to
+	generate multiple files.  Sectioning commands go in pdcdoc1.tex
+	and pdclft1.tex.
+
+	* pdcguide.tex: new file
+
+Sat Dec  3 16:26:00 1994  P. Damian Cugley  (pdc@alleged)
+
+	* pdccode.tex:
+	Set the vertical margins so that files may be printed on American
+	paper without losing any of the print.
+
+	* pdcfsel.dtx: 
+	Added a title line on the first page.  Removed the dependency of
+	the code file on pdcutil.tex by adding definitions for \expcs and
+	\noexpcs.
+
+Fri Dec  2 00:55:38 1994  P. Damian Cugley  (pdc@alleged)
+
+	* pdccode.tex:
+	Changed \rcs...\end to \rcs...\endrcs for consistency with other
+	macros that go \foo...\endfoo.
+
+	* pdcfsel.dtx: Removed spurious definiton of \n.  Changed
+	\rcs...\end to \rcs...\endrcs.  Changed name of \ldfont to
+	\loadfont.  Removed \setmag.  Now produces pdcfsel.tex not xx.tex.
+
+	* pdccode.tex: checked in with -k by pdc at 1994/12/02 00:50:24
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..34a118a9ff7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/config.status
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+# config.status -- configuration status file
+# creator: configure for pdcmac 1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24> < >
+# created: 1996-04-29
+# command: configure 
+
+case "$1" in
+    -r*|--r*)
+	shift
+	echo $0: rerunning configure 1>&2
+	exec sh configure $* ;;
+esac
+
+echo This is config.status, generated by configure for pdcmac on 1996-04-29
+
+srcdir=.
+date=1996-04-29
+files="${*-makefile}"
+sedscript='
+	s,@package@,pdcmac,
+	s,@srcdir@,.,
+	s,@texmf@,//texmf,
+	s,@configure@,configure,
+	s,@INSTALL@,install,
+	s,@INSTALL_DATA@,$(INSTALL) --mode=644,
+	s,@texdir@,$(texmf)/tex/plain/$(package),
+	s,@docdir@,$(texmf)/doc/plain/$(package),
+'
+
+for file in $files; do
+	echo $0: writing $file... 1>&2
+	sed -e 's,Template for configure,Generated from '$file'.in on '$date' by '$0, \
+		-e "$sedscript" $srcdir/$file.in > $file || exit 1
+done
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..267494d6269
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/configure
@@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+#  Mini-configure script for PDCMAC for the benefit of UNIX users
+
+version="1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24>"
+
+#  Takes arguments a bit like the GNU autoconf, but only uses them to
+#  try to guess the TeX root directory
+
+package=pdcmac
+date=`date +19%y-%m-%d`
+files=makefile
+unique=pdcmisc.dtx
+cmd="$0 $@"
+me=`basename $0`
+
+# The flag used with "test" to see if a directory is writable.
+# For debugging, I sometimes set writable to -d so that 
+#  the searches will pretend that I have write-access to system
+#  directories (so I can simulate running the script as root)
+writable=-w
+
+echo "This is configure for $package $version $cfgdate"
+
+tmp=${TMPDIR-/tmp}/cfg$$
+trap 'rm -f $tmp; exit 1' 1 2 15
+
+while test $# -gt 0; do
+	case $1 in
+	    -n*|--n*)
+		nocreate=t ;;
+	    -v*|--v*)
+		echo "configure for $package $version <$cfgauthor $cfgdate>" 1>&2
+		exit 0 ;;
+	    -h*|--h*)
+		cat 1>&2 <<@EOF
+USAGE:  configure [ option ]...
+
+Running this script creates config.status and optionally 
+$files.
+
+Options:
+    -h, -help, --help, -v, -version, --version
+	print a message and exit
+
+    -p DIR, -prefix DIR, --prefix=DIR
+	prefix for installed file names, for example /usr/local
+
+    -e DIR, -exec_prefix DIR, --exec_prefix=DIR
+	ignored
+
+    -t DIR, -texmf DIR, --texmf=DIR
+	prefix for all TeX-related installed file names, for
+	example /usr/texmf or /usr/local/lib/tex
+
+    -w tds, -with tds, --with-tds
+	Assume a TDS-like directory tree
+@EOF
+		exit 0 ;;
+	    --p*=*)
+		prefix=`expr $1 : '--p.*=\(.*\)'` ;;
+	    -p|-prefix|--p*)
+		prefix=$2; shift ;;
+	    -p*)
+		prefix=`expr $1 : '-p\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    --s*=*)
+		srcdir=`expr $1 : '--s.*=\(.*\)'` ;;
+	    -s|-srcdir|--s*)
+		srcdir=$2; shift ;;
+	    -s*)
+		srcdir=`expr $1 : '-s\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    --t*=*)
+		texmf=`expr $1 : '--t.*=\(.*\)'` ;;
+	    -t|-texmf|--t*)
+		texmf=$2; shift ;;
+	    -t*)
+		texmf=`expr $1 : '-t\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    --f*=*)
+		fonts=`expr $1 : '--f.*=\(.*\)'` ;;
+	    -f|-fonts|--f*)
+		fonts=$2; shift ;;
+	    -f*)
+		fonts=`expr $1 : '-f\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    --w*-*)
+		with=$with/`expr $1 : '--w.*-\(.*\)'`/ ;;
+	    -w|-with|--w*)
+		with=$with/$2/; shift ;;
+	    -w*)
+		with=$with/`expr $1 : '-w\(.*\)$'`/ ;;
+	    -e*|--e*=*)
+		;;
+	    -e|--e*)
+		shift ;;
+	    *)
+		echo $me: ignoring $1 1>&2
+		;;
+	esac
+	shift
+done
+
+#  Check for the "with" keywords we're interested in:
+case $with in */tds/*) tds=t ;; esac
+#  case $with in */bigendian/*) bigendian=t ;; esac
+	#  endianness doesn't matter because no fonts in this package
+
+
+#  Find out how to print a dot with no newline
+n=-n c=
+echo $n x$c > $tmp
+case "`cat $tmp`" in
+    -n*)
+	n= c='\\c' ;;
+esac
+dot="$n .$c"
+
+
+#  INSTALL -- oh, I can't be bothered trying to be clever.
+if install --version 2>&1 | grep GNU >/dev/null; then
+	INSTALL="install"
+else
+	INSTALL='$(srcdir)/pinstall'
+fi
+INSTALL_DATA='$(INSTALL) --mode=644'
+echo $me: install files with $INSTALL
+
+
+# find srcdir
+if test -z "$srcdir" ; then
+	echo $n "$me: searching for srcdir (package directory)..$c"
+	for d in . `dirname $0` ..; do
+		echo $dot
+		if test -f $d/$unique; then
+			echo srcdir=$d
+			srcdir=$d
+			break
+		fi
+	done
+fi
+
+if test -z "$srcdir"; then
+	echo ""
+	echo $me: fatal error: could not find sourcdir
+	exit 1
+fi
+
+#  User might use --prefix to give the TeX prefix:
+
+if test -z "$texmf"; then
+	case "$prefix" in
+	    */texmf|*/tex)
+		texmf=$prefix ;;
+	esac
+fi
+
+#  If $texmf is not set, then search for it
+#  We look in all sorts of prefixes like /usr/local (with or without extra
+#  lib), using all sorts of directiry names like "tex"
+#  
+
+if test -z "$texmf"; then
+	prefixes="$prefix 
+		`echo $TEXINPUTS:$TEXFONTS | tr : \\\\12 | 
+		sed -n -e 's,/[Tt]e[Xx].*,,p' -e 's,/font.*,,p' | uniq` 
+		/ /usr /usr/local /opts /p /packages /package
+		/pd /usr/pd /usr/local/pd /usr/contrib /usr/TeX
+		$HOME"
+	echo $n $me: searching for \$texmf..$c
+	for d in texmf tex TeX tex3.14 tex3 tex82; do
+		for p in $prefixes; do
+			echo $dot
+			if test -d $p/$d -a $writable $p/$d; then
+				echo texmf=$p/$d
+				texmf=$p/$d
+				break 2
+			fi
+			if test -d $p/lib/$d -a $writable $p/lib/$d; then
+				echo texmf=$p/lib/$d
+				texmf=$p/lib/$d
+				break 2
+			fi
+		done
+	done
+fi
+if test -z "$texmf"; then
+	echo ""
+	echo $me: fatal error: could not guess a texmf directory 1>&2
+	exit 1
+fi
+if test ! -d "$texmf" -o ! -w "$texmf"; then
+	echo $me: warning: $texmf needs to be a writable directory 1>&2
+fi
+
+
+#  If --with-tds not set, try to guess whether we have found
+#   a TDS directory or not:
+if test -n "$tds" || test -d $texmf/tex/plain; then
+	tds=t 
+	echo "$me: using TWG-TDS 0.61 directory structure"
+else
+	echo "$me: using old-style directory structure :-("
+fi
+
+
+#  Start making the config.status file
+
+f=config.status
+
+# Special care is taken with the -n option
+#  -- -n is not to be included by default when configure is run with 
+#     "config.status -r", so it must be removed from $cmd
+#  -- -n (or other options) may be included on the command line 
+#      of "config.status -r" and will be passed to configure
+cmd2=`echo $cmd | sed 's/ --*n[a-z-]*//g'`
+cat >$f <<@EOF
+# config.status -- configuration status file
+# creator: configure for $package $version <$cfgauthor $cfgdate>
+# created: $date
+# command: $cmd
+
+case "\$1" in
+    -r*|--r*)
+	shift
+	echo \$0: rerunning $cmd2 1>&2
+	exec sh $cmd2 \$* ;;
+esac
+
+echo This is config.status, generated by configure for $package on $date
+
+srcdir=$srcdir
+date=`date +19%y-%m-%d`
+files="\${*-$files}"
+sedscript='
+	s,@package@,$package,
+	s,@srcdir@,$srcdir,
+	s,@texmf@,$texmf,
+	s,@configure@,$0,
+	s,@INSTALL@,$INSTALL,
+	s,@INSTALL_DATA@,$INSTALL_DATA,
+@EOF
+
+if test -n "$tds"; then
+	echo >>$f "	s,@texdir@,\$(texmf)/tex/plain/\$(package),"
+	echo >>$f "	s,@docdir@,\$(texmf)/doc/plain/\$(package),"
+else
+	echo $n $me: searching for TeX macro dir..$c; found=
+	for d in inputs macros; do
+		echo $dot
+		if test -d $texmf/$d -a $writable $texmf/$d; then
+			echo $texmf/$d
+			echo >>$f "	s,@texdir@,$texmf/$d,"
+			found=t
+			break
+		fi
+	done
+	if test -z "$found"; then 
+		echo ""
+		echo $0: fatal error: TeX macro dir NOT FOUND 1>&2
+		exit 1
+	fi
+
+	# now same again for a documentation directory
+	echo $n $me: searching for documentation dir..$c; found=
+	for p in $texmf $fonts $prefixes; do
+		for d in doc doc/tex docs docs/tex ; do
+			echo $dot
+			if test -d $p/$d -a $writable $p/$d; then
+				echo $p/$d/$package
+				echo >>$f "	s,@docdir@,$p/$d/\$(package),"
+				found=t
+				break 2
+			fi
+		done
+	done
+	if test -z "$found"; then 
+		echo ""
+		echo $0: warning: documentation dir NOT FOUND 1>&2
+	fi
+fi		
+
+
+# Finish off the config.status file:
+
+cat >>$f <<'@EOF'
+'
+
+for file in $files; do
+	echo $0: writing $file... 1>&2
+	sed -e 's,Template for configure,Generated from '$file'.in on '$date' by '$0, \
+		-e "$sedscript" $srcdir/$file.in > $file || exit 1
+done
+
+exit 0
+@EOF
+
+echo $me: configuration status written on config.status
+
+if test -z "$nocreate"; then
+	sh config.status
+fi
+
+rm -f $tmp
+exit 0
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..165cc4ab2fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/contents.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+total 498
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         1006 Mar 20 14:23 00readme.txt
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         7984 Apr  6 16:10 changes.txt
+-rwxr-xr-x   1 pdc      mc86         6910 Mar 24 18:56 configure
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86            0 Apr  6 16:10 contents.txt
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        19466 Mar  8 18:16 copying.tex
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        19038 Feb 10 11:02 copying.txt
+-rwxr-xr-x   1 pdc      mc86         1282 Apr  6 14:38 dtxtags
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         4267 Apr  6 12:19 dtxtags.1
+-rwxr-xr-x   1 pdc      mc86          787 Mar 24 18:34 fig2epsf
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         1101 Mar 27 16:56 fig2epsf.1
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         3196 Feb 23 18:51 install.txt
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        21818 Apr  6 14:34 maamac.dtx
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         7785 Mar 29 17:32 magrmac.dtx
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        21216 Feb 23 17:39 magrman.tex
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         4854 Apr  6 12:43 makefile.in
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86          387 Apr  6 14:38 news.txt
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        10187 Apr  6 12:42 oput01.eps
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         8784 Feb 13 17:07 oput01.fig
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        12285 Apr  6 12:42 oput02.eps
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         8032 Feb 13 15:34 oput02.fig
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        20544 Mar 30 17:07 pdcadobe.dtx
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        29428 Mar 30 17:08 pdccode.dtx
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         8194 Apr  6 12:44 pdccode.tex
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         7961 Mar  3 15:41 pdccode2.tex
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        38300 Apr  6 12:55 pdcfmt2.dtx
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        23174 Mar 28 20:06 pdcfsel.dtx
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        61708 Apr  6 16:04 pdcguide.dvi
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        31674 Apr  6 16:04 pdcguide.tex
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         8670 Mar 30 17:10 pdcl1maa.dtx
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86           27 Apr  6 12:20 pdcmacvn.tex
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        18597 Mar 30 17:13 pdcmisc.dtx
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         5207 Mar 29 15:54 pdcmondo.tex
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        32746 Apr  6 12:51 pdcoput5.dtx
+-r--r--r--   1 pdc      mc86        37441 Mar 30 17:12 pdcsty.dtx
+-rwxr-xr-x   1 pdc      mc86         1695 Mar 24 19:10 pinstall
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         1744 Mar 27 15:47 pinstall.1
+-rwxr-xr-x   1 pdc      mc86         1876 Mar 27 14:22 pmkdir
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86         1538 Mar 27 16:49 pmkdir.1
+-rw-r--r--   1 pdc      mc86          789 Apr  6 14:38 version.txt
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..184f8803bdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/copying.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,373 @@
+\section{GNU General Public License\ifnum\pageno>0 \note{This licence is reproduced
+	verbatim, therefore the American spelling is used.}\fi}
+	Version 2, June 1991
+
+\noindent
+     Copyright \copyright~1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+	675~Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
+
+     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of
+     this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+
+\noindent{\bf Preamble}\quad
+  The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom
+to share and change it.  By contrast, the GNU General Public License is
+intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to
+make sure the software is free for all its users.  This General Public
+License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and
+to any other program whose authors commit to using it.  (Some other Free
+Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General
+Public License instead.)  You can apply it to your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if
+you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
+free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have.  You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code.  And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+  We protect your rights with two steps: (1)~copyright the software, and
+(2)~offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+  Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software.  If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+  Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents.  We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary.  To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+\bigskip
+\noindent{\bf TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
+		MODIFICATION\advance\rightskip0pt plus 1em \par}
+\medskip
+
+  1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a
+     notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+     under the terms of this General Public License.  The `Program',
+     below, refers to any such program or work, and a `work based on the
+     Program' means either the Program or any derivative work under
+     copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a
+     portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
+     translated into another language.  (Hereinafter, translation is
+     included without limitation in the term `modification'.)  Each
+     licensee is addressed as `you'.
+
+     Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
+     not covered by this License; they are outside its scope.  The act
+     of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the
+     Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
+     the Program (independent of having been made by running the
+     Program).  Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+  2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source
+     code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+     conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+     copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+     notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+     warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of
+     this License along with the Program.
+
+     You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+     and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange
+     for a fee.
+
+  3. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of
+     it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+     distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+     above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+\numbered
+	\\You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+          stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+        \\You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that
+          in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or
+          any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to
+          all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+        \\If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+          when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+          interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display
+          an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and
+          a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
+          provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
+          program under these conditions, and telling the user how to
+          view a copy of this License.  (Exception: if the Program
+          itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
+          announcement, your work based on the Program is not required
+          to print an announcement.)
+\endnumbered 
+
+     These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.  If
+     identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
+     Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
+     works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply
+     to those sections when you distribute them as separate works.  But
+     when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
+     work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on
+     the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees
+     extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
+     regardless of who wrote it.
+
+     Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
+     contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
+     intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
+     derivative or collective works based on the Program.
+
+     In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the
+     Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a
+     volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other
+     work under the scope of this License.
+
+  4. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+     under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms
+     of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
+     following:
+
+\numbered
+       \\ Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+          source code, which must be distributed under the terms of
+          Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
+          software interchange; or,
+
+       \\ Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+          years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+          cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+          machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+          distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+          medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+       \\ Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+          to distribute corresponding source code.  (This alternative is
+          allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+          received the program in object code or executable form with
+          such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+\endnumbered
+
+     The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+     making modifications to it.  For an executable work, complete
+     source code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
+     plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
+     used to control compilation and installation of the executable.
+     However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need
+     not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source
+     or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
+     on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless
+     that component itself accompanies the executable.
+
+     If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+     access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+     access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+     distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+     compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+  5. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+     void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
+     License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
+     from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated
+     so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+  6. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+     signed it.  However, nothing else grants you permission to modify
+     or distribute the Program or its derivative works.  These actions
+     are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.
+     Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
+     based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License
+     to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
+     distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
+
+  7. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+     Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+     original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject
+     to these terms and conditions.  You may not impose any further
+     restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
+     herein.  You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
+     parties to this License.
+
+  8. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+     infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
+     issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
+     agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
+     License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
+     License.  If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously
+     your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
+     obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
+     Program at all.  For example, if a patent license would not permit
+     royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive
+     copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you
+     could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
+     from distribution of the Program.
+
+     If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable
+     under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is
+     intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply
+     in other circumstances.
+
+     It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+     patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
+     any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
+     the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+     implemented by public license practices.  Many people have made
+     generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+     through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+     system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is
+     willing to distribute software through any other system and a
+     licensee cannot impose that choice.
+
+     This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed
+     to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+  9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+     certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces,
+     the original copyright holder who places the Program under this
+     License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
+     excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only
+     in or among countries not thus excluded.  In such case, this
+     License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of
+     this License.
+
+ 10. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+     versions of the General Public License from time to time.  Such new
+     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+     Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
+     Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to
+     it and `any later version', you have the option of following the
+     terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
+     published by the Free Software Foundation.  If the Program does not
+     specify a version number of this License, you may choose any
+     version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+ 11. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+     programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the
+     author to ask for permission.  For software which is copyrighted by
+     the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
+     Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.  Our decision
+     will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of
+     all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+     and reuse of software generally.
+
+\medbreak\centerline{\bf NO WARRANTY}\nobreak\smallskip\nobreak
+\begingroup\tolerance=3000 \advance\rightskip 0pt plus 1em
+
+ 12. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+     WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
+     LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
+     AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY
+     OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+     LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
+     FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
+     PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
+     DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
+     OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 13. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+     WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
+     MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
+     LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
+     INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
+     INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
+     DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU
+     OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY
+     OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
+     ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+\endgroup
+\bigskip \centerline{\bf END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS}\medbreak
+
+\noindent{\bf How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs}\quad
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
+terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+`copyright' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+\quotation
+     {\it one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does}
+
+     Copyright (C) 19{\it yy}  {\it name of author}
+\smallskip
+     This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+     it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+     the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+     (at your option) any later version.
+\smallskip
+     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+     but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+     MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+     GNU General Public License for more details.
+\smallskip
+     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+     along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+     Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+\endquotation
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+\quotation
+     Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19YY NAME OF AUTHOR
+     Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+     This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+     under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+\endquotation
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the
+appropriate parts of the General Public License.  Of course, the
+commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show
+c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever suits your
+program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a `copyright disclaimer' for the program, if
+necessary.  Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+\quotation
+     Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+     `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+     SIGNATURE OF TY COON, 1 April 1989
+     Ty Coon, President of Vice
+\endquotation
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
+into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you
+may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications
+with the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library
+General Public License instead of this License.
+
+
+%Local Variables:
+%tex-mother-file: "pdcguide.tex"
+%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a54f61760ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+
+# dtxtags -- getenerate a TAGS file for the DTX files
+version="1.1 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-04-06>"
+
+# The grep line produces LINE:BYTE:PATTERN
+#  the sed converts this to LINE:BYTE:PATTERN:TAG
+
+tmp=${TMP-/tmp}/mktags$$
+trap 'rm -f $tmp*' 0
+
+me=`basename $0`
+outfile=TAGS
+
+touch $tmp
+while test $# -gt 0; do
+	case $1 in
+	    --o*=*)
+		outfile=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    -o|--o*)
+		outfile=$2; shift ;;
+	    -o*)
+		outfile=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    -h|--h*)
+		cat <<@EOF
+$me: construct an etags-style tags file from DTX files.
+
+USAGE:
+    $me [ --output=OUTFILE ] [ INFILE... ]
+    $me --help | --version
+@EOF
+		exit 0 ;;
+	    -V|--v*)
+		echo This is $me $version
+		exit 0 ;;
+	    -*)
+		echo >&2 $me: $1: not understood, try $me --help
+		exit 2 ;;
+	    *)
+		i=$1
+		echo >&2 $1:
+		egrep -nb '^[	 ]\|[ 	]*\\([a-z]*def|new)' <$1 | 
+		sed '
+			s/\([ 	]*|\\[a-z]*\\[A-Za-z]*\).*$/\1/
+			t finish
+			s/\([ 	]*|\\[a-z]*\\.\).*$/\1/
+			t finish
+			s/\([ 	]*|\\[a-z]*[^a-z]\).*$/\1/
+			: finish
+			s/\([0-9]*\):\([0-9]*\):\(.*\)/\3\1,\2/
+		' > $tmp.a
+		wc $tmp.a
+		echo '' >> $tmp
+		echo $1,`wc -c <$tmp.a` >>$tmp
+		cat $tmp.a >> $tmp 
+		;;
+	esac
+	shift
+
+done
+
+mv 2>/dev/null $outfile $outfile.bak && 
+echo >&2 backup written to $outfile.bak
+
+mv $tmp $outfile 
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1d37d72bac7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/dtxtags.1
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+.TH DTXTAGS 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-04-06>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE"
+.SH NAME
+dtxtags \- generate an Emacs tags (etags) file from DTX files
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.na
+.B dtxtags
+[
+.BI \-\-output= outfile
+] [
+.I infile
+]\|.\|.\|.
+.br
+.B dtxtags
+.B \-\-help
+|
+.B \-\-version
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.na
+This is a shellscript that looks for definitions in
+.B dtx 
+files
+(Documented TeX Macros, as used in the 
+.SM PDCMAC
+package), and generates a tags file in
+.IR etags (1)
+format.  The tags file will be called
+.SM
+.B TAGS 
+by default.
+Any old tags file will be written to
+.BR TAGS.bak .
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.BI \-\-output= outfile, " \-o " outfile
+Write tags to
+.I outfile
+instead of the default.
+Any existing file with that name will be renamed
+.IB outfile .bak
+first.
+.TP
+.BR \-\-help ", " \-h
+Print a summary of options and exit.
+.TP
+.BR \-\-version ", " \-V
+Print version identification and exit.
+.SH "INPUT SYNTAX"
+This section describes the constructs in the
+.B dtx
+that will be recognized as tags.  You should already be acquainted with
+TeX terminology like `control sequence'.
+.PP
+A
+.I keyword
+is (1)\ a TeX control sequence
+.I containing
+.RB ` def ',
+such as
+.B \edef
+or
+.B \edefverbatim
+or
+.BR \emathchardef ,
+or (2)\ a control sequence
+.I starting
+with
+.RB ` \enew ',
+like
+.B \enewif
+and
+.BR \enewcount .
+Keywords define the
+.I tag
+(a control sequence or single character) immediately following.
+.PP
+Keywords are recognized only if immediately following a
+.RB ` | '
+at the start of a line, the code used to introduce macro code in
+.B dtx
+files.
+.PP
+There may be whitespace between the start of the line and the
+vertical bar, and between the vertical bar and the keyword (this means a
+few definitions appearing within definitions are spuriously tagged, but
+this should be harmless).
+.SH "OUTPUT FORMAT"
+This section sumarizes the syntax of the tag file that is generated,
+because the documentation for
+.IR etags (1)
+omits it. Since this syntax description was made by reverse-engineering
+.I etags
+output, it should not be taken as definitive!
+.PP
+A tags file is composed of
+.I sections 
+catenated together,
+each section made of a
+.I header
+followed by the
+.IR body .
+All numbers are expressed in ASCII in decimal notation.
+.PP
+The header consists of a form feed, a newline, the name of the file the
+tags are found in, a comma, and the size in bytes of the body and a
+newline.
+.PP
+The body consists of
+.I entries
+which may be in
+old format or new format.
+Old format entries are of the form
+.IP "" 4n
+.I fragment
+.B \e177
+.IB line ,
+.I byte
+.SM NL
+.PP
+where
+.I fragment
+is a fragment from the file containing the tag (where the start of the
+fragment is at the beginning of a line in the file),
+.B \e177
+is a 
+.SM DEL
+character (character 127),
+.I line
+is the number of the line in which the fragment appears,
+.I byte
+is the position of the start of the fragment in bytes from the
+start of the file,
+and 
+.SM NL
+is a newline (character 10).
+.PP
+New format entries are of the form
+.IP "" 4n
+.I fragment
+.B \e177
+.IB line ,
+.IB byte ,
+.B \e001
+.I tag
+[
+.B \e001
+.I tag
+]\|.\|.\|.
+.SM NL
+.PP
+(two commas) where
+.B \e001
+is a
+.SM SOH
+character (character 1), and
+.I tag
+is the exact tag (necessary for C++, where the entire tag is not
+necessarily found on the definition line).  The brackets and ellipsis
+indicate that there may be one or more tags in the entry.
+.PP
+Real tags files may also have references to other tag files, but I don't
+use this feature.
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.TP
+.SM TMP
+Name of directory for temporary files.
+Default is
+.BR /tmp .
+.SH FILES
+.TP
+.SB TAGS
+Default output file name.
+.TP
+.B /tmp/mktags\(**
+Temporary files.
+.SH AUTHOR
+P. Damian Cugley
+.RI ( damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk ).
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+etags(1), emacs(1)
+.PP
+The file
+.B etc/etags.notes
+in the Emacs distribution.
+.PP
+Richard Stallman,
+.I Emacs Reference Manual
+(or the corresponding Info file).
+.PP
+P. Damian Cugley,
+.I PDCMAC User Guide
+(file
+.B pdcguide.tex
+in the
+.SM PDCMAC
+distribution),
+for information about
+.B dtx
+files.
+.SH BUGS
+This is just a shellscript emulating a subset of
+.IR etags 's
+functionality.
+.PP
+Despite the name, this program does not work with the
+.B dtx
+files used in LaTeX 2e distributions, which have a completely different
+format (and their own indexing scheme).
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..210dd47edb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+
+#  Convert Fig files to conformant EPSF-3.0 files
+#  Fig's PostScript translation creates EPSF files that cause
+#  many laser printers to abort in mid-document.
+#  This script attempts to remedy this.
+
+version="1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24>"
+
+#  Usage  fig2epsf [ -m MAG ] [ -f FONT ] [ -s FSIZE ] [
+
+case $1 in
+    -V|--version)
+	echo 'This is fig2epsf $version, using fig2dev from'
+	fig2dev -V
+	exit 0
+esac
+
+fig2dev -Lps $* | sed '
+	s/^%!$/%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0/
+	s/^%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-2.0/%!PS-Adobe-3.0 EPSF-3.0/
+	s/%%Pages: 0/%%Pages: 1/
+	/\/\$F2psDict/d
+	/\$F2psDict begin/d
+	/	end/d
+	/\/\$F2psBegin/d
+	/\/\$F2psEnd/d
+	/\$F2psBegin/d
+	/\/col-1/d
+	s/col-1//g
+	s,\$F2psDict /mtrx matrix put,/mtrx matrix def,
+	s/\$F2psEnd/showpage/
+	/%%EndProlog/a\
+\
+%%Page: 1 1
+'
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..10985153141
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/fig2epsf.1
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+.TH FIG2EPSF 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE"
+.SH NAME
+fig2epsf \- convert Fig picture files into Encapsulate PostScript format
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.na
+.B fig2epsf
+[
+.I fig2dev options
+]
+.I figfile
+.B >
+.I epsffile
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.na
+This is a shellscript that uses the 
+.IR fig2dev (1)
+program to convert files in Fig's format
+(see
+.IR fig (1)
+or
+.IR xfig (1))
+into Encapsulated PostScript Format compliant with version 3.0 of the
+.SM EPSF
+guidelines.  The 
+.SM EPSF 
+file is printed on the standard output stream.
+.PP
+This shellscript cleans up some of the redundant PostScript code that
+.I fig2dev 
+2.1.4.1 produces, so that the resulting files may be printed on a
+tiny-brained LaserWriter, and corrects the header comments so that it
+may be previewed with
+.IR ghostview (1).
+.SH AUTHOR
+P. Damian Cugley
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+fig2dev(1)
+.PP
+.I
+PostScript Language Reference Manual
+Second Edition
+(Addison\-Wesley, 1990),
+Appendix E.
+.SH BUGS
+It is possible that later versions of TransFig will produce less buggy
+PostScript files, and that these will break this shellscript.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c22a178174f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55doc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+% ma55doc.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "ma55doc.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.2",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
+%%%                   Malvern 55, 56 and 75 fonts.
+%%%                   This macro file was generated by running plain
+%%%                   TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "maamac.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
+%%%                   pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
+%%%                   pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def",
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\input pdcimth
+\input pdcmigr
+\input pdcfmt2
+\input pdchyex
+\input pdcoput5
+\input pdcfsel
+\input maamac
+\def\footnotetextmark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
+\def\footnotenotemark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
+\autoloadfonts
+\def\STYheadingT{%
+    \m{rm}{ma75a}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
+    \f{it}{ma76a}\@\f{tt}{cmtt10}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+}
+\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\newfam\rmsyfam
+\def\STYbodyT{%
+    \m{rm}{ma55a}\f{rmsy}{ma55b}\m{it}{ma56a}%
+    \m{bf}{ma75a}\f{bi}{ma76a}%
+    \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+    \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+    \f{tt}{cmtt}\f{tb}{cmsltt}%
+}
+\font\bodymi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep2
+\font\bodysy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+\font\notemi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep1
+\font\notesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
+\font\smallmi=cmmi10 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\smallsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstephalf
+\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
+\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
+\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
+\bodyfonts
+{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
+\def\PS{\csc{PostScript}}
+\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{\char"C1 }}
+\input pdcdoc.def
+\inputifexists{ma55doc.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0b72a6e99a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/ma55lft.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+% ma55lft.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "ma55lft.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.2",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
+%%%                   Malvern 55, 56 and 75 fonts.
+%%%                   This macro file was generated by running plain
+%%%                   TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "maamac.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
+%%%                   pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
+%%%                   pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def",
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\input pdcimth
+\input pdcmigr
+\input pdcfmt2
+\input pdchyex
+\input pdcoput5
+\input pdcfsel
+\input maamac
+\def\footnotetextmark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
+\def\footnotenotemark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
+\autoloadfonts
+\def\STYheadingT{%
+    \m{rm}{ma75a}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
+    \f{it}{ma76a}\@\f{tt}{cmtt10}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+}
+\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\newfam\rmsyfam
+\def\STYbodyT{%
+    \m{rm}{ma55a}\f{rmsy}{ma55b}\m{it}{ma56a}%
+    \m{bf}{ma75a}\f{bi}{ma76a}%
+    \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+    \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+    \f{tt}{cmtt}\f{tb}{cmsltt}%
+}
+\font\bodymi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep2
+\font\bodysy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+\font\notemi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep1
+\font\notesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
+\font\smallmi=cmmi10 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\smallsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstephalf
+\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
+\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
+\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
+\bodyfonts
+{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
+\def\PS{\csc{PostScript}}
+\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{\char"C1 }}
+\input pdclft.def
+\inputifexists{ma55lft.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a4398caa417
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,627 @@
+% maamac.dtx -- documentation & source for maamac.tex -*-tex-*-
+        
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "MAAMAC -- Malvern A Macros",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/maamac.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 1.5 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/04/06 13:33:44 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and is the source code for 
+%%%                the TeX definitions file maamac.tex.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
+%%%                definitions file and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
+%%%}
+
+%{{{ maamac
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+
+\document
+\rcs$Id: maamac.dtx,v 1.5 1995/04/06 13:33:44 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+
+\newcount\chcda \newcount\chcdc \newcount\chcdn
+\def\changecodes#1#2#3#4{%
+    \chcda#2\relax \chcdc#3\relax \chcdn#4\relax
+    \loop \ifnum\chcdn>0
+	#1\chcda\chcdc
+	\advance\chcda1 \advance\chcdc1 \advance\chcdn-1
+    \repeat
+}
+\changecodes\mathcode{`a}{"7461}{26}
+
+\codefile{maamac.tex}
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  introduction
+	
+\author{P. Damian Cugley}
+\title{MAAMAC---Malvern A Macros}
+\advance\seccount-1
+\section{Introduction}
+	
+	This document describes |maamac.tex|, a collection of formatting
+	macros for plain \TeX\ documents using fonts with the Malvern~A
+	encoding.  For example, it defines commands for making composite
+	letters and special symbols.
+
+\subsec{About this document}
+
+	The definitions file and this printed documentation are both in
+	|maamac.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The
+	\LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for
+	similar purposes.}  which, when processed by plain \TeX,
+	generates a fresh copy of |maamac.tex| in the current directory
+	in addition to the |dvi| file.  This ensures that the printed
+	documentation and the code it describes are identical.  The
+	|dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|.
+
+\subsec{What is in MAAMAC?}
+
+	The definitions in |maamac.tex| fall into three sections:
+\smallskip
+\item{\S1} Building {\it composite letters} like `\'e' from {\it
+	marks} like `\'{}' and {\it base letters} like `e'.  This gives
+	new definitions for commands like |\'| and |\"|.
+\item{\S2} Symbols and  special letters: replacements for existing
+	commands like |\P| (\P) and |\ae| (\ae), and new commands like
+	|\registered| and |\pounds|.
+\item{\S3} Switching between alphabets.  The Malvern~A encoding includes
+	separate small capital and medium capital alphabets in addition
+	to the usual capitals and lower case.  This section defines
+	commands for transliterating a list of tokens from one alphabet
+	to another.
+
+\smallskip\noindent
+	The first two sections make changes to commands described in
+	{\it\TeX book} Chapter~9 (and a few maths symbols from
+	Chapter~16) and defined in Appendix~B.
+	
+%}}}  introduction
+%{{{  File identification
+\subsec{File identification}
+	
+	Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
+	file.
+
+\code
+	\|\% maamac.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- Malvern A Macros
+	|
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "Macros for using the Malvern-A font coding
+	|%%%                   scheme in plain TeX documents.
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%% }
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
+	|
+\endcode
+
+%}}}
+%{{{  building composite letters
+\section{Building composite letters}
+
+	THis section redefines commands listed at the start of Chapter~9
+	of the {\it\TeX book}: |\'|, |\"|, etc.  The main difference is
+	that these now use `medium capitals' and differently-drawn marks
+	to make composite capital letters.
+
+	I~also define \<chardef tokens> called |\acuteglyph|,
+	|\twodotsglyph| which may be used to print these marks in a
+	document: `the acute mark ``\'{}''\dots' might be typeset with
+	`|the acute mark ``\acuteglyph''|\dots'.  Also, if you don't
+	like the way my macros look, you can say `|\accent\acuteglyph
+	E|' rather than having to look up its glyph number.
+
+%{{{   utility macros
+
+\subsec{Utility macros}
+
+	First some nicknames for scratch registers.
+\code
+	|\dimendef\dimena0  \dimendef\dimenb2
+	|\toksdef\toksa0
+	|\countdef\counta255
+	|\ifx\countb\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countb \fi
+	|\ifx\countc\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countc \fi
+\endcode
+
+	A macro to find the code in \TeX's internal encoding for a
+	character.  The character might be represented by (1)~a
+	character with category code~11 or~12, (2)~a token defined with
+	|\chardef|, or (3)~the token |\char| followed by a \<number>.
+\code
+	|\def\code#1{%
+	|    \ifcat#1a%
+	|        `#1
+	|    \else\ifcat#1+%
+	|        `#1
+	|    \else\ifx\char#1
+\endcode
+\hbox{\hskip6\fontdimen6\tentt 
+	\% If the first token is |\char| the rest is the
+	\<number> we want.}
+\code
+	|    \else
+	|        #1%
+	|    \fi\fi\fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	So as to make conditional macros that can be skipped over if
+	they appear nested inside another conditional, we make include
+	the token |\then| amongst the arguments, making this the `if-'
+	token to match the |\else| and |\fi| following it.  This way we
+	write, for example 
+$$\hbox{|\ifcap|\<character> |\then| \<true text>
+	|\else| \<false text> |\fi|}$$
+\code
+	|\let\then=\iffalse
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\ifcap#1\then{\expandafter\ifcapnum\code{#1}\then}
+	|\def\ifcapnum#1\then{\ifnum\lccode#1=#1}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\iflower#1\then{\expandafter\iflowernum\code{#1}\then}
+	|\def\iflowernum#1\then{\ifnum\uccode#1=#1}
+\endcode
+
+	A macro to extract the slant-per-point parameter of a font in
+	toe form of a \TeX\ \<factor>.
+\code
+	|\def\fontslant#1{\expandafter\stripPT\the\fontdimen1#1}
+\smallbreak
+	|\begingroup \uccode`2=`p \uccode`3=`t \uppercase{\toksa{\endgroup
+	|    \def\\#123{#1}
+	|}} \the\toksa
+	|\let\stripPT=\\
+\endcode
+%}}}   utility macros
+%{{{   macros for placing marks
+	
+\subsec{Macros for placing marks}
+
+	This simple macro places the text |#3| at displaced
+	$(\hbox{|#1|},\hbox{|#2|})$ from current position:
+\code
+	|\def\putxy#1#2#3{\leavevmode\rlap{\hskip#1\raise#2\hbox{#3}}}
+\endcode
+
+	Now we have a generic mark-placement macro.  It is similar to
+	the |\accent| primitive, but takes two extra parameters:
+$$ 
+ 	\hbox{|\putmarkxy|\arg{$xf$}\arg{$dy$}\arg{$mark$}\arg{$base$}}
+$$ 
+ 	The horizontal position $xf$ of the optical centre of the base
+	letter (ignoring slant) is expressed as a \<factor> (i.e.,
+	decimal fraction of the width of the base glyph).  The vertical
+	displacement $dy$ is expressed as a fragment of \TeX\ code that
+	will calculate $dy$.  The code is expanded after setting box~0
+	to contain the base glyph, and must put the result in |\dimena|.
+	For example, we could define
+$$
+ 	\hbox{|\def\fakeaccent{\putmarkxy{0.5}{\dimena\ht0
+	\advance\dimena-1ex }}|}
+$$
+ 	This produces an approximation to the primitive |\accent|
+	command.
+
+	Given the $x$-factor $xf$, a base glyph with width $wd$, a font
+	with slant $s$, the horizontal displacement $dx$ is given by
+$$
+ 	dx = xf \times wd + s \times dy\quad.
+$$
+ 	In this macro it is stored in |\dimenb|.
+\code
+	|\def\putmarkxy#1#2#3#4{{%
+	|    \setbox0=\hbox{#4}#2\relax
+	|    \dimenb#1\wd0 \advance\dimenb\fontslant\font\dimena
+	|    \leavevmode
+	|    \putxy{\dimenb}{\dimena}{\hbox to 0pt{\hss\char#3\hss}}%
+	|    \box0
+	|}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\putmarky{\putmarkxy{0.5}}
+\endcode
+%}}}   macros for placing marks
+%{{{   type I marks
+	
+\subsec{Type~I Marks}
+	
+	A Type~I mark is one which does not have any scope for being
+	`squashed' to go over capital letters---for example, the
+	two-dots mark `\"{}' and macron `\={}'.  
+	
+	Here's a macro for placing a Type~I mark given by |#1| (a
+	\<number>) over base glyph |#2| (which is anything that |\code|
+	understands).  The difference between this macro and simply
+	using |\accent| is (1)~if presented with a capital letter it
+	will use the corresponding medium capital letter and (2)~the the
+	mark is raised by an amount intended to centre it vertically
+	between the top of the base letter and the top of the
+	body-height---assuming it was original centered between
+	body-height and $x$-height.
+
+	If $H$ is the body height, $h$ the height of the base glyph, 
+$$ \mathcode`/="202F 
+    \eqalign{dy &= { H + h \over   2 } - { H + 1\,{\rm
+		ex} \over 2}\cr
+	&= \textstyle { 1\over2}h - {1\over2}\,{\rm ex}\cr}
+$$
+\code
+	|\def\typeImark#1#2{{%
+	|    \setbox2=\hbox{#2}%
+	|    \ifdim \ht2=1ex
+	|        \accent#1\relax#2%
+	|    \else
+	|        \counta\code{#2}%
+	|        \ifnum\counta>64 \ifnum\counta<96
+	|            \advance\counta 128
+	|        \fi \fi
+	|        \putmarky{\dimena0.5\ht0 \advance\dimena-0.5ex }
+	|                {#1}{\char\counta}%
+	|    \fi
+	|}}
+\endcode
+
+	Finally we define the composite-letter-building commands.
+\code
+	|\chardef\dotglyph22     \def\.{\typeImark\dotglyph}
+	|\chardef\twodotsglyph23 \def\"{\typeImark\twodotsglyph}
+	|\chardef\macronglyph150 \def\={\typeImark\macronglyph}
+	|\chardef\longmacronglyph151 
+	|        \def\longmacronmark{\typeImark\longmacronglyph}
+\endcode
+%}}}   type I marks
+%{{{   type II marks
+	
+\subsec{Type~II Marks}
+
+	These marks have an alternative glyph for use of capital and
+	medium capital letters.  As with |\typeImark|, |#1| is a
+	\<number> and |#2| is anything understood by |\code|.
+\code
+	|\def\typeIImark#1#2{{%
+	|    \counta#1\relax \countb\code{#2}%
+	|    \ifcap{#2}\then
+	|        \ifnum \counta<128 \advance\counta 128 \fi
+	|        \ifnum \countb<128 \advance\countb 128 \fi
+	|    \fi
+	|    \accent\counta \char\countb
+	|}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\chardef\acuteglyph8      \def\'{\typeIImark\acuteglyph}
+	|\chardef\graveglyph9      \def\`{\typeIImark\graveglyph}
+	|\chardef\circumglyph10    \def\^{\typeIImark\circumglyph}
+	|\chardef\tildeglyph11     \def\~{\typeIImark\tildeglyph}
+	|\chardef\ringglyph12      \def\ringmark{\typeIImark\ringglyph}
+	|\chardef\caronglyph13     \def\v{\typeIImark\caronglyph}
+	|\chardef\breveglyph14     \def\u{\typeIImark\breveglyph}
+	|\chardef\hungarglyph15 \def\H{\typeIImark\hungarglyph}
+\endcode
+	I have abbreviated `circumflex' as `circum' (consistent with
+	Adobe's `|asciicircum|').  I~have called the hook `\v{}'
+	`|caron|' because that is its name as used by ISO and Adobe.
+	I~have called the long Hungarian umlaut `\H{}' `|hungar|' for
+	want of a better name (it's shorter than |hungarumlaut|)..
+%}}}   type II marks
+%{{{   cedilla ogonek
+	
+\subsec{Cedilla and ogonek}
+
+	The cedilla and ogonek each have a variant intended for capital
+	letters (in this case the variant is larger not smaller).
+\code
+	|\def\cedillalike#1#2#3{{%
+	|    \setbox0=\hbox{#3}%
+	|    \ifdim\ht0>1ex
+	|        \ooalign{\hidewidth\char#2\relax\hidewidth\crcr\unhbox0 }%
+	|    \else
+	|        \accent#1 #3%
+	|    \fi
+	|}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\chardef\cedillaglyph6 \chardef\Cedillaglyph134
+	|\def\c{\cedillalike\cedillaglyph\Cedillaglyph}
+\smallbreak
+	|\chardef\ogonekglyph7 \chardef\Ogonekglyph135
+	|\def\k{\cedillalike\ogonekglyph\Ogonekglyph}
+\endcode
+%}}}   cedilla ogonek
+%}}}
+%{{{  symbols
+\section{Symbols and  special letters}
+%{{{   special letters
+
+\subsec{Special letters}
+
+	The letters defined here that are not included in Chapter~9 of
+	the {\it\TeX book} are the Icelandic thorn (|\TH|, |\th|) and
+	eth\footnote*{Also called `edh'.} (|\DH|, |\dh|), the Polish
+	{\it a} and {\it e} with ogonek (|\A|, |\a|, |\E|, |\e|), and
+	the Sami eng\footnote\dag{Also called `ing' or `ng'.}  (|\NG|,
+	|\ng|).
+
+	We also give replacements for {\it d}, {\it t} and {\it l} with
+	hook (which are usually drawn with a apostrophe-like mark), and
+	the Esperanto letter {\it hho} (\^h).
+\code
+	|\chardef\TH"00  \chardef\th"10	 \chardef\DH"04  \chardef\dh"14
+	|\chardef\A "01  \chardef\a "11	 \chardef\E "05  \chardef\e "15
+	|\chardef\NG"02  \chardef\ng"12  \chardef\L "03  \chardef\l "13
+	|\chardef\AE"5E  \chardef\ae"7E  \chardef\OE"5F  \chardef\oe"7F
+	|\chardef\O "5C  \chardef\o "7C	
+\smallbreak
+	|\chardef\vd"9C  \chardef\vt"9D  \chardef\h "9E  \chardef\vl"9F
+	|\chardef\ss"18  \chardef\i "19  \chardef\j "1A  
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\aa{\ringmark a} \def\AA{\ringmark A}
+\endcode
+
+\code
+\smallbreak
+	|\chardef\orda"98 \chardef\ordo"99 \def\No{N\ordo} \def\no{n\ordo}
+	|\chardef\csuperior"98 \def\Mc{M\csuperior} 
+\endcode
+	The command |\Mc| is used for forming names like
+	M\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \b c}Donald.
+%}}}   special letters
+%{{{   text syms
+	
+\subsec{Other symbols used in text}
+
+	There are several new symbols here.  Note that |\trademark| is
+	what you will get if you use the ASCII double quote character
+	`|"|' in your manuscript.
+\code
+        |\chardef\trademark "22 
+	|\chardef\copyright "FB  \chardef\registered"FD
+        |\chardef\careof    "9A  \chardef\Box       "A0
+        |\chardef\cents     "A2  \chardef\pounds    "A3
+        |\chardef\currency  "A4  \chardef\permille  "A5
+        |\chardef\yen       "A8  \chardef\florin    "A9
+	|\chardef\dag       "AA  \chardef\ddag      "AB
+	|\chardef\gbdecimal "AE  \chardef\minus     "AF
+	|\chardef\S         "BA  \chardef\P         "BB
+	|\chardef\degrees   "C0
+	|\chardef\lguillemet"BC  \chardef\rguillemet"BE
+\endcode
+	The |\careof| sign ($\rm ^c\!/\!_o$) is an abbreviation for
+	`care of' in English-language addresses (actually, Australians
+	traditionally write `$\rm ^c\!/\!_-$').  The raised dot
+	|\gbdecimal| is the British decimal point (I~usually do
+	|\mathcode`.=\gbdecimal| and let maths mode do all the work).
+	The |\degrees| sign replaces \TeX's |$^\circ$|.
+
+	The guillemets can also be obtained with the ligatures |<<| and
+	|>>|.
+
+
+%}}}   text syms
+%{{{   maths syms
+	
+\subsec{Symbols used in maths}
+
+	I have stuck with the plain \TeX\ conventions as much as
+	possible---even though |\bullet| is more often used in text than
+	maths.
+\code
+	|\mathcode`\,"602C  \mathcode`\-"20AF
+	|\mathcode`\."002E  \mathcode`\/"002F
+\smallbreak
+	|\mathchardef\bullet   "2020  \mathchardef\times    "20A6
+	|\mathchardef\backslash"005B  \mathchardef\setminus "205B
+	|\mathchardef\cdot     "20AE  \mathchardef\cdotp    "60AE
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\langle{\delimiter"40DB30A }  \delcode`\<"0DB30A
+	|\def\rangle{\delimiter"50DD30B }  \delcode`\>"0DD30B
+	|\def\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308 }  \let\{\lbrace  \mathcode`\{"407B
+	|\def\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309 }  \let\}\rbrace  \mathcode`\}"407D
+\endcode
+	
+%}}}   maths syms
+%}}}  symbols
+%{{{  switching alphabets
+\section{Switching between alphabets}
+
+	This is one of the strange ideas that went into the design of
+	the Malvern font---I wanted to have small capitals and medium
+	capitals treated as separate alphabets rather than as a
+	different style, just as I treat old-style and ranging numerals
+	as separate symbols.  These extra alphabets are present in all
+	Malvern~A encodings\footnote*{Fonts with the Malvern~A encoding
+	but made from normal PostScript fonts will have medium capitals
+	replaced with full capitals, and old-style numerals replaced
+	with ranging numerals.}
+
+	These extra alphabets are obtained by transliterating a sequence
+	of letters using the |\uppercase| and |\lowercase|
+	commands.\footnote\dag{Alas! this task would be so much easier
+	and more efficient if it were possible to declare new
+	alphabet-switching tables styled after the |\uccode| and
+	|\lccode| tables which make |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| work.
+	Then all this nonsense could happen in \TeX's mouth, which has
+	some advantages.  I~can imagine commands |\newchartable| (used
+	to create a token which can be used in the same way as
+	|\uccode|) and |\usechartable| (used to defined macros that work
+	like |\uppercase|).  E\TeX\ hackers take note!}  For example, to
+	transliterate capitals into small capitals (the |\sc| command),
+	we first make assignments so that, for example, |\lccode`a| is
+	set to the code for small-capital $\scriptstyle A$, then apply
+	|\lowercase| to the token list.
+
+\subsec{Setting upper and lower case codes for special letters}
+
+	These entries in the |\uucode| and |\lccode| tables are used by
+	the composite-letter-building commands rather then the
+	alphabet-switchign commands, but they are included here to be
+	near the other code-hackery.
+
+\code
+	|\uccode\th\TH  \lccode\TH\th  \uccode\TH\TH  \lccode\th\th
+	|\uccode\a \A   \lccode\A \a   \uccode\A \A   \lccode\a \a 
+	|\uccode\ng\NG  \lccode\NG\ng  \uccode\NG\NG  \lccode\ng\ng
+	|\uccode\l \L   \lccode\L \l   \uccode\L \L   \lccode\l \l 
+	|\uccode\dh\DH  \lccode\DH\dh  \uccode\DH\DH  \lccode\dh\dh
+	|\uccode\e \E   \lccode\E \e   \uccode\E \E   \lccode\e \e 
+	|\uccode\o \O   \lccode\O \o   \uccode\O \O   \lccode\o \o
+	|\uccode\ae\AE  \lccode\AE\ae  \uccode\AE\AE  \lccode\ae\ae
+	|\uccode\oe\OE  \lccode\OE\oe  \uccode\OE\OE  \lccode\oe\oe
+\smallbreak
+	|\uccode\i`I    \uccode\j`J	\lccode\i\i	\lccode\j\j
+	|\uccode\csuperior`C
+\endcode
+
+
+\subsec{A macro for changing character codes}
+
+	The |\changecodes| command is used to change those segments of
+	character tables that are contiguous and map onto a contiguous
+	segment in the range.  It is invoked as
+$$
+ 	\hbox{\it |\changecodes| command x y n}
+$$ 
+ 	(where $\it command$ is a token like |\uccode| or |\mathcode|
+	and $x$, $y$, and $n$ are \<number>s), and does the equivalent
+	of
+$$
+ 	{\it command}\;i\mathrel{\hbox{\tt=}}
+	j\qquad \hbox{for all $\cases{x \le i < x + n\cr
+					         y \le j < y + n\cr}$}
+$$
+
+\code
+	|\def\changecodes#1#2#3#4{%
+	|    \counta#2\relax \countb#3\relax \countc#4\relax
+	|    \loop
+	|    \ifnum\countc>0
+	|        #1\counta\countb
+	|        \advance\counta 1
+	|        \advance\countb 1
+	|        \advance\countc-1
+	|    \repeat
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	We can use this immediately to arrange that lowercasing medium caps
+	makes lower case, and uppercasing small caps makes full caps:
+\code
+	|\changecodes\uccode{"E1}{`A}{26}
+	|\changecodes\uccode{"C1}{"C1}{26}
+	|\changecodes\lccode{"E1}{"E1}{26}
+	|\changecodes\lccode{"C1}{`a}{26}
+\endcode
+
+	We also make old-style numerals behave as lower case for ranging
+	numerals, and also arrange that maths mode uses ranging figures.
+\code
+	|\changecodes\lccode{"B0}{`0}{10}
+	|\changecodes\uccode{`0}{"B0}{10}
+\endcode
+
+	In maths mode (1)~we use text italic for letters, since CM MAth
+	Italic will not match the body text and (2)~we use ranging
+	figures.
+\code
+	|\changecodes\mathcode{`a}{"7461}{26}
+	|\changecodes\mathcode{`A}{"7441}{26}
+	|\changecodes\mathcode{`0}{"70B0}{10}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Changing the alphabet for special letters got with commands}
+
+	When applying |\uppercase| or |\lowercase| to a token list,
+	macros will be unaffected (|\ae| will still generate `ae').  To
+	get around this we define macros that redefine these control
+	sequences.  They each take as parameters hex digits used to make
+	character codes.
+\code
+	|\def\capspecials#1#2{%
+	|    \chardef\TH"#10 \chardef\A "#11 \chardef\NG"#12
+	|    \chardef\L "#13 \chardef\DH"#14 \chardef\E "#15
+	|    \chardef\O "#2C \chardef\AE"#2E \chardef\OE"#2F 
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\lcspecials#1#2#3{%
+	|    \chardef\th"#10 \chardef\a "#11 \chardef\ng"#12
+	|    \chardef\l "#13 \chardef\dh"#14 \chardef\e "#15
+	|    \chardef\o "#2C \chardef\ae"#2E \chardef\oe"#2F
+	|    \def\ss{\char"#23 \char"#23 }\chardef\i"#39 \chardef\j"#3A 
+	|}
+\endcode
+\subsec{Pulling it all together}
+	Now we can define the user macros that do the work. These take
+	one argument, a piece of text to transliterate: |\sc{OX1~3QD}|
+	produces a small-capital `${\rm\scriptstyle OX}{\mit 1\
+	3}{\rm\scriptstyle QD}$';
+	|\csc{ABCdef}| produces caps and small caps
+	`ABC{\the\scriptfont0 DEF}'.
+\code
+	|\def\sc#1{{%
+	|    \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"E1}{26}\capspecials9F\lowercase{#1}%
+	|}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\mc#1{{%
+	|    \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"C1}{26}\capspecials8D\lowercase{#1}%
+	|}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\csc#1{{%
+	|    \changecodes\uccode{`a}{"E1}{26}\lcspecials9FE\uppercase{#1}%
+	|}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\allcaps#1{{%
+	|    \lcspecials054\uppercase{#1}%
+	|}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\alllc#1{{%
+	|    \capspecials17\lowercase{#1}%
+	|}}
+\endcode
+%}}}  switching alphabets
+\endcodefile
+\enddocument
+\bye
+%}}} maamac
+
+
+% Local variables:
+% fold-folded-p: t
+% fill-prefix: "\t"
+% End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c3c2835eb10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+% maamac.tex 1.5 1995/04/06 -- Malvern A Macros
+
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/maamac.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.5",
+%%% date           = "1995/04/06",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Macros for using the Malvern-A font coding
+%%%                   scheme in plain TeX documents.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on maamac.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute maamac.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%% }
+
+\message{1.5 <pdc 1995/04/06>}
+
+\dimendef\dimena0  \dimendef\dimenb2
+\toksdef\toksa0
+\countdef\counta255
+\ifx\countb\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countb \fi
+\ifx\countc\UNDEFINED \csname newcount\endcsname\countc \fi
+\def\code#1{%
+    \ifcat#1a%
+        `#1
+    \else\ifcat#1+%
+        `#1
+    \else\ifx\char#1
+    \else
+        #1%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\let\then=\iffalse
+\def\ifcap#1\then{\expandafter\ifcapnum\code{#1}\then}
+\def\ifcapnum#1\then{\ifnum\lccode#1=#1}
+\def\iflower#1\then{\expandafter\iflowernum\code{#1}\then}
+\def\iflowernum#1\then{\ifnum\uccode#1=#1}
+\def\fontslant#1{\expandafter\stripPT\the\fontdimen1#1}
+\begingroup \uccode`2=`p \uccode`3=`t \uppercase{\toksa{\endgroup
+    \def\\#123{#1}
+}} \the\toksa
+\let\stripPT=\\
+\def\putxy#1#2#3{\leavevmode\rlap{\hskip#1\raise#2\hbox{#3}}}
+\def\putmarkxy#1#2#3#4{{%
+    \setbox0=\hbox{#4}#2\relax
+    \dimenb#1\wd0 \advance\dimenb\fontslant\font\dimena
+    \leavevmode
+    \putxy{\dimenb}{\dimena}{\hbox to 0pt{\hss\char#3\hss}}%
+    \box0
+}}
+\def\putmarky{\putmarkxy{0.5}}
+\def\typeImark#1#2{{%
+    \setbox2=\hbox{#2}%
+    \ifdim \ht2=1ex
+        \accent#1\relax#2%
+    \else
+        \counta\code{#2}%
+        \ifnum\counta>64 \ifnum\counta<96
+            \advance\counta 128
+        \fi \fi
+        \putmarky{\dimena0.5\ht0 \advance\dimena-0.5ex }
+                {#1}{\char\counta}%
+    \fi
+}}
+\chardef\dotglyph22     \def\.{\typeImark\dotglyph}
+\chardef\twodotsglyph23 \def\"{\typeImark\twodotsglyph}
+\chardef\macronglyph150 \def\={\typeImark\macronglyph}
+\chardef\longmacronglyph151
+        \def\longmacronmark{\typeImark\longmacronglyph}
+\def\typeIImark#1#2{{%
+    \counta#1\relax \countb\code{#2}%
+    \ifcap{#2}\then
+        \ifnum \counta<128 \advance\counta 128 \fi
+        \ifnum \countb<128 \advance\countb 128 \fi
+    \fi
+    \accent\counta \char\countb
+}}
+\chardef\acuteglyph8      \def\'{\typeIImark\acuteglyph}
+\chardef\graveglyph9      \def\`{\typeIImark\graveglyph}
+\chardef\circumglyph10    \def\^{\typeIImark\circumglyph}
+\chardef\tildeglyph11     \def\~{\typeIImark\tildeglyph}
+\chardef\ringglyph12      \def\ringmark{\typeIImark\ringglyph}
+\chardef\caronglyph13     \def\v{\typeIImark\caronglyph}
+\chardef\breveglyph14     \def\u{\typeIImark\breveglyph}
+\chardef\hungarglyph15 \def\H{\typeIImark\hungarglyph}
+\def\cedillalike#1#2#3{{%
+    \setbox0=\hbox{#3}%
+    \ifdim\ht0>1ex
+        \ooalign{\hidewidth\char#2\relax\hidewidth\crcr\unhbox0 }%
+    \else
+        \accent#1 #3%
+    \fi
+}}
+\chardef\cedillaglyph6 \chardef\Cedillaglyph134
+\def\c{\cedillalike\cedillaglyph\Cedillaglyph}
+\chardef\ogonekglyph7 \chardef\Ogonekglyph135
+\def\k{\cedillalike\ogonekglyph\Ogonekglyph}
+\chardef\TH"00  \chardef\th"10  \chardef\DH"04  \chardef\dh"14
+\chardef\A "01  \chardef\a "11  \chardef\E "05  \chardef\e "15
+\chardef\NG"02  \chardef\ng"12  \chardef\L "03  \chardef\l "13
+\chardef\AE"5E  \chardef\ae"7E  \chardef\OE"5F  \chardef\oe"7F
+\chardef\O "5C  \chardef\o "7C
+\chardef\vd"9C  \chardef\vt"9D  \chardef\h "9E  \chardef\vl"9F
+\chardef\ss"18  \chardef\i "19  \chardef\j "1A
+\def\aa{\ringmark a} \def\AA{\ringmark A}
+\chardef\orda"98 \chardef\ordo"99 \def\No{N\ordo} \def\no{n\ordo}
+\chardef\csuperior"98 \def\Mc{M\csuperior}
+\chardef\trademark "22
+\chardef\copyright "FB  \chardef\registered"FD
+\chardef\careof    "9A  \chardef\Box       "A0
+\chardef\cents     "A2  \chardef\pounds    "A3
+\chardef\currency  "A4  \chardef\permille  "A5
+\chardef\yen       "A8  \chardef\florin    "A9
+\chardef\dag       "AA  \chardef\ddag      "AB
+\chardef\gbdecimal "AE  \chardef\minus     "AF
+\chardef\S         "BA  \chardef\P         "BB
+\chardef\degrees   "C0
+\chardef\lguillemet"BC  \chardef\rguillemet"BE
+\mathcode`\,"602C  \mathcode`\-"20AF
+\mathcode`\."002E  \mathcode`\/"002F
+\mathchardef\bullet   "2020  \mathchardef\times    "20A6
+\mathchardef\backslash"005B  \mathchardef\setminus "205B
+\mathchardef\cdot     "20AE  \mathchardef\cdotp    "60AE
+\def\langle{\delimiter"40DB30A }  \delcode`\<"0DB30A
+\def\rangle{\delimiter"50DD30B }  \delcode`\>"0DD30B
+\def\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308 }  \let\{\lbrace  \mathcode`\{"407B
+\def\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309 }  \let\}\rbrace  \mathcode`\}"407D
+\uccode\th\TH  \lccode\TH\th  \uccode\TH\TH  \lccode\th\th
+\uccode\a \A   \lccode\A \a   \uccode\A \A   \lccode\a \a
+\uccode\ng\NG  \lccode\NG\ng  \uccode\NG\NG  \lccode\ng\ng
+\uccode\l \L   \lccode\L \l   \uccode\L \L   \lccode\l \l
+\uccode\dh\DH  \lccode\DH\dh  \uccode\DH\DH  \lccode\dh\dh
+\uccode\e \E   \lccode\E \e   \uccode\E \E   \lccode\e \e
+\uccode\o \O   \lccode\O \o   \uccode\O \O   \lccode\o \o
+\uccode\ae\AE  \lccode\AE\ae  \uccode\AE\AE  \lccode\ae\ae
+\uccode\oe\OE  \lccode\OE\oe  \uccode\OE\OE  \lccode\oe\oe
+\uccode\i`I    \uccode\j`J \lccode\i\i \lccode\j\j
+\uccode\csuperior`C
+\def\changecodes#1#2#3#4{%
+    \counta#2\relax \countb#3\relax \countc#4\relax
+    \loop
+    \ifnum\countc>0
+        #1\counta\countb
+        \advance\counta 1
+        \advance\countb 1
+        \advance\countc-1
+    \repeat
+}
+\changecodes\uccode{"E1}{`A}{26}
+\changecodes\uccode{"C1}{"C1}{26}
+\changecodes\lccode{"E1}{"E1}{26}
+\changecodes\lccode{"C1}{`a}{26}
+\changecodes\lccode{"B0}{`0}{10}
+\changecodes\uccode{`0}{"B0}{10}
+\changecodes\mathcode{`a}{"7461}{26}
+\changecodes\mathcode{`A}{"7441}{26}
+\changecodes\mathcode{`0}{"70B0}{10}
+\def\capspecials#1#2{%
+    \chardef\TH"#10 \chardef\A "#11 \chardef\NG"#12
+    \chardef\L "#13 \chardef\DH"#14 \chardef\E "#15
+    \chardef\O "#2C \chardef\AE"#2E \chardef\OE"#2F
+}
+\def\lcspecials#1#2#3{%
+    \chardef\th"#10 \chardef\a "#11 \chardef\ng"#12
+    \chardef\l "#13 \chardef\dh"#14 \chardef\e "#15
+    \chardef\o "#2C \chardef\ae"#2E \chardef\oe"#2F
+    \def\ss{\char"#23 \char"#23 }\chardef\i"#39 \chardef\j"#3A
+}
+\def\sc#1{{%
+    \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"E1}{26}\capspecials9F\lowercase{#1}%
+}}
+\def\mc#1{{%
+    \changecodes\lccode{`A}{"C1}{26}\capspecials8D\lowercase{#1}%
+}}
+\def\csc#1{{%
+    \changecodes\uccode{`a}{"E1}{26}\lcspecials9FE\uppercase{#1}%
+}}
+\def\allcaps#1{{%
+    \lcspecials054\uppercase{#1}%
+}}
+\def\alllc#1{{%
+    \capspecials17\lowercase{#1}%
+}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..71f2dd83cfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+% magrmac.dtx -- documentation and source for magrmac.tex -*-tex-*-
+        
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "MAGRMAC.TEX -- Malvern Greek Macros",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 1.3 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/03/29 16:32:24 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and is the source code for 
+%%%                the TeX definitions file magrmac.tex.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
+%%%                definitions file and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
+%%%}
+
+%{{{ magrmac.dtx
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+
+\document
+\rcs$Id: magrmac.dtx,v 1.3 1995/03/29 16:32:24 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+
+\codefile{magrmac.tex}
+
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  introduction
+\author{P. Dmaian Cugley}
+\title{MAGRMAC---Malvern Greek Macros}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+	This document describes |magrmac.tex|, a small file of macros
+	for setting Greek with Malvern~G fonts.  `Malvern~G' is the name
+	of an encoding for typesetting Greek texts.  Malvern
+	release~$1{\cdot}2$ has a collection of fonts ({\tt
+	ma$XX$g$YY$}) which use this encoding.  The Levy and Dryllerakis
+	fonts should work to an extent.
+
+	The conventions for Malvern Greek text files are intended to be
+	similar to those for K.~J.\ Dryllerakis's Greek\TeX\ (the
+	`|kd|-' fonts), and will be most useful on computers where the
+	operating system uses latin letters (as opposed to those which
+	can display Greek letters on the screen).
+
+	There is a brief guide for |magrmac.tex| called |magrman.tex|.
+\notepar	
+	These macros are not necessarily in final form and are not
+	intended to be supported.  Use them at your own risk.  
+\endnotepar
+
+	The document you are reading is a plain \TeX\ file called
+	|magrmac.dtx|.  This `documented \TeX\ macros'\footnote*{The
+	suffix |dtx| is the same as files used to simlar effect in the
+	\LaTeX~2e distribution.}  file produces the file `|magrmac.tex|'
+	in the current directory, in addition to the usual |dvi| file.
+	The code lines in the printed documentation are identical to
+	those in the macros file.
+
+%}}}  introduction
+%{{{  file identification
+\section{File identification}
+
+	Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
+	file, for the benefit of people wondering what the file is for.
+
+\code
+	\|\% magrmac.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- Malvern Greek Macros
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, Malvern, Greek, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "Macros for using Malvern Greek fonts.  
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	|%%%                   plain TeX on magrmac.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	|%%%                   Distribute magrmac.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%%}
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~\filedate\}
+	|
+\endcode
+%}}}  file identification
+%{{{  greek mode
+\section{Greek Mode}
+
+	The Greek Mode is started with |\begingreek| for compatibility
+	with the precedent of Greek\TeX\ and Levy's original Greek
+	macros.\footnote*{The conventions of PDCFMT2 would suggest
+	|\greek|\dots|\endgreek| but (besides being incompatible with
+	existing Greek macros) it is probable that the hyphenation table
+	code (|\language| code) for Greek would be called |\greek|,
+	based on the names I~have seen used.}
+
+	The token register |\everygreek| is expanded each time we enter
+	Greek mode.  At a minimum it should contain a command to select
+	an appropriate Greek font.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everygreek
+	|\chardef\other=12
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\begingreek{%
+	|    \begingroup
+	|    \catcode`\~\other \catcode`\|\other \catcode`\"\other
+	|    \the\everygreek
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\let\endgreek=\endgroup
+\endcode
+%}}}  greek mode
+\section{Customization}
+%{{{  lunate sigma, curly phi
+
+\subsec{Lunate sigma}
+
+	The macro |\grlunatesigma| belongs in |\everygreek|.  It makes
+	|s| an active char expanding to |c|.  A certain amount of
+	jiggery-pokery is required because making |s| active makes it
+	impossible to use the name |\grlunatesigma|!
+
+\code
+	|\toksdef\toksa=0
+\smallbreak
+	|\begingroup \let\\=\toksa \catcode`\s=13 \catcode`\S=13 \\={\endgroup
+	|    \def\tmp{%
+	|        \catcode`\s\active \chardef s`c
+	|        \catcode`\S\active \chardef S`C
+	|    }
+	|}\the\\
+	|\let\grlunatesigma=\tmp
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Variant phi}
+
+	In the end I~make the two-stroke phi $\phi$ the default one,
+	with $\varphi$ as the `variant', for compatibility with plain
+	\TeX.  
+\code
+	|\chardef\ninetytwo=92
+\smallbreak
+	|\begingroup \uccode`\~=`f \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
+	|    \def\grvarphi{%
+	|        \catcode`\f\active \chardef~\ninetytwo
+	|    }
+	|}} \the\toksa
+\endcode
+%}}}  lunate sigma
+%{{{  accent
+
+\subsec{One-accent Greek}
+
+	The |\monotonik| macro makes all the accent characters generate
+	the modern symmetrical accent, while the breathings and iota
+	subscript do nothing.
+\code
+	|\begingroup \catcode`\<=\active \catcode`\>=\active 
+	|        \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active \toksa={\endgroup
+	|    \def\monotoniko{%
+	|        \catcode\lq\'\active \chardef'3  
+	|        \catcode\lq\`\active \chardef`3 
+	|        \catcode\lq\~\active \chardef~3
+	|        \catcode\lq\<\active \let<\relax
+	|        \catcode\lq\>\active \let>\relax
+	|        \catcode\lq\|\active \let|\relax
+	|    }
+	|}\the\toksa
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\plutoniko{%
+	|    \catcode`\'\other \catcode`\`\other \catcode`\~\other
+	|    \catcode`\<\other \catcode`\>\other \catcode`\|\other
+	|}
+\endcode
+%}}}  accent
+%{{{  define delims
+
+\subsec{Choose shorthand delimiters for Greek Mode}
+
+	Define |#1| to be a `greek shift' in the way |$| is a maths
+	shift.  Like |$|, |#1| will stand for either |\begingreek| or
+	|\endgreek| as required.  |#1| must be a one-character control
+	sequence (as might be used after |`|).
+\code
+	|\def\grdelimiter#1{
+	|    \begingroup \uccode`~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
+	|        \def~{\begingreek \let~\endgreek}
+	|    }} \the\toksa
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  define delims
+\endcodefile
+\enddocument
+\bye
+%}}} macros for greek
+
+% Local variables:
+% fold-folded-p: t
+% tex-macros-p: t
+% End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..eebec3bdfac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+% magrmac.tex 1.3 1995/03/29 -- Malvern Greek Macros
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/magrmac.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.3",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/29",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, Malvern, Greek, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Macros for using Malvern Greek fonts.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on magrmac.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute magrmac.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.3 1995/03/29}
+
+\newtoks\everygreek
+\chardef\other=12
+\def\begingreek{%
+    \begingroup
+    \catcode`\~\other \catcode`\|\other \catcode`\"\other
+    \the\everygreek
+}
+\let\endgreek=\endgroup
+\toksdef\toksa=0
+\begingroup \let\\=\toksa \catcode`\s=13 \catcode`\S=13 \\={\endgroup
+    \def\tmp{%
+        \catcode`\s\active \chardef s`c
+        \catcode`\S\active \chardef S`C
+    }
+}\the\\
+\let\grlunatesigma=\tmp
+\chardef\ninetytwo=92
+\begingroup \uccode`\~=`f \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
+    \def\grvarphi{%
+        \catcode`\f\active \chardef~\ninetytwo
+    }
+}} \the\toksa
+\begingroup \catcode`\<=\active \catcode`\>=\active
+        \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active \toksa={\endgroup
+    \def\monotoniko{%
+        \catcode\lq\'\active \chardef'3
+        \catcode\lq\`\active \chardef`3
+        \catcode\lq\~\active \chardef~3
+        \catcode\lq\<\active \let<\relax
+        \catcode\lq\>\active \let>\relax
+        \catcode\lq\|\active \let|\relax
+    }
+}\the\toksa
+\def\plutoniko{%
+    \catcode`\'\other \catcode`\`\other \catcode`\~\other
+    \catcode`\<\other \catcode`\>\other \catcode`\|\other
+}
+\def\grdelimiter#1{
+    \begingroup \uccode`~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
+        \def~{\begingreek \let~\endgreek}
+    }} \the\toksa
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5e746d36fa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/magrman.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,604 @@
+% magman.tex -- info about Malvern Greek.
+%{{{ Malvern Greek manual
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\errorcontextlines=1000
+\input pdccmlft
+\input magrmac
+
+\font\notegr=ma55g9
+\font\bodygr=ma55g11
+\font\biggr=ma55g24	% used in sample
+\font\gri=ma56g11 	% used in sample
+
+\toksa=\expandafter{\STYbodyT}
+\edef\STYbodyT{\the\toksa\noexpand\f{gr}{ma55g}}
+
+\bodyfonts
+
+\everygreek{\gr \baselineskip=14pt}
+
+\grdelimiter\*			% * is already an active char
++\defverbatim\_+			% | is often used in examples
+
+\majorheadline{Typesetting Greek using	Malvern fonts}
+
+%{{{  font tables
+
+%%  Code to typeset a font table -- lifted from my testfont.tex
+
+\newcount\tableN
+\newcount\hexcount
+\def\hexdigit#1{\ifcase#1\relax 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or
+	8\or 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi}
+
+\def\ntablecr
+{%
+    \cr
+    \noalign{\nointerlineskip}
+    \multispan2\hfill &\multispan{33}\hrulefill
+}
+\def\ntable
+{
+    \medskip
+    \begingroup \openup1\jot
+	\def\\{\char\tableN \global\advance\tableN 1}
+	\def\0##1{&\omit&\sevenrm##1}
+	\halign to \hsize
+	  {%
+	    \chartstrut\hss##\tabskip=0pt plus 10pt &
+	    &\hss##\hss&##\vrule\cr
+	    \lower 6.5pt\null
+	    &\00\01\02\03\04\05\06\07\08\09\0A\0B\0C\0D\0E\0F
+	    \ntablecr 
+	    \global\tableN=0
+	    \ntablelines
+	    \crcr
+	  }
+	\medbreak
+    \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\ntablelines
+{%
+    \ifnum\tableN<256 
+	\let\next\ntablecontinuation
+    \else
+	\let\next\relax
+    \fi
+    \next
+}
+
+\newcount\ntabtmp
+
+\def\ntablecontinuation
+{%
+    % Find out if none of this row are defined by making a horizontal
+    % list of all of them preceeded by a penalty of 1; if any of them
+    % are defined then \lastpenalty will be something other than 1:
+	\setbox0=\hbox{\penalty1
+	    \def~{\char\tableN \advance\tableN 1}%
+	    ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\global\ntabtmp=\lastpenalty}%
+    % Now set the row in the table iff ntabtmp # 1:
+	\ifnum\ntabtmp=1 
+	    \global\advance\tableN 16 \let\next=\ntablelines
+	\else
+	    \let\next=\ntablecontinuationcontinuation
+	\fi
+    \next
+}
+
+\def\ntablecontinuationcontinuation
+{%
+    \cr
+    \noalign{\nointerlineskip \penalty5000 }
+    & \hexcount=\tableN \divide\hexcount16 \sevenrm\hexdigit\hexcount
+    &&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&&\\&
+    \ntablecr
+    \ntablelines
+}
+
+\def\chartstrut{\lower 0.25\baselineskip \vbox to \baselineskip{}}
+
+%}}}   font tables
+%{{{  two-column quotations
+
+\def\twocolgr{
+    \smallskip 
+    \beginthe{twocolgr}
+    \setbox0=\vbox\bgroup
+	\hsize=\bodywd \advance\hsize-\colsep \divide\hsize by 2
+	\begingreek \strut \ignorespaces
+}
+\def\endtwocolgr{%
+	\par\endgreek \egroup
+    \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
+	\hrule\smallskip
+	\hbox to \bodywd{\rigidbalance{0}{2}{\ht\strutbox}{\hfil}}
+	\smallskip\hrule
+    }
+    \smallbreak
+    \endthe{twocolgr}
+}
+%}}}  two-column quotations
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  bibliography
+
+\def\TB{{\it TUGboat}}
+
+\counta=0
+\newtoks\bibliography
+\newcount\bibcount
+
+\def\FAQnote
+{%
+	\par {\bf Note on FAQs}\quad An FAQ is an electronic document, posted
+	regularly to a USENET newsgroup, usually in the form of a list of
+	answers to frequently asked questions.  Many FAQs are available on
+	the archive site |pit-manager.mit.edu| (alias |rtfm.mit.edu|)
+	[18.172.1.27] in the directory |pub/usenet/news.answers|.  The
+	reference gives the name of the compiler, the title, the
+	last-modified date (in lieu of an edition or version number) and
+	name under which the FAQ is archived appears in parentheses.
+    \par
+}
+
+\def\bibdef#1#2%
+{
+    \expcs\edef{cite#1}%
+    {%
+        \noexpand\docite\noexpcs{cite#1}\noexpcs{refer#1}%
+    }
+    \toks0={#2}
+    \expcs\edef{refer#1}{\noexpand\bibitem{\expcs\noexpand{cite#1}}
+	\the\toks0}
+}
+\def\docite#1#2%
+{%
+	\global\advance\bibcount1
+	\global\bibliography=\expandafter
+		{\the\bibliography #2}%
+        \global\edef#1%
+	{[\the\bibcount]}#1%
+}
+
+\bibdef{Allen}
+{
+    W. Sidney Allen, {\it Vox Graeca: A Guide to Pronunciation of Classical
+	Greek}, 3rd Ed.\ (Cambridge University Press, 1987),
+	pp.\thinspace177--179.
+}
+
+\bibdef{KD}
+{
+    K.~J. Dryllerakis (|kd@doc.ic.ac.uk|), {\it Typesetting Greek Texts with
+	Greek\TeX}, Greek\TeX~3.1 (also known as KDGreek) (CTAN
+	|fonts/greek/kd|).
+}
+
+\bibdef{FAQ}
+{
+    Nikolaos Fotis (ed.), {\it soc.culture.greek} FAQ --
+	Linguistics ({\tt greek-\penalty\exhyphenpenalty faq\slash
+	linguistics}, 1993/03/06).
+}
+
+\bibdef{Yannis}
+{
+    Yannis Haralambous and Klaus Thull, Typesetting Modern Greek with 128
+	Character Codes, \TB\/ 10 (1989), pp.\thinspace354--359 (CTAN
+	|fonts/greek/yannis|).
+}
+
+\bibdef{Harts}
+{
+    Horace Hart, {\it Hart's Rules for Compositors and Readers at the
+	University Press, Oxford}, 39th Edition, revised (Oxford
+	University Press, 1989), pp.\thinspace111--116.
+}
+
+\bibdef{Levy}
+{
+    Silvio Levy, Using Greek Fonts with \TeX, \TB\/ 9 (1988),
+	pp.\thinspace20--24 (CTAN |fonts/greek/levy|).
+}
+
+\bibdef{COD}
+{
+	{\it The Concise Oxford Dictionary of Current English}, 8th Ed.
+	(Oxford University Press, 1990), p.\thinspace1453.
+}
+
+\def\bibitem#1%
+{%
+    \smallskip
+    \indent \llap{#1\hskip1pc}\ignorespaces
+}
+
+
+%}}}  bibliography
+
+\twosidedtrue
+
+\noheadlinetrue
+\majorheadline{Typesetting Greek using Malvern fonts}
+\leftline{\headingfonts \the\majorheadline}
+\bigskip
+\leftline{P. Damian Cugley}
+\leftline{Oxford University Computing Laboratory}
+\leftline{(|Damian.Cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk|)}
+\leftline{April 1993}
+\bigskip
+
+\noindent
+	Malvern is a sanserif font family, implemented in \MF.  This
+	document describes Malvern encoding~G (the Greek alphabet).
+
+\section{Using Malvern G}
+
+	Because most latin-alphabet languages require additional composite
+	letter glyphs to be properly typeset by \TeX, most Malvern fonts
+	will be used as the raw material for composite fonts.  In contrast,
+	the Malvern Greek font can be used directly to typeset Greek, both
+	with the old accent-and-breathing systems and the newer (post-1974)
+	one-accent system.  It follows the conventions of Silvio Levy's
+	original |gr| family \citeLevy\ and K.~J.  Dryllerakis's Greek\TeX\
+	(|kd| fonts) \citeKD.  It is almost compatible with the reduced
+	Greek fonts (|rgr| and |mrgr| families) described by Yannis
+	Haralambous and Karl Thull \citeYannis.
+
+%{{{  typesetting
+
+\section{Macro file}
+
+	The file |magrmac.tex| has some macros for setting texts in plain
+	\TeX.  A future production release may instead work as an option or
+	extension of Greek\TeX, with the objective of making it possible to
+	switch an existing document to Malvern without much editing.
+
+	Greek text is set within a \dfn{Greek mode}, delimited by macros
+	|\begingreek| and |\endgreek|.  Each time Greek mode is entered, the
+	contents of the token register |\everygreek| is scanned first.
+	Since |magrmac| does {\it not} load a particular font by default, a
+	manuscript using |magrmac| will want to include an assignment like
+\display
+	|\everygreek={\greekfont}|\cr
+	|\catcode`\*=\active \grdelimiter\*|
+\enddisplay
+	where |\greekfont| has been bound to some Greek font or another such
+	as |ma55g12|.  The macro |\grdelimiter| takes one parameter, an
+	active character (represented by a one-character control sequence),
+	and makes that character into a self-matching delimiter for Greek
+	mode (like |$|--|$| works for mathematics mode).  Thus, `|*This is
+	Greek*|' produces `*This is Greek*'.
+
+\section{The alphabet}
+
+	The letters are transliterated as
+	follows:
+\table \hfil#\hfil&&\enspace\hfil#\hfil\cr
+	\gr a&\gr b&\gr g&\gr d&\gr e&\gr z&\gr h&\gr j&\gr i&\gr k&\gr
+	l&\gr m&\gr n&\gr x&\gr o&\gr p&\gr r&\gr ss&\gr c&\gr t&\gr 
+	u&\gr f&\gr v& \gr q&\gr y&\gr w\cr
+	\tt a&\tt b&\tt g&\tt d&\tt e&\tt z&\tt h&\tt j&\tt i&\tt k&\tt
+	l&\tt m&\tt n&\tt x&\tt o&\tt p&\tt r&\tt s&\tt c&\tt t&\tt u&\tt 
+	f&\tt v& \tt q&\tt y&\tt w\cr
+\noalign{\smallskip}%
+	\gr A&\gr B&\gr G&\gr D&\gr E&\gr Z&\gr H&\gr J&\gr I&\gr K&\gr
+	L&\gr M&\gr N&\gr X&\gr O&\gr P&\gr R&\gr S&\gr C&\gr T&\gr 
+	U&\gr F&\gr V& \gr Q&\gr Y&\gr W\cr
+	\tt A&\tt B&\tt G&\tt D&\tt E&\tt Z&\tt H&\tt J&\tt I&\tt K&\tt
+	L&\tt M&\tt N&\tt X&\tt O&\tt P&\tt R&\tt S&\tt C&\tt T&\tt U&\tt 
+	F&\tt V& \tt Q&\tt Y&\tt W\cr
+\endtable
+ 	The letter *C c* is \dfn{lunate sigma} (see below).  The letter *V v*
+	is \dfn{digamma} (wau).  I~put it next to *f* because I~don't know
+	where it belongs in the alphabet.
+
+	A lower case sigma `*s@*' at the end of a word (or followed by
+	punctuation) is automatically changed to the final form `*s*'
+	through \TeX's ligature mechanism.\note{Occasionally \TeX's notion
+	of word boundaries causes the wrong glyph to appear.  There are two
+	special invisible glyphs that can be used to control this in obscure
+	circumstances.  The so-called \dfn{compound word mark} (or cwm) acts
+	as a word-boundary in the middle of a word.  It has code~32, so
+	`|as^^`a|' produces `*as^^`a*', for example.  The \dfn{null glyph}
+	is invisible, but, because it is not a boundary character, it can be
+	used to prevent a ligature with a following word boundary.  It has
+	code 64, so `|as@|' produces `*as@*'.}
+
+\section{Composite letters}
+
+	The marks that go above the letters are obtained with the
+	following characters, which go before the letter:
+\table \gr#\hfil&\quad#\hfil&\quad #\hfil& \quad *#*\hfil\cr
+\noalign{\hrule height 1pt \vskip1\jot}%
+	\omit Mark\hfil&\omit\quad Char\hfil&
+		Name&\omit\quad Name in \citeYannis\hfil\cr
+\noalign{\vskip\jot \hrule \vskip\jot}
+	<@&	|<|&	asper (rough, = h)& 	dase'ia\cr
+	>@&	|>|&	lenis (smooth)&	yil'h\cr
+	"@&	|"| (double quote)&
+			diaeresis&		dialutik'a\cr
+	'@&	|'| (quote)& 
+			acute accent&		>oxe'ia\cr
+	`@&	|`|&	grave accent&		bare'ia\cr
+	\char126 @& |~|& circumflex&		perispwm'enh\cr
+\noalign{\vskip1\jot \hrule height 1pt\smallskip}%
+\endtable
+	A breathing or diaeresis can be combined with an accent, thus
+	`|<~a|' for *<~a*, `|>'e|' for *>'e*.
+
+
+	The vowels *a*, *h* and *w* may have an iota beneath them, called
+	`subscript': *a|*, *h|*, *w|*.  These are produced with a vertical
+	bar `_|_' after the letter in Greek mode: `_a|_' makes
+	*a|*, `_<a|_' makes `*<a|*', and so on.
+
+
+	As an example: `*>en >arq~h| >~hn <o l'ogos*' is generated with `_>en
+	>arq~h| >~hn <o l'ogos_'.
+
+%	In old-style Greek, all vowels beginning a word require a breathing
+%	-- but *u* may only have an asper (rough).  In diphthongs (*ai*,
+%	*ei*, *oi*, *ui*, *au*, *eu*, *hu*, *ou*, *wu*), breathings and
+%	accents stand over the second letter: *a<i*, *o>u*.  Double *rr*
+%	used to be written *>r<r*.
+	
+%\section{Apostrophe (sign of elision)}
+
+%	The lenis is also used like an apostrophe, to mark the elision of
+%	vowels at the end of a word when the next word starts with a vowel.
+%	The Malvern-G fonts, like the Levy-derived fonts, also has a
+%	separate apostrophe glyph, which can be set with `|''|' (two quote
+%	characters) or `|'|' (one quote) at the end of a word.  Thus you
+%	have a choice of `|d>|' or `|d'|' (*d>* or *d'*).
+
+
+\section{Punctuation}
+
+	Here's a table of correspondences for punctuation:
+\table \hfil#\hfil&&\enspace\hfil#\hfil\cr
+	*.*&*,*&*;*&*:*&*!*&*?*&*''*&*((*&*))*\cr
+	|.|&|,|&|;|&|:|&|!|&|?|&|''|&|((|&|))|\cr
+\endtable
+	The apostrophe is also generated by a single single-quote at the end
+	of a word: `*d'*' can be generated by `|d'|'.  There are also
+	digits, parentheses, brackets, hyphen, dashes, slash, per cent sign,
+	asterisk, plus and equals signs.
+
+\section{One-accent Greek}
+
+	The easiest way to write modern Greek is simply to use |'| for the
+	accent and otherwise to use |\begingreek|--|\endgreek| as before:
+	`*en arq'h hn o l'ogos*' is generated with `|en arq'h hn o l'ogos|'.
+
+	Malvern also has glyphs for a symmetrical accent (*\char3*) and
+	composite letters (such as *\char3 a*, *"\char3u*).  The macro
+	|\monotoniko|\note{This macro is so named for compatibility with the
+	|rgr|/|mrgr| macros \citeYannis.  It might usefully go in
+	|\everygreek|.} in Greek mode makes |'| an active character,
+	expanding to the symmetrical accent.  Then `|En'w|' produces
+	`*En\char3w*'.  In fact, the other accent characters |`| and |~| are
+	also made to substitute `*\char3*', and |<|, |>| and _|_ expand to
+	the null glyph, so that a text with all the breathings and accents
+	and be hacked into almost-correct one-accent Greek.\note{Again, for
+	compatibility with the |rgr|/|mrgr| macros.  Because monosyllables
+	should not have accents at all in one-accent Greek, a complete
+	conversion from old-style to new-style requires changes to the
+	manuscript anyway, so the usefulness of this feature is debatable!}
+	For example, `_>En~w|_' becomes `*\monotoniko >En~w|*'.
+
+\section{Variant glyphs}
+
+	Sigma has a variant called lunate sigma, written *Cc*.  These
+	letters can be obtained directly (produced by the character `|c|' in
+	the manuscript).  So that a given text can be switched between the
+	two styles, there is also a macro |\grlunatesigma|, which redefines
+	`|s|' is as active character equivalent to `|c|'.  Obviously this is
+	only useful when Greek mode is only used for plain texts, since it
+	prevents `|s|' from being used in control sequence names.
+
+	Similarly, there are two ways to write lower case phi: *f* and
+	*\char92 * (`|f|' and glyph~92).  There is no difference in meaning
+	between *f* and *\char92 *; the choice of one or the other is only
+	made on aesthetic grounds.  The macro |\grvarphi| redefines `|f|' as
+	an active character equivalent to `*\char92 *', in effect replacing
+	*f* with *\char92 *.
+
+	Normally these macros, if used, will go in |\everygreek|.
+	
+%}}}  typesetting
+\iffalse
+%{{{  background
+\section{Background}
+
+	This section is optional reading.
+
+\subsection{Development of the Levy-derived font families}
+
+	Silvio Levy's |gr| fonts \citeLevy\ used the \TeX~2 ligature system
+	to make *s* become *s@* when followed by a letter, and had glyphs
+	for almost all the composite letters.
+
+	Yannis Haralambous and Klaus Thull created a set of reduced
+	(128-glyph) fonts, for \TeX\ systems still unable to manage
+	256-glyph fonts \citeYannis.  These fonts (the |rgr| and |mrgr|
+	families) still used Levy's character programs.  Because they could
+	not include glyphs for all the composite letters, many composite
+	letters had to be obtained with macros rather than ligatures.  The
+	|mrgr| family is for new-style (one-accent) Greek.
+
+	Finally K.~J. Dryllerakis's Greek\TeX\ package (also called KDGreek)
+	\citeKD\ uses the Levy character programs again, but takes advantage
+	of the new ligature features of \TeX~3 to make *s@* become *s*
+	(without needing compound glyphs for every combination of *s@* with
+	a letter).  The fonts are given names starting with |kd|.
+	Greek\TeX\ also includes format files for plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX,
+	transliteration programs and other useful things.
+
+\subsection{Designing Greek letters for Malvern}
+
+	My Malvern-G encoding is intended to be `ligature-compatible' with
+	Levy's and Dryllerakis's, meaning that `|<'a|||' will produce
+	`*<'a|*' in each of them, even though this is glyph~141 in
+	|grreg10|, 201 in |kdgr10| and some random number in |ma55g10|.  The
+	punctuation characters have the same encoding.
+
+	Designing a sanserif Greek lower case alphabet (*alfabet*?) is tricky
+	because the lower case letters have a very cursive style, as if
+	hand-drawn with a brush by a scribe in a hurry -- which is pretty
+	much the opposite of most sanserif styles.  I~made sketches (on
+	paper) of Greek letters forced into the same sorts of shapes as
+	other Malvern letters, and the results were uniformly horrid.  The
+	original idea of Malvern was to make a humanist/geometric hybrid, so
+	I tried approaching it from the from the humanist end this time.
+
+%}}}  background
+\fi
+%{{{  references
+
+\section{References}
+
+	Since I don't speak a word of Greek -- the only word I know is
+	*barbaroi* and I don't know how to spell it -- I have relied on
+	reading between the lines of the documentation for other systems for
+	typesetting Greek, including Hart's Rules \citeHarts.
+
+	CTAN is the Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network, a collection of FTP
+	sites (such as |ftp.tex.ac.uk|, under directory |tex-archive|).
+
+\beginthe{bib} \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt
+	\the\bibliography
+	\par
+\endthe{bib}
+
+%}}}  postamble
+
+%{{{  samples
+
+\section{Examples of text in Malvern 55 and 56}
+
+\iffalse
+	This quotation is used by Haralambous and Thull \citeYannis\ as an
+	example of the old-style accent-and-breathing system:
+%{{{   Popess Johanna
+
+\begin twocolgr
+	>En~w| <esp'eran tin`a >exantl'hsas t`a murol'ogi'a tou
+	>ekoim~ato <o Froum'entios >ep`i t~hs >'ammou t~hs paral'ias,
+	katab`as >ex o>uran~wn <o >ap'ostolos >eke~inos t~wn Sax'onwn
+	>'hnoixe di`a maqa'iras t`a st'hjh to~u koimwm'enou,
+	e>is'hgage to`us <iero`us dakt'ulous tou e>is t`hn >op`hn kai
+	>exag`wn t`hn kard`ian >eb'ujisen a>ut'hn e>is l'akkon pl'hrh
+	<'udatos, <'oper <hg'iasen prohgoum'enws.  <H fl'egousa
+	>eke'inh kard'ia >'efrizen e>is t`o <'udwr <ws smap`is >ent`os
+	to~u thgan'iou, >afo~u d`e >ekr'uwsen, >'ejese p'alin a>ut`hn
+	<o <'agios e<is t`on t'opon ths ka`i kle'isas t`hn plhg`hn
+	>ep'estreyen e>is t`on >idik'on tou.
+
+	>'Etuq'e pote, >anagn~wst'a mou, n`a >apokoimhj~h|s m`e
+	>anup'oforon b~hqa, koim'wmenos n`a <idr'wsh|s ka`i >exupn'hsas
+	n`a e<urej~h|s >iatreum'enos?  >Agn~wn <'oti e>~isai
+	kal`a >ano'igeis mhqanik~ws t`o st'oma, <'ina plhr'wsh|s e>is
+	t`on >epikat'araton b~hqa t`on sun'hjh f'oron.  >All`a
+	p'oshn a>isj'anesai qar'an, m`h e<ur'iskwn e>is t`on l'arugga
+	t`o >oqlhp`on jhr'ion! O<'utw <'ama >'hnoixe ka`i <o
+	Froum'entios to`us >ofjalmo'us, <htoim'asjn n`a prosf'erh|
+	e>is t`hn >aq'ariston >Iw'annan t`hn sun'hjh dakr'uwn
+	spond'hn, >all`a par`a p~asan prosdok'ian o<i >ofjalmo'i
+	tou e<ur'ejhsan xhro`i ka'i n`a progeumat'ish| m~allon >`h
+	n`a kla'ush| >h|sj'aneto >'orexin met`a polu'hmeron nhste'ian
+	<o kal`os Benedekt~inos.
+\end twocolgr
+\rightline{\csc{Emmanouil Ro\"{\i}dis}, `The Popess Johanna (1896)'}
+\vskip 0pt plus \baselineskip
+
+%}}}   Popess Johanna
+\fi
+
+	The following paragraph is set in 11-point Malvern~55 (11-point
+	Malvern has comprable x-height to 12-point Computer Modern).  This
+	quotation is used as one of the examples in Levy's article
+	\citeLevy:
+\twocolgr
+	>All' >ako'usontai, >enper e>~u dok~h|s l'egein.  t'ode d'e sou
+	>ene'ohsa <'ama l'egontos, ka`i pr`os >emaut`on skop~w; e>i <'oti
+	m'alist'a me E>uj'ufrwn did'axeien, <ws o<i jeo`i <'apantes t`on
+	toio~uton j'anaton <hgo~untai >'adikon e>~inai, t'i m~allon >eg`w
+	mem'ajhka par' E>uj'ufronos, t'i pot' >est`in t`o <'osi'on te ka`i
+	t`o >an'osion?  jeomis`es m`en g`ar to~uto t`o >'epgon, <ws
+	>'eoiken, e>'in >'an; >all`a g`ar o>u to'utw| >ef'anh >'arti
+	<wrism'ena t`o <'osion ka`i m'h; t`o g`ar jeomis`es >`on ka`i
+	jeofil`es >ef'anh.  <wste to'utou m`en >af'ihm'i se, >~w E>uj'ufron;
+	e>i bo'ulei, p'antes a>ut`o <hge'isjwn jeo`i >'adikon ka`i p'antes
+	miso'untwn.  >all' >~ara to~uto n~un >epanorj'wmeja >en t~w| l'ogw|,
+	<ws <`o m`en p'antes o<i jeo`i mis~wsin, >an'osi'on >estin, <`o d'
+	>`an fil~wsin, <`osion; <`o d' >`an o<i m`en fil~wsin, o<i d`e
+	mis~wsin, o>ud'etera >`h amf'otera?  >~ar' o<'utw bo'ulei <hm~in
+	<wr'isjai n~un per`i to~u <os'iou ka`i to~u >anos'iou?
+\endtwocolgr
+	\rightline{Plato, `Euthyphro'}
+\vskip 1\medskipamount plus \baselineskip
+
+
+	This quotation (similarly stolen) is in Malvern~56 and has
+	|\grvarphi| and |\grlunatesigma| in effect:
+
+\twocolgr \gri \grvarphi \grlunatesigma
+	T`h stigm`h to'uth ni'wjw p'oso bar'u ''nai t`o must'hrio t~hs
+	xomol'oghshs.  <Ws t'wra, kane`is d`en x'erei p~ws p'erasa t`a du`o
+	qr'onia mou st`o <'Agion >'Oros.  O<i f'iloi mou jarro~un p`ws p~hga
+	n`a d~w buzantin`a kon'ismata >`h >ap`o mustikop'ajeia n`a z'hsw
+	mi`a perasm'enh >epoq'h.  Ka`i t'wra, n'a, ntr'epomai n`a mil'hsw.
+
+	P~ws n`a t`o p~w?  Jumo~umai <'ena >anoixi'atiko deilin'o, po`u
+	kat'ebaina t`on Ta"'ugeto, mi`a xafnik`h j'uella m`e k'uklwse kont`a
+	sto'us Pentaulo'us.  T'oso fober`os >anemos'ifounas, po`u >'epesa
+	katag~hs gi`a n`a m`hn gkremist~w.  O<i >astrap`es m' >'exwsan
+	<olo~uje ki >'ekleisa t`a m'atia m`hn tuflwj~w, ka`i kat'aqama,
+	p'istoma, per'imena.  <'Olo t`o pan'uyhlo boun`o >'etreme, ka`i du`o
+	>'elata d'ipla mou tsak'isthkan >ap' t`h m'esh ka`i br'onthxan
+	q'amou.  >'Eniwja t`o jei'afi to~u kerauno~u st`on >a'era, ka`i
+	xafnik`a x'espase <h mp'ora, >'epesen <o >'anemos, ka`i qontr'es,
+	jerm'es st'ales broq`h qt'uphsan t`a dentr`a ka`i t`o q~wma.  T`o
+	jum'ari, <h jro'umpa, t`o fask'omhlo, t`o flisko'uni, qtuphm'ena
+	>ap' t`o ner'o, t'inaxan t`is murwdi'es tous ki <'olh <h g~hs
+	m'urise.
+\endtwocolgr
+\rightline{\csc{Kazantzakis}, `Symposium'}
+\vskip 0pt plus \baselineskip
+
+%}}}  samples
+\iffalse
+%{{{  table
+
+*\ntable*
+\smallskip \noindent
+	This is a working encoding, and will likely be different in future
+	versions.
+%}}}  table
+\fi
+%{{{  24-pt sample
+
+\bigbreak
+\moveleft\leftmargin \vbox{ \hsize=\bodywd
+\hrule height 1pt \bigskip
+\begingreek \biggr\baselineskip=30pt
+\centerline{((ABGDEZHJIKLMNXOPRSCTUFVQYW))}
+\centerline{](abgdezhjiklmnxoprss^^`ctuf\char92 vqyw)[}
+\centerline{=0123456789---\%\char42 +/--''!,:;?.-}
+\centerline{\char3 '@ `@ ~@ <@ <'@ <`@ <~@ >@ >'@ >`@ >~@ "@ "'@ "`@ "~@
+	"\char3 @}
+\endgreek
+\medskip\hrule height 1pt
+}
+%}}}  24-pt sample
+\bye
+%}}} Malvern Greek manual
+
+% Local variables:
+% fill-prefix: "\t"
+% fill-column: 76
+% fold-folded-p: t
+% End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e1c797dcead
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+# Makefile for the PDCMAC package
+# Template for configure
+
+package		= @package@
+
+#  directory source code is in:
+srcdir		= @srcdir@
+
+#  directory for TeX macro files:
+texmf		= @texmf@
+texdir		= @texdir@
+docdir		= @docdir@
+
+#  End of configuration section
+########################################################################
+
+TEX		= tex </dev/null
+DVIPS		= dvips 
+FIG2EPSF	= $(srcdir)/fig2epsf
+ETAGS		= $(srcdir)/dtxtags
+INSTALL		= @INSTALL@
+INSTALL_DATA	= @INSTALL_DATA@
+MKDIR		= $(srcdir)/pmkdir $(MKDIRFLAGS)
+MKDIRFLAGS	= --mode=755
+
+code_files	= pdccode.tex pdccode2.tex
+
+#  The macro files are divided according to whether they have their own
+#  DTX file, or come from pdcmisc.dtx or pdcsty.dtx
+self_files	= pdcfmt2.dtx pdcfsel.dtx magrmac.dtx pdcoput5.dtx \
+		pdcadobe.dtx pdcl1maa.dtx maamac.dtx
+misc_files	= pdcmigr.tex pdcimth.tex pdchyex.tex pdccmsub.tex
+sty_files	= ma55lft.tex ma55doc.tex pdccmlft.tex pdccmdoc.tex\
+		pdcpsdoc.tex pdcpslft.tex pdcdoc.def pdclft.def
+macro_files	= $(self_files:.dtx=.tex) $(misc_files) $(sty_files)
+
+misc_dtx	= pdcmisc.dtx
+sty_dtx		= pdcsty.dtx
+dtxfiles	= $(self_files) $(sty_dtx) $(misc_dtx) pdccode.dtx
+dvifiles	= $(dtxfiles:.dtx=.dvi) pdcguide.dvi
+
+figures		= oput01.eps oput02.eps
+documents	= pdcguide.tex magrman.tex copying.tex pdcmacvn.tex
+config_files	= makefile.in configure
+miscscript	= fig2epsf pmkdir pinstall dtxtags
+miscdoc		= 00readme.txt install.txt copying.txt version.txt
+
+distfiles	= $(miscdoc) pdcguide.dvi pdcmondo.tex \
+		$(code_files) $(dtxfiles) $(documents) $(config_files) \
+		$(figures) $(figures:.eps=.fig) \
+		$(miscscript) $(miscscript:=.1)
+
+########################################################################
+#	Standard targets
+
+all: 		pdcguide.dvi $(macro_files)
+
+#  Note.  This target assumes either I can use GNU "install", or
+#  an "install" compatible with it, or the "pinstall" shellscript supplied.
+install:	all pdccode.dvi
+	test -d $(texdir) || $(MKDIR) $(texdir)
+	$(INSTALL_DATA) $(macro_files) $(texdir)
+	-test -d $(docdir) || $(MKDIR) $(docdir)
+	-$(INSTALL_DATA) $(dvifiles) $(figures) $(miscdoc) $(docdir)
+	-test -r news.txt && $(INSTALL_DATA) news.txt $(docdir)
+
+uninstall:
+	cd $(texdir); rm -f $(macro_files) 
+	cd $(docdir) && rm -f $(dvifiles) $(figures) $(miscdoc)
+
+mostlyclean:
+	rm -f *.log *.ilg *.toc *.bak
+clean:		mostlyclean
+	rm -f   *.dvi *.aux *.idx $(macro_files) .misc.flag .sty.flag
+distclean:	clean
+	rm -f makefile config.status TAGS
+realclean:	distclean
+	rm -f *.ind $(figures) version.txt
+
+dist:		$(distfiles)
+	sed -n '/pdcmacv/s/.*[^0-9.]\([0-9.]*\)[^0-9.].*$$/$(package)-\1/p' \
+		pdcmacvn.tex > .fn
+	rm -rf `cat .fn`
+	mkdir `cat .fn`
+	cp -p $(distfiles) `cat .fn`
+	-cp -p ChangeLog `cat .fn`/changes.txt
+	-cp -p news.txt `cat .fn`/news.txt
+	cd `cat .fn`; ls -Rl > contents.txt
+	tar -cf `cat .fn`.tar `cat .fn` && gzip -v9f `cat .fn`.tar
+	cd `cat .fn`; zip -9qrl ../`cat ../.fn`.zip *
+	rm -rf `cat .fn` .fn
+
+version.txt: $(dtxfiles) $(miscscript) pdcmacvn.tex
+	sed -e 's/\\def\\pdcmacversion{\([0-9]*\.[0-9]*\)}/* $(package) release \1 */' \
+	  -e 's/\\def\\pdcmacversion{\([0-9]*\.[0-9]*\)\.\([0-9]*\)}/* $(package) release \1, patch level \2 */' \
+	pdcmacvn.tex > version.txt
+	date '+Version ID list generated %Y-%m-%d' >> version.txt
+	echo >> version.txt
+	( grep -h 'rcs\$$Id' $(dtxfiles) | \
+	sed -e 's/^.*: \(.*\) \$$.*$$/\1/' -e 's/,v/ =/' | sort; echo; \
+	grep version= $(miscscript) configure | \
+	sed -e 's/:version=/ = /' -e 's/"//g' | sort ) | \
+	align_equals >> version.txt
+
+tagfiles	= $(dtxfiles)
+TAGS:		$(tagfiles) $(srcdir)/dtxtags
+	$(ETAGS) $(ETAGSFLAGS) $(tagfiles)
+
+########################################################################
+#	Individual targets
+
+$(self_files) $(miscfiles): pdccode.tex
+$(sty_files): 	pdccode2.tex
+
+pdcguide.dvi magrman.dvi: $(macro_files)
+pdcguide.dvi:	 copying.tex pdcmacvn.tex
+
+pdcoput5.dvi pdcoput5.tex: $(figures)
+
+$(misc_files): .misc.flag
+.misc.flag:	$(misc_dtx)
+	$(TEX) $(misc_dtx) && touch .misc.flag
+
+$(sty_files): 	.sty.flag
+.sty.flag:	$(sty_dtx)
+	$(TEX) $(sty_dtx) && touch .sty.flag
+
+pdccode.dvi pdccode.tex:   pdccode.dtx
+	$(TEX) pdccode.dtx
+	grep endinput tmp.tex && mv tmp.tex pdccode.tex
+
+pdcguide.ps: pdcguide.tex copying.tex $(macro_files)
+	echo '\let\usepsfonts! \input pdcguide' > tmp.tex
+	$(TEX) tmp
+	rm -f tmp.tex
+	$(DVIPS) $(DVIPSFLAGS) -o $@ tmp
+
+#  A scratch file for doing tests:
+tryit.dvi:	tryit.tex ma55lft.tex pdcl1maa.tex
+	$(TEX) tryit
+
+
+# rules for the configuration itself
+makefile: makefile.in config.status
+	sh config.status makefile
+config.status: $(srcdir)/configure
+	sh config.status --recheck --nocreate
+
+########################################################################
+#	Implicit rules
+
+.SUFFIXES:	.dtx .tex .dvi .ps .eps .fig
+.dtx.tex:
+	$(TEX) $<
+.tex.dvi:
+	$(TEX) $<
+.dvi.ps:
+	$(DVIPS) $(DVIPSFLAGS) $< -o $@
+.fig.eps:
+	$(FIG2EPSF) $< > $@
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e4b75f258f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput01.fig
@@ -0,0 +1,323 @@
+#FIG 2.1
+80 2
+6 89 317 224 329
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 329 224 329 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 329 224 317 89 317 89 329 224 329 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 227 224 299
+6 89 287 224 299
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 299 224 299 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 299 224 287 89 287 89 299 224 299 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 272 224 284
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 284 224 284 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 284 224 272 89 272 89 284 224 284 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 257 224 269
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 269 224 269 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 269 224 257 89 257 89 269 224 269 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 242 224 254
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 254 224 254 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 254 224 242 89 242 89 254 224 254 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 227 224 239
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 239 224 239 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 239 224 227 89 227 89 239 224 239 9999 9999
+-6
+-6
+6 89 152 224 224
+6 89 212 224 224
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 224 224 224 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 224 224 212 89 212 89 224 224 224 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 197 224 209
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 209 224 209 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 209 224 197 89 197 89 209 224 209 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 182 224 194
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 194 224 194 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 194 224 182 89 182 89 194 224 194 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 167 224 179
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 179 224 179 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 179 224 167 89 167 89 179 224 179 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 152 224 164
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 164 224 164 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 164 224 152 89 152 89 164 224 164 9999 9999
+-6
+-6
+6 89 77 224 149
+6 89 137 224 149
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 149 224 149 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 149 224 137 89 137 89 149 224 149 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 122 224 134
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 134 224 134 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 134 224 122 89 122 89 134 224 134 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 107 224 119
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 119 224 119 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 119 224 107 89 107 89 119 224 119 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 92 224 104
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 104 224 104 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 104 224 92 89 92 89 104 224 104 9999 9999
+-6
+6 89 77 224 89
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 89 224 89 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 224 89 224 77 89 77 89 89 224 89 9999 9999
+-6
+-6
+6 239 77 374 149
+6 239 137 374 149
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 149 374 149 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 149 374 137 239 137 239 149 374 149 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 122 374 134
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 134 374 134 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 134 374 122 239 122 239 134 374 134 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 107 374 119
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 119 374 119 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 119 374 107 239 107 239 119 374 119 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 92 374 104
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 104 374 104 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 104 374 92 239 92 239 104 374 104 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 77 374 89
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 89 374 89 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 89 374 77 239 77 239 89 374 89 9999 9999
+-6
+-6
+6 239 152 374 224
+6 239 212 374 224
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 224 374 224 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 224 374 212 239 212 239 224 374 224 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 197 374 209
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 209 374 209 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 209 374 197 239 197 239 209 374 209 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 182 374 194
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 194 374 194 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 194 374 182 239 182 239 194 374 194 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 167 374 179
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 179 374 179 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 179 374 167 239 167 239 179 374 179 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 152 374 164
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 164 374 164 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 164 374 152 239 152 239 164 374 164 9999 9999
+-6
+-6
+6 239 227 374 299
+6 239 287 374 299
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 299 374 299 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 299 374 287 239 287 239 299 374 299 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 272 374 284
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 284 374 284 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 284 374 272 239 272 239 284 374 284 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 257 374 269
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 269 374 269 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 269 374 257 239 257 239 269 374 269 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 242 374 254
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 254 374 254 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 254 374 242 239 242 239 254 374 254 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 227 374 239
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 239 374 239 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 239 374 227 239 227 239 239 374 239 9999 9999
+-6
+-6
+6 239 302 374 374
+6 239 362 374 374
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 374 374 374 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 374 374 362 239 362 239 374 374 374 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 347 374 359
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 359 374 359 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 359 374 347 239 347 239 359 374 359 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 332 374 344
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 344 374 344 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 344 374 332 239 332 239 344 374 344 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 317 374 329
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 329 374 329 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 329 374 317 239 317 239 329 374 329 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 302 374 314
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 314 374 314 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 314 374 302 239 302 239 314 374 314 9999 9999
+-6
+-6
+6 239 377 374 449
+6 239 437 374 449
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 449 374 449 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 449 374 437 239 437 239 449 374 449 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 422 374 434
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 434 374 434 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 434 374 422 239 422 239 434 374 434 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 407 374 419
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 419 374 419 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 419 374 407 239 407 239 419 374 419 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 392 374 404
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 404 374 404 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 404 374 392 239 392 239 404 374 404 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 377 374 389
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 389 374 389 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 389 374 377 239 377 239 389 374 389 9999 9999
+-6
+-6
+6 239 482 374 494
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 494 374 494 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 494 374 482 239 482 239 494 374 494 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 467 374 479
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 479 374 479 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 479 374 467 239 467 239 479 374 479 9999 9999
+-6
+6 239 452 374 464
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 239 464 374 464 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 374 464 374 452 239 452 239 464 374 464 9999 9999
+-6
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 59 449 59 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 524 449 524 9999 9999
+2 2 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0
+	 479 554 479 29 59 29 59 554 479 554 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 254 344 9999 9999
+2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 308 224 308 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 563 269 569 344 569 344 563 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 308 569 317 581 320 581 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 29 344 83 308 9999 9999
+2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
+	 224 494 224 77 164 77 164 494 224 494 9999 9999
+2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
+	 299 494 299 77 239 77 239 494 299 494 9999 9999
+2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
+	 374 494 374 77 314 77 314 494 374 494 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0
+	 449 59 449 47 89 47 89 59 449 59 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0
+	 449 524 449 512 89 512 89 524 449 524 9999 9999
+2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
+	 449 494 449 77 389 77 389 494 449 494 9999 9999
+2 2 1 1 -1 5 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
+	 149 494 149 77 89 77 89 494 149 494 9999 9999
+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 36 113 326 caption

+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 44 146 215 column 0

+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 44 311 218 column 1

+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 42 275 53 headline

+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 37 359 515 footline

+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 39 323 584 grid cell

+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 48 8 371 separator

+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 36 8 359 caption

+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 15 54 104 419 illustration

+4 0 0 12 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 15 54 419 404 illustration

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fb7858b0c43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/oput02.fig
@@ -0,0 +1,273 @@
+#FIG 2.1
+80 2
+6 179 317 254 329
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 329 254 317 179 317 179 329 254 329 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 329 254 329 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 332 254 344
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 344 254 332 179 332 179 344 254 344 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 344 254 344 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 287 254 299
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 299 254 287 179 287 179 299 254 299 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 299 254 299 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 272 254 284
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 284 254 272 179 272 179 284 254 284 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 284 254 284 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 257 254 269
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 269 254 257 179 257 179 269 254 269 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 269 254 269 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 242 254 254
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 254 254 242 179 242 179 254 254 254 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 254 254 254 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 227 254 239
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 239 254 227 179 227 179 239 254 239 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 239 254 239 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 212 254 224
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 224 254 212 179 212 179 224 254 224 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 224 254 224 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 197 254 209
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 209 254 197 179 197 179 209 254 209 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 209 254 209 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 182 254 194
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 194 254 182 179 182 179 194 254 194 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 194 254 194 9999 9999
+-6
+6 179 167 254 179
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 179 254 167 179 167 179 179 254 179 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 179 254 179 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 347 344 359
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 359 344 347 269 347 269 359 344 359 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 359 344 359 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 317 344 329
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 329 344 317 269 317 269 329 344 329 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 329 344 329 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 332 344 344
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 344 344 332 269 332 269 344 344 344 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 344 344 344 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 287 344 299
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 299 344 287 269 287 269 299 344 299 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 299 344 299 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 272 344 284
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 284 344 272 269 272 269 284 344 284 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 284 344 284 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 257 344 269
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 269 344 257 269 257 269 269 344 269 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 269 344 269 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 242 344 254
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 254 344 242 269 242 269 254 344 254 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 254 344 254 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 227 344 239
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 239 344 227 269 227 269 239 344 239 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 239 344 239 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 212 344 224
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 224 344 212 269 212 269 224 344 224 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 224 344 224 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 197 344 209
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 209 344 197 269 197 269 209 344 209 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 209 344 209 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 182 344 194
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 194 344 182 269 182 269 194 344 194 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 194 344 194 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 167 344 179
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 179 344 167 269 167 269 179 344 179 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 179 344 179 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 362 344 374
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 374 344 362 269 362 269 374 344 374 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 374 344 374 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 377 344 389
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 389 344 377 269 377 269 389 344 389 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 389 344 389 9999 9999
+-6
+6 269 302 344 314
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 4 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 314 344 302 269 302 269 314 344 314 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 269 314 344 314 9999 9999
+-6
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 59 434 59 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 89 524 434 524 9999 9999
+2 2 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 0 0 0
+	 479 554 479 29 59 29 59 554 479 554 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 494 74 494 494 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 494 494 494 527 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 509 59 509 89 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 524 29 524 74 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 524 494 524 554 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 539 29 539 554 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 89 569 434 569 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 59 584 479 584 9999 9999
+2 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 4.000 -1 0 0
+	 425 89 515 89 9999 9999
+2 1 1 1 -1 0 0 0 4.000 -1 0 0
+	 431 59 515 59 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 449 59 449 74 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 449 104 449 89 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 329 158 344 158 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 374 158 359 158 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0
+	 434 524 434 512 89 512 89 524 434 524 9999 9999
+2 2 0 0 -1 10 0 5 0.000 0 0 0
+	 434 59 434 47 89 47 89 59 434 59 9999 9999
+2 2 1 1 -1 10 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
+	 434 164 434 74 89 74 89 164 434 164 9999 9999
+2 2 1 1 -1 10 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
+	 434 389 434 164 359 164 359 389 434 389 9999 9999
+2 2 1 1 -1 10 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
+	 164 389 164 164 89 164 89 389 164 389 9999 9999
+2 2 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 0 0 0
+	 254 389 254 164 179 164 179 389 254 389 9999 9999
+2 2 0 1 -1 10 0 0 0.000 0 0 0
+	 344 389 344 164 269 164 269 389 344 389 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 155 284 155 299 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 0
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 155 329 155 314 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 179 158 254 158 9999 9999
+2 1 0 1 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 1 1
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	0 0 1.000 4.000 8.000
+	 365 164 365 389 9999 9999
+2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 170 164 170 389 9999 9999
+2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 179 308 254 308 9999 9999
+2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 260 164 260 389 9999 9999
+2 1 0 2 -1 0 0 0 0.000 -1 0 0
+	 350 164 350 389 9999 9999
+2 2 1 1 -1 0 0 0 4.000 0 0 0
+	 89 389 89 494 434 494 434 389 89 389 9999 9999
+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 32 269 566 bodywd

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 36 269 581 paperwd

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 24 521 524 botmg

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 49 491 509 footlineskip

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 28 491 284 bodyht

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 32 536 284 paperht

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 53 506 74 headlineskip

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 24 521 53 topmg

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 30 449 86 topskip

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 27 350 155 colsep

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 27 269 119 topbox

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 27 269 464 botbox

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 32 269 518 footline

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 36 254 56 headline

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 37 218 266 column 0

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 37 305 266 column 1

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 28 125 221 leftbox

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 31 218 338 caption

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 14 215 374 illo

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 25 215 152 colwd

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 21 374 284 colht

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 0.00000 4 13 33 407 251 rightbox

+4 1 1 10 0 -1 0 1.57080 4 13 29 152 308 capsep

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..443b766d82c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,609 @@
+% pdcadobe.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcadobe.tex -*-tex-*-
+        
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "PDCADOBE -- Formatting Macros",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 1.3 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:07:31 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and is the source code for 
+%%%                the TeX definitions file pdcadobe.tex.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
+%%%                definitions file and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
+%%%}
+
+%{{{ pdcadobe
+%{{{  preamble
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+
+\document
+\rcs$Id: pdcadobe.dtx,v 1.3 1995/03/30 16:07:31 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+
+\codefile{pdcadobe.tex}
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  introduction
+	
+\author{P. Damian Cugley}
+\title{PDCAdobe---Macros for using Adobe fonts}
+\section{Introduction}
+	
+	This document describes |pdcadobe.tex|, a collection of macros
+	for using Adobe's Standard Roman character set, via DVIPS's
+	variation on the \TeX\ Text encoding.  
+
+\notepar
+	You will need to use a different strategy if your PostScript
+	fonts adhere strictly to the \TeX\ Text conventions (the
+	conventions of Computer Modern Roman, described in {\it\TeX
+	book}\/ Appendix~F, and called OT1 by the \LaTeX~3 team), such
+	as the fonts generated with Fontinst.
+\endnotepar
+
+\subsec{New text symbols}
+
+	The new characters now available in text are:
+$$\halign{\indent\tt\char`\\#1\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr
+	quotesingle&	typewriter-style apostrophe ({\tt\char"0D })\cr
+	quotedouble&	typewriter-style double apostrophe ({\tt"})\cr
+	asciicircum&	ASCII circumflex\cr
+	asciitilde&	ASCII tilde\cr
+}$$	 
+
+
+\subsec{Use of the Symbol font}
+
+	The assumption is that one of the resons for using PostScript
+	fonts is that, if you stick to the `Adobe~35', the resulting
+	PostScript files are much smaller because no font bitmaps need
+	to be downloaded.  On this assumption, Adobe's Symbol font is
+	used whenever possible, even when the Computer Modern symbol is
+	arguably prettier.
+
+	The Symbol font will need to have its own maths family, which by
+	convention this file expects to find defined as |\asyfam|.
+
+\subsec{Composite letters}
+
+\setbox0=\hbox{accent}
+\edef\\{\vrule height\the\ht0 depth\the\dp0 width\the\wd0 \relax }
+
+	Composite letters are those made from some base letter and a
+	{\it mark}, for example {\it\'e}, {\it\"u}.\footnote*{`Composite
+	letters' is a euphemism for what English speakers usually refer
+	to as `\\ed letters', since the word `\\' tends to provoke
+	lectures to the effect that composite letters are not considered
+	to be `\\ed' in many of the lanuages in which they are used.}
+	In the Adobe Standard Roman character set, and hence in
+	|afm2tfm|'s encoding, the composite letters of ISO 8859--1 are
+	included as separate glyphs.  These glyphs are accessed using
+	ligatures between mark glyphs and base letters (so that |^^13e|
+	in the manuscript file produces `\'e').  Unfortunately,
+	exploiting this is tricky if we also want to allow for composite
+	glyphs {\it not} included in the PostScript fonts.
+
+	The approach taken in these definitions is that \TeX's composite
+	letter commands (|\'|, |\"|, and friends) are left unchanged, so
+	that `|\'e|' works through \TeX's |\|\\ command.  The magic
+	glyphs are available as commands with names like |\acuteglyph|
+	or via the Latin-1 special symbols, so that `|\acuteglyph e|' or
+	`|^^b4e|' (which might liik like `{\tt\char"13 e}' on the screen
+	if your computer uses Latin-1) produces `\'e' as a single glyph
+	(which might mean tha mark is better aligned).  Finally, the
+	Latin-1 composite letters generate the single glyphs vial
+	ligatures, so that `|^^e9|' (which may well look like `{\tt\'e}'
+	on the screen) expands to `|\acuteglyph e|' and hence `\'e'.
+
+\subsec{About this document}
+
+	The definitions file and the printed documentation are both in
+	|pdcadobe.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The
+	\LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for
+	similar purposes.}  which, when processed by plain \TeX,
+	generates a fresh copy of |pdcadobe.tex| in the current directory
+	in addition to the |dvi| file.  This ensures that the printed
+	documentation and the code it describes are identical.  The
+	|dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|.
+
+%}}}  introduction
+%{{{  File identification
+\section{File identification}
+	
+	Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
+	file.
+
+\code
+	\|\% pdcadobe.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- macros for Adobe style fonts
+	|
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "Formatting macros for Adobe-style fonts.
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%% }
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
+	|
+\endcode
+%}}}  file id
+%{{{  chardefs
+\section{Characters available in all styles}
+
+	The following characters are in the fonts generated by
+	|afm2tfm|, so are available in all styles.
+\code
+	|\chardef\quotesingle="0D
+	|\chardef\quotedouble="22
+	|\chardef\_="5F
+	|\chardef\asciicircum="80
+	|\chardef\asciitilde="81
+	|\chardef\cents="A2
+	|\chardef\pounds="A3
+	|\chardef\fractionslash="A4
+	|\chardef\yen="A5
+	|\chardef\florin="A6
+	|\chardef\S="A7
+	|\chardef\currency="A8
+	|\chardef\lguillemet="AB
+	|\chardef\dag="B2
+	|\chardef\ddag="B3
+	|\chardef\gbdecimal="B4
+	|\chardef\P="B6
+	|\chardef\bullet="B7
+	|\chardef\quotesinglebase="B8
+	|\chardef\quotedblbase="B9
+	|\chardef\rguillemet="BB
+	|\chardef\ellipsis="BC \def\dots{\ellipsis\thinspace}
+	|\chardef\permille="BD
+	|\chardef\orda="E3
+	|\chardef\ordo="EB
+\endcode
+	Some glyphs, like |\fractionslash| and |\gbdecimal| may well be
+	used in maths mode, but are defined using |\chardef| to allow
+	them to be used in text as well.
+
+	The definition of |\dots| adds the thin space that is included
+	in plain \TeX's |\dots|, so that `|\dots,|' will have a thin
+	space between the third full stop and the comma.
+
+\subsec{Maths stuff}
+
+	These symbols are available in maths mode, coming from the |\rm|
+	font (fam~0).
+\code
+	|\mathchardef\backslash="205C
+	|\edef\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308} \let\{=\lbrace \mathcode`\{="407B
+	|\mathcode`\|="707C 	\mathchardef\mid="307C
+	|\edef\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309} \let\}=\rbrace \mathcode`\}="507D
+	|\mathchardef\sim="3081
+	|\mathchardef\cdot="20B4
+	|\mathchardef\bullet="20B7
+	|\mathchardef\ldots="60BC
+\endcode
+	There {\it are} extensible braces in the Adobe Symbol font,
+	which I~would have used for the |\lbrace| and |\rbrace|
+	commands.  Unfortunately, the TFM file generated with |afm2tfm|
+	seems to lack the special information that makes extensible
+	characters work, so the |cmex10| glyphs must be used instead.
+
+\subsec{Marks for composite letters}
+
+	Some common accented letters can be got by printing the accent
+	glyph before the letter glyph.  However not all combinations
+	will work, so I~have left plain \TeX's definitions in place.
+
+	For later reference, the glyphs used for the accents are given
+	names.
+\code
+	|\chardef\graveglyph="12
+	|\chardef\acuteglyph="13
+	|\chardef\hookglyph="14
+	|\chardef\breveglyph="15
+	|\chardef\macronglyph="16
+	|\chardef\ringglyph="17
+	|\chardef\cedillaglyph="18
+	|\chardef\circumglyph="5E
+	|\chardef\tildeglyph="7E
+	|\chardef\twodotsglyph="7F
+	|\chardef\dotglyph="C7
+	|\chardef\hungarianglyph="CD
+	|\chardef\ogonekglyph="CE
+\endcode
+	
+
+	Some special letters and marks have been moved to new slots.
+\code
+	|\chardef\AA="C8 \chardef\aa="98
+	|\chardef\L="E8 \chardef\l="F8
+	|\def\.#1{\accent\dotglyph #1}
+	|\def\H#1{\accent\hungarianglyph"CD #1}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  chardefs
+%{{{  adobe sy
+\section{Adobe Symbol font characters}
+
+	Most of Adobe's Symbol font's glyphs exist already in one of the
+	maths fonts.  Nevertheless I~think it makes sense to use them
+	whenever possible, because if it so happens that none of the
+	glyphs in the maths fonts are used, the bitmaps for the fonts
+	may be omitted from the PostScript file, making it much smaller.
+	For these definitions to work, there must be a family |\asyfam|
+	and font nickname |\asy|.
+
+\code
+	|\ifx\asyfam\UNDEFINED 
+	|    \newfam\asyfam 
+	|\fi
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Extracting the fam name}
+
+\code
+	|\edef\\{\ifcase\asyfam 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or
+	|    8\or 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	Where plain \TeX's definition uses glyphs from the roman font,
+	I~have let the definition stand.
+\code
+	|\mathchardef\forall="0\\22
+	|\mathchardef\exists="0\\24
+	|\mathchardef\suchthat="0\\27
+	|\mathcode`*="2\\2A
+	|\mathcode`,="6\\2C
+	|\mathcode`-="2\\2D
+	|\mathcode`.="2\\2E
+	|\mathcode`/="2\\2F
+	|\mathcode`<="3\\3C
+	|\mathcode`>="3\\3E
+\smallbreak
+	|\mathchardef\cong="3\\40
+	|\mathchardef\Alpha="0\\41
+	|\mathchardef\Beta="0\\42
+	|\mathchardef\Chi="0\\43
+	|\mathchardef\Delta="0\\44
+	|\mathchardef\Epsilon="0\\45
+	|\mathchardef\Phi="0\\46
+	|\mathchardef\Gamma="0\\47
+	|\mathchardef\Eta="0\\48
+	|\mathchardef\Iota="0\\49
+	|\mathchardef\vartheta="0\\4A
+	|\mathchardef\Kappa="0\\4B
+	|\mathchardef\Lambda="0\\4C
+	|\mathchardef\Mu="0\\4D
+	|\mathchardef\Ni="0\\4E
+	|\mathchardef\Omicron="0\\4F
+\smallbreak
+	|\mathchardef\Pi="0\\50
+	|\mathchardef\Theta="0\\51
+	|\mathchardef\Rho="0\\52
+	|\mathchardef\Sigma="0\\53
+	|\mathchardef\Tau="0\\54
+	|\mathchardef\varUpsilon="0\\55
+	|\mathchardef\varsigma="0\\56
+	|\mathchardef\Omega="0\\57
+	|\mathchardef\Xi="0\\58
+	|\mathchardef\Psi="0\\59
+	|\mathchardef\Zeta="0\\5A
+%
+	|\mathchardef\therefore="3\\5C
+%
+	|\mathchardef\perp="3\\5E
+%
+\smallbreak
+%
+	|\mathchardef\alpha="0\\61
+	|\mathchardef\beta="0\\62
+	|\mathchardef\chi="0\\63
+	|\mathchardef\delta="0\\64
+	|\mathchardef\epsilon="0\\65
+	|\mathchardef\phi="0\\66
+	|\mathchardef\gamma="0\\67
+	|\mathchardef\eta="0\\68
+	|\mathchardef\iota="0\\69
+	|\mathchardef\varphi="0\\6A
+	|\mathchardef\kappa="0\\6B
+	|\mathchardef\lambda="0\\6C
+	|\mathchardef\mu="0\\6D
+	|\mathchardef\ni="0\\6E
+	|\mathchardef\omicron="0\\6F
+\smallbreak
+	|\mathchardef\pi="0\\70
+	|\mathchardef\theta="0\\71
+	|\mathchardef\rho="0\\72
+	|\mathchardef\sigma="0\\73
+	|\mathchardef\tau="0\\74
+	|\mathchardef\upsilon="0\\75
+	|\mathchardef\varpi="0\\76
+	|\mathchardef\omega="0\\77
+	|\mathchardef\xi="0\\78
+	|\mathchardef\psi="0\\79
+	|\mathchardef\zeta="0\\7A
+	|\mathchardef\sim="3\\7E
+%
+\smallbreak
+	|\mathchardef\Upsilon="0\\A1
+	|\mathcode`'="0\\A2 \mathchardef\minutes="0\\A2
+	|\mathchardef\leq="3\\A3 \let\le=\leq
+	|\mathchardef\fractionslash="0\\A4
+	|\mathchardef\infinity="0\\A5
+%
+	|\mathchardef\clubsuit="0\\A7
+	|\mathchardef\diamondsuit="0\\A8
+	|\mathchardef\heartsuit="0\\A9
+	|\mathchardef\spadesuit="0\\AA
+	|\mathchardef\leftrightarrow="3\\AB
+	|\mathchardef\leftarrow="3\\AC \let\gets=\rightarrow
+	|\mathchardef\uparrow="3\\AD
+	|\mathchardef\rightarrow="3\\AE \let\to=\rightarrow
+	|\mathchardef\downarrow="3\\AF
+\smallskip
+	|\mathchardef\degrees="0\\B0
+	|\mathchardef\pm="2\\B1
+	|\mathchardef\seconds="0\\B2
+	|\mathchardef\geq="3\\B3 \let\ge=\geq
+	|\mathchardef\times="2\\B4
+	|\mathchardef\propto="3\\B5
+	|\mathchardef\partial="0\\B6
+%
+	|\mathchardef\div="2\\B8
+	|\mathchardef\neq="3\\B9 \let\ne=\neq
+	|\mathchardef\equiv="3\\BA
+	|\mathchardef\approx="3\\BB
+	|\mathchardef\ldots="6\\BC
+	|\edef\arrowvert{\delimiter"0\\BD33C }
+	|\mathchardef\relbar"3\\BE
+	|\edef\crlf{\noexpand\mathexbox\\BF}
+\smallbreak
+	|\mathchardef\aleph="0\\C0
+	|\mathchardef\Im="0\\C1
+	|\mathchardef\Re="0\\C2
+	|\mathchardef\wp="0\\C3
+	|\mathchardef\otimes="2\\C4
+	|\mathchardef\oplus="2\\C5
+	|\mathchardef\emptyset="0\\C6
+	|\mathchardef\cap="2\\C7
+	|\mathchardef\cup="2\\C8
+	|\mathchardef\supset="3\\C9
+	|\mathchardef\supseteq="3\\CA
+	|\mathchardef\nsubset="3\\CB
+	|\mathchardef\subset="3\\CC
+	|\mathchardef\subseteq="3\\CD
+	|\mathchardef\in="3\\CE
+	|\mathchardef\nin="3\\CF
+\smallbreak
+	|\mathchardef\angle="0\\D0
+	|\mathchardef\nabla="0\\D1
+	|\edef\registered{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D2}
+	|\edef\copyright{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D3}
+	|\edef\trademark{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D4}
+	|\mathchardef\prod="1\\D5
+	|\edef\sqrt{\radical"\\D6370 }
+	|\mathchardef\cdot="2\\D7
+	|\mathchardef\neg="0\\D8 \let\lnot=\neg
+	|\mathchardef\wedge="3\\D9 \let\land=\wedge
+	|\mathchardef\vee="3\\DA \let\lor=\vee
+	|\mathchardef\Leftrightarrow="3\\DB
+	|\mathchardef\Leftarrow="3\\DC
+	|\mathchardef\Uparrow="3\\DD
+	|\mathchardef\Rightarrow="3\\DE
+	|\mathchardef\Downarrow="3\\DF
+\smallbreak
+	|\mathchardef\diamond="3\\E0
+	|\edef\langle{\delimiter"4\\E130A }
+	|\mathchardef\sum="1\\E5
+	|\edef\rangle{\delimiter"5\\F130B }
+\endcode
+	(I haven't bothered redefining those delimiters based on parts of
+	large delimiters.)
+	
+%}}}  adobe sy
+%{{{  ISO 8859-1 support
+\section{ISO 8859--1 input}
+
+	ISO~8859--1 (Latin-1) is the de facto standard character
+	encoding in a large numebr of countries, and so we shall try to
+	make a reasonable number of Latin-1 characters available.
+
+\subsec{Symbols}
+
+	Those characters whose code is the same as the code of the
+	corresponding glyph are left alone (with catcode~12).  For
+	example, |^^a3| (pounds sterling) is left alone.
+
+	Those that have an equivalent |\chardef| (or |\mathchardef|)
+	name are defined with |\let| (for example, |^^a4| is |\let| to
+	|\currency|).  Those with an equivalent standard ligature use
+	that ligature.  These conventions hopefully insulate these
+	definitions against changes in the encoding.
+
+	The characters that represent marks for composite
+	letters\footnote*{This phrase is used on the grounds that the
+	word {\it accent} tends to provoke lectures on ways in which
+	many composite letters do {\it not} represent accents in the
+	languages in which they are used.} will form ligatures with the
+	following letter---one may write `{\tt\char"7F u\char"18 c}' to
+	get `\"u\c c'.
+
+	I don't use |\declareactivechar| on these because they would not
+	work properly in verbatim text with catcode~12.  (Extending
+	verbatim text to include Latin-1 will take a few definitions
+	along the same lines as |\ttlq| etc.).
+\code
+	|\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~
+	|\catcode`^^a1\active \def^^a1{!`}
+% 	A2
+%	A3	
+	|\catcode`^^a4\active \let^^a4=\currency
+%	A5
+%	A6 XXX
+% 	A7
+	|\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\twodotsglyph
+	|\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright
+	|\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda
+%	AB
+	|\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot
+	|\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\-
+	|\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered
+	|\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\macronglyph
+\smallbreak
+	|\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees
+	|\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm
+	|\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2}
+	|\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3}
+	|\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\acuteglyph
+	|\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu
+%	B6
+	|\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal
+	|\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\cedillaglyph
+	|\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1}
+	|\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo
+%	BB
+	|\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14}
+	|\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12}
+	|\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34}
+	|\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`}
+\smallbreak	
+	|\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times
+	|\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Composite letters}
+
+	The composite letters acer accessed via ligatures so that they
+	are immune to some possible changes in encoding.
+\code
+	|\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\graveglyph A}
+	|\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\acuteglyph A}
+	|\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\circumglyph A}
+	|\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\tildeglyph A}
+	|\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\twodotsglyph A}
+	|\catcode`^^c5\active \def^^c5{\ringglyph A}
+	|\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE
+	|\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\cedillaglyph C}
+	|\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\graveglyph E}
+	|\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\acuteglyph E}
+	|\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\circumglyph E}
+	|\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\twodotsglyph E}
+	|\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\graveglyph I}
+	|\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\acuteglyph I}
+	|\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\circumglyph I}
+	|\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\twodotsglyph I}
+\smallbreak
+%	|\catcode`^^d0\active \chardef^^d0="?? %  DH
+	|\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\tildeglyph N}
+	|\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\graveglyph O}
+	|\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\acuteglyph O}
+	|\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\circumglyph O}
+	|\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\tildeglyph O}
+	|\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\twodotsglyph O}
+	|\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O
+	|\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\graveglyph U}
+	|\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\acuteglyph U}
+	|\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\circumglyph U}
+	|\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\twodotsglyph U}
+	|\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\acuteglyph Y}
+%	|\catcode`^^de\active \def^^de{TH}
+	|\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss
+\smallbreak
+        |\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\acuteglyph a}
+	|\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\graveglyph a}
+	|\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\circumglyph a}
+	|\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\tildeglyph a}
+	|\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\twodotsglyph a}
+	|\catcode`^^e5\active \def^^e5{\ringglyph a}
+	|\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae
+	|\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\cedillaglyph c}
+	|\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\graveglyph e}
+	|\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\acuteglyph e}
+	|\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\circumglyph e}
+	|\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\twodotsglyph e}
+	|\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\graveglyph i}
+	|\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\acuteglyph i}
+	|\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\circumglyph i}
+	|\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\twodotsglyph i}
+\smallbreak
+%	|\catcode`^^f0\active \def^^f0{dh}
+	|\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\tildeglyph n}
+	|\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\graveglyph o}
+	|\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\acuteglyph o}
+	|\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\circumglyph o}
+	|\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\tildeglyph o}
+	|\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\twodotsglyph o}
+	|\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o
+	|\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\graveglyph u}
+	|\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\acuteglyph u}
+	|\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\circumglyph u}
+	|\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\twodotsglyph u}
+	|\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\acuteglyph y}
+%	|\catcode`^^fe\active \def^^fe{th}
+	|\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\twodotsglyph y}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  ISO 8859-1 support
+%{{{  other hacks
+\section{Modifications to other PDCMAC macros}
+
+
+	For typewriter text, less drastic revision of the string is
+	necessary. 
+\code
+	|\def\ttminus{--{}}
+	|\let\ttcircum=\asciicircum
+	|\let\tttilde=\asciitilde
+\endcode
+	Note that ASCII quote and backquote characters are still got
+	from accents because a `neutral' quotation mark is not adequate
+	for computer listings where both sorts of `quote mark' might be
+	appear, with different meanings.
+
+	
+%}}}  other hacks
+\endcodefile
+\enddocument
+\bye
+%}}} pdcadobe.dtx
+
+%Local variables:
+%fill-prefix: "\t"
+%fold-folded-p: t
+%End:
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..909cec7dfd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,300 @@
+% pdcadobe.tex 1.3 1995/03/30 -- macros for Adobe style fonts
+
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcadobe.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.3",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Formatting macros for Adobe-style fonts.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on pdcadobe.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcadobe.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%% }
+
+\message{1.3 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\chardef\quotesingle="0D
+\chardef\quotedouble="22
+\chardef\_="5F
+\chardef\asciicircum="80
+\chardef\asciitilde="81
+\chardef\cents="A2
+\chardef\pounds="A3
+\chardef\fractionslash="A4
+\chardef\yen="A5
+\chardef\florin="A6
+\chardef\S="A7
+\chardef\currency="A8
+\chardef\lguillemet="AB
+\chardef\dag="B2
+\chardef\ddag="B3
+\chardef\gbdecimal="B4
+\chardef\P="B6
+\chardef\bullet="B7
+\chardef\quotesinglebase="B8
+\chardef\quotedblbase="B9
+\chardef\rguillemet="BB
+\chardef\ellipsis="BC \def\dots{\ellipsis\thinspace}
+\chardef\permille="BD
+\chardef\orda="E3
+\chardef\ordo="EB
+\mathchardef\backslash="205C
+\edef\lbrace{\delimiter"407B308} \let\{=\lbrace \mathcode`\{="407B
+\mathcode`\|="707C  \mathchardef\mid="307C
+\edef\rbrace{\delimiter"507D309} \let\}=\rbrace \mathcode`\}="507D
+\mathchardef\sim="3081
+\mathchardef\cdot="20B4
+\mathchardef\bullet="20B7
+\mathchardef\ldots="60BC
+\chardef\graveglyph="12
+\chardef\acuteglyph="13
+\chardef\hookglyph="14
+\chardef\breveglyph="15
+\chardef\macronglyph="16
+\chardef\ringglyph="17
+\chardef\cedillaglyph="18
+\chardef\circumglyph="5E
+\chardef\tildeglyph="7E
+\chardef\twodotsglyph="7F
+\chardef\dotglyph="C7
+\chardef\hungarianglyph="CD
+\chardef\ogonekglyph="CE
+\chardef\AA="C8 \chardef\aa="98
+\chardef\L="E8 \chardef\l="F8
+\def\.#1{\accent\dotglyph #1}
+\def\H#1{\accent\hungarianglyph"CD #1}
+\ifx\asyfam\UNDEFINED
+    \newfam\asyfam
+\fi
+\edef\\{\ifcase\asyfam 0\or 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or 7\or
+    8\or 9\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\fi
+}
+\mathchardef\forall="0\\22
+\mathchardef\exists="0\\24
+\mathchardef\suchthat="0\\27
+\mathcode`*="2\\2A
+\mathcode`,="6\\2C
+\mathcode`-="2\\2D
+\mathcode`.="2\\2E
+\mathcode`/="2\\2F
+\mathcode`<="3\\3C
+\mathcode`>="3\\3E
+\mathchardef\cong="3\\40
+\mathchardef\Alpha="0\\41
+\mathchardef\Beta="0\\42
+\mathchardef\Chi="0\\43
+\mathchardef\Delta="0\\44
+\mathchardef\Epsilon="0\\45
+\mathchardef\Phi="0\\46
+\mathchardef\Gamma="0\\47
+\mathchardef\Eta="0\\48
+\mathchardef\Iota="0\\49
+\mathchardef\vartheta="0\\4A
+\mathchardef\Kappa="0\\4B
+\mathchardef\Lambda="0\\4C
+\mathchardef\Mu="0\\4D
+\mathchardef\Ni="0\\4E
+\mathchardef\Omicron="0\\4F
+\mathchardef\Pi="0\\50
+\mathchardef\Theta="0\\51
+\mathchardef\Rho="0\\52
+\mathchardef\Sigma="0\\53
+\mathchardef\Tau="0\\54
+\mathchardef\varUpsilon="0\\55
+\mathchardef\varsigma="0\\56
+\mathchardef\Omega="0\\57
+\mathchardef\Xi="0\\58
+\mathchardef\Psi="0\\59
+\mathchardef\Zeta="0\\5A
+\mathchardef\therefore="3\\5C
+\mathchardef\perp="3\\5E
+\mathchardef\alpha="0\\61
+\mathchardef\beta="0\\62
+\mathchardef\chi="0\\63
+\mathchardef\delta="0\\64
+\mathchardef\epsilon="0\\65
+\mathchardef\phi="0\\66
+\mathchardef\gamma="0\\67
+\mathchardef\eta="0\\68
+\mathchardef\iota="0\\69
+\mathchardef\varphi="0\\6A
+\mathchardef\kappa="0\\6B
+\mathchardef\lambda="0\\6C
+\mathchardef\mu="0\\6D
+\mathchardef\ni="0\\6E
+\mathchardef\omicron="0\\6F
+\mathchardef\pi="0\\70
+\mathchardef\theta="0\\71
+\mathchardef\rho="0\\72
+\mathchardef\sigma="0\\73
+\mathchardef\tau="0\\74
+\mathchardef\upsilon="0\\75
+\mathchardef\varpi="0\\76
+\mathchardef\omega="0\\77
+\mathchardef\xi="0\\78
+\mathchardef\psi="0\\79
+\mathchardef\zeta="0\\7A
+\mathchardef\sim="3\\7E
+\mathchardef\Upsilon="0\\A1
+\mathcode`'="0\\A2 \mathchardef\minutes="0\\A2
+\mathchardef\leq="3\\A3 \let\le=\leq
+\mathchardef\fractionslash="0\\A4
+\mathchardef\infinity="0\\A5
+\mathchardef\clubsuit="0\\A7
+\mathchardef\diamondsuit="0\\A8
+\mathchardef\heartsuit="0\\A9
+\mathchardef\spadesuit="0\\AA
+\mathchardef\leftrightarrow="3\\AB
+\mathchardef\leftarrow="3\\AC \let\gets=\rightarrow
+\mathchardef\uparrow="3\\AD
+\mathchardef\rightarrow="3\\AE \let\to=\rightarrow
+\mathchardef\downarrow="3\\AF
+\mathchardef\degrees="0\\B0
+\mathchardef\pm="2\\B1
+\mathchardef\seconds="0\\B2
+\mathchardef\geq="3\\B3 \let\ge=\geq
+\mathchardef\times="2\\B4
+\mathchardef\propto="3\\B5
+\mathchardef\partial="0\\B6
+\mathchardef\div="2\\B8
+\mathchardef\neq="3\\B9 \let\ne=\neq
+\mathchardef\equiv="3\\BA
+\mathchardef\approx="3\\BB
+\mathchardef\ldots="6\\BC
+\edef\arrowvert{\delimiter"0\\BD33C }
+\mathchardef\relbar"3\\BE
+\edef\crlf{\noexpand\mathexbox\\BF}
+\mathchardef\aleph="0\\C0
+\mathchardef\Im="0\\C1
+\mathchardef\Re="0\\C2
+\mathchardef\wp="0\\C3
+\mathchardef\otimes="2\\C4
+\mathchardef\oplus="2\\C5
+\mathchardef\emptyset="0\\C6
+\mathchardef\cap="2\\C7
+\mathchardef\cup="2\\C8
+\mathchardef\supset="3\\C9
+\mathchardef\supseteq="3\\CA
+\mathchardef\nsubset="3\\CB
+\mathchardef\subset="3\\CC
+\mathchardef\subseteq="3\\CD
+\mathchardef\in="3\\CE
+\mathchardef\nin="3\\CF
+\mathchardef\angle="0\\D0
+\mathchardef\nabla="0\\D1
+\edef\registered{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D2}
+\edef\copyright{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D3}
+\edef\trademark{\noexpand\mathhexbox\\D4}
+\mathchardef\prod="1\\D5
+\edef\sqrt{\radical"\\D6370 }
+\mathchardef\cdot="2\\D7
+\mathchardef\neg="0\\D8 \let\lnot=\neg
+\mathchardef\wedge="3\\D9 \let\land=\wedge
+\mathchardef\vee="3\\DA \let\lor=\vee
+\mathchardef\Leftrightarrow="3\\DB
+\mathchardef\Leftarrow="3\\DC
+\mathchardef\Uparrow="3\\DD
+\mathchardef\Rightarrow="3\\DE
+\mathchardef\Downarrow="3\\DF
+\mathchardef\diamond="3\\E0
+\edef\langle{\delimiter"4\\E130A }
+\mathchardef\sum="1\\E5
+\edef\rangle{\delimiter"5\\F130B }
+\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~
+\catcode`^^a1\active \def^^a1{!`}
+\catcode`^^a4\active \let^^a4=\currency
+\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\twodotsglyph
+\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright
+\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda
+\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot
+\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\-
+\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered
+\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\macronglyph
+\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees
+\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm
+\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2}
+\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3}
+\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\acuteglyph
+\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu
+\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal
+\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\cedillaglyph
+\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1}
+\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo
+\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14}
+\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12}
+\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34}
+\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`}
+\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times
+\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div
+\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\graveglyph A}
+\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\acuteglyph A}
+\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\circumglyph A}
+\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\tildeglyph A}
+\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\twodotsglyph A}
+\catcode`^^c5\active \def^^c5{\ringglyph A}
+\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE
+\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\cedillaglyph C}
+\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\graveglyph E}
+\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\acuteglyph E}
+\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\circumglyph E}
+\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\twodotsglyph E}
+\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\graveglyph I}
+\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\acuteglyph I}
+\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\circumglyph I}
+\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\twodotsglyph I}
+\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\tildeglyph N}
+\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\graveglyph O}
+\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\acuteglyph O}
+\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\circumglyph O}
+\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\tildeglyph O}
+\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\twodotsglyph O}
+\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O
+\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\graveglyph U}
+\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\acuteglyph U}
+\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\circumglyph U}
+\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\twodotsglyph U}
+\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\acuteglyph Y}
+\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss
+\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\acuteglyph a}
+\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\graveglyph a}
+\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\circumglyph a}
+\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\tildeglyph a}
+\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\twodotsglyph a}
+\catcode`^^e5\active \def^^e5{\ringglyph a}
+\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae
+\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\cedillaglyph c}
+\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\graveglyph e}
+\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\acuteglyph e}
+\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\circumglyph e}
+\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\twodotsglyph e}
+\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\graveglyph i}
+\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\acuteglyph i}
+\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\circumglyph i}
+\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\twodotsglyph i}
+\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\tildeglyph n}
+\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\graveglyph o}
+\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\acuteglyph o}
+\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\circumglyph o}
+\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\tildeglyph o}
+\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\twodotsglyph o}
+\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o
+\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\graveglyph u}
+\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\acuteglyph u}
+\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\circumglyph u}
+\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\twodotsglyph u}
+\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\acuteglyph y}
+\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\twodotsglyph y}
+\def\ttminus{--{}}
+\let\ttcircum=\asciicircum
+\let\tttilde=\asciitilde
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..843a8c96361
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmdoc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+% pdccmdoc.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "pdccmdoc.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.2",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
+%%%                   Computer Modern fonts.
+%%%                   This macro file was generated by running plain
+%%%                   TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, pdchyex.tex,
+%%%                   pdcimth.tex, pdccmsub.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
+%%%                   pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def",
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\input pdcimth
+\input pdcmigr
+\input pdcfmt2
+\input pdchyex
+\input pdcoput5
+\input pdcfsel
+\input pdccmsub
+\autoloadfonts
+\def\STYheadingT{%
+    \m{rm}{cmss}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+    \f{it}{cmssi}\f{tt}{cmtt}\f{mf}{logo}\f{mfi}{logosl}%
+}
+\font\headingrm=cmss17 \font\headingit=cmssi17
+\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1200}{14pt}
+    {small}{tiny}
+\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1728}{20pt}
+    {subheading}{small}
+\def\STYbodyT{\m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}%
+    \m{bf}{cmbx}\@\f{bi}{cmbxti10}%
+    \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+    \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+    \f{tt}{cmtt}\@\f{ttb}{cmsltt10}%
+}
+\font\tinytt=cmtt8 at 7pt
+\font\bodysy=cmsy10 at 12pt
+\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
+\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
+\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
+\bodyfonts
+{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
+\def\PS{PostScript}
+\input pdcdoc.def
+\inputifexists{pdccmdoc.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..905b7d04627
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmlft.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+% pdccmlft.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "pdccmlft.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.2",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
+%%%                   Computer Modern fonts.
+%%%                   This macro file was generated by running plain
+%%%                   TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, pdchyex.tex,
+%%%                   pdcimth.tex, pdccmsub.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
+%%%                   pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def",
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\input pdcimth
+\input pdcmigr
+\input pdcfmt2
+\input pdchyex
+\input pdcoput5
+\input pdcfsel
+\input pdccmsub
+\autoloadfonts
+\def\STYheadingT{%
+    \m{rm}{cmss}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+    \f{it}{cmssi}\f{tt}{cmtt}\f{mf}{logo}\f{mfi}{logosl}%
+}
+\font\headingrm=cmss17 \font\headingit=cmssi17
+\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1200}{14pt}
+    {small}{tiny}
+\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1728}{20pt}
+    {subheading}{small}
+\def\STYbodyT{\m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}%
+    \m{bf}{cmbx}\@\f{bi}{cmbxti10}%
+    \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+    \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+    \f{tt}{cmtt}\@\f{ttb}{cmsltt10}%
+}
+\font\tinytt=cmtt8 at 7pt
+\font\bodysy=cmsy10 at 12pt
+\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
+\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
+\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
+\bodyfonts
+{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
+\def\PS{PostScript}
+\input pdclft.def
+\inputifexists{pdccmlft.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a2712d5c445
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccmsub.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+% pdcmisc.dtx 1.4 1995/03/30 -- CM subs for PS glyphs
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.4",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Macros for simulating some PostScript characters
+%%%                   using glyphs form the Computer Modern family.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%% }
+
+\message{1.4 1995/03/30}
+
+\dimendef\dimena=0
+\def\pounds{{\it\char36 }}
+\def\yen{{%
+    \ooalign{%
+        \hfil\raise0.25ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle=$}\hfil\crcr
+        \hfil Y\hfil
+    }%
+}}
+\def\cents{\leavevmode\hbox{\rm\rlap/c}}
+\def\currency{{%
+    \ooalign{%
+        \hskip-0.1em
+            \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox202}\hskip-0.1em\crcr
+        \hfil \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox20E}\hfil
+    }%
+}}
+\def\florin{{\it f\/}}
+\def\circledletter#1#2{{%
+    \ooalign{%
+        \hfil\kern#1\raise0.00ex \hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm #2$}\hfil\crcr
+        \mathhexbox20D%
+    }%
+}}
+\def\registered{\circledletter{0.02em}R}
+\def\copyright{\circledletter{-0.045em}C}
+\def\lguillemet{%
+    \leavevmode
+    \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}%
+}
+\def\rguillemet{%
+    \leavevmode
+    \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rangle\!\rangle$}%
+}
+\def\permille{{%
+    \setbox0 \hbox{/}%
+    \flushtop{$\scriptstyle0\!$}/%
+    \lower\dp0 \hbox{$\!\scriptstyle00$}%
+}}
+\def\gbdecimal{\mathhexbox201}
+\def\orda{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b a}}
+\def\ordo{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b o}}
+\let\sc=\relax
+\let\csc=\relax
+\let\mc=\relax
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2261d583f4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,881 @@
+% pdccode.dtx -- documentation & source for pdccode.tex -*-tex-*-
+        
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "PDCCODE -- Documented TeX Macros",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 1.6 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:08:32 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and is the source code for 
+%%%                the TeX definitions file pdccode.tex.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both a copy of the
+%%%                definitions file and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
+%%%}
+
+%{{{ pdccode
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+\document
+\rcs$Id: pdccode.dtx,v 1.6 1995/03/30 16:08:32 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+
+\codefile{tmp.tex}
+
+\defverbatim\"
+
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  introduction
+	
+\author{P. Damian Cugley}
+\title{PDCCODE---Documented \TeX\ Macros}
+\section{Introduction}
+
+	PDCCODE is a simpler and less featureful system than the
+	\LaTeX~2e Docstrip package, but uses the same file suffix
+	`|dtx|'.  Lines between |\code| and |\endcode| markers are
+	written to a file (set with the |\codefile| command), as well as
+	being printed `verbatim' in document.  Thus one \TeX\ pass
+	generates both the macro file(s) and a |dvi| file.
+
+	This document---generated from |pdccode.dtx|---is a |dtx| file
+	for PDCCODE itself, the file of macros used by my |dtx| files.
+	It cannot be used to generate |pdccode.tex| directly (\TeX\
+	might choke halfway through overwriting |pdccode.tex| with a new
+	version, leaving no |pdccode.tex| to generate |pdccode.tex|
+	with).  Instead it produces its copy as `|tmp.tex|', and
+	`|tmp.tex|' can be compared to the supplied |pdccode.tex|.
+
+\subsec{How to read this document}
+
+	The |dtx| files are programs (in \TeX's macro language) that
+	generate new programs (the macro files that will be used in
+	documents).  The macros described in {\it this} file are used
+	when generating macro files.  So, for example, the |\rcs| and
+	|\fileversion| macros used to extract identification information
+	from the |dtx| file are not defined in any of the generated
+	macro files.
+
+\subsec{Background}
+
+	For some time I~have been using a collection of macro files to
+	typeset various types of document with \TeX.  After using them
+	in Malvern\footnote*{Malvern is a sanserif font family
+	implemented in METAFONT.  The current version is release $1.2$.}
+	releases I have discovered that they had been merged with the
+	Unix\TeX\ macros directory.  Originally I~had never intended
+	that these files be used by anyone but me---they were full of
+	hacks and messy code and definitions I~don't use anymore.  Since
+	then I~thought of tidying up the macros enough that I'm not
+	embarassed by them, but the task of doing this {\it and}
+	documenting their use was daunting.
+
+	After installing \LaTeX~2e on my new computer, I~decided to have
+	a go at adapting the idea of `documented \TeX\ macros' files to
+	plain \TeX.  This way I~could clean up the macros and document
+	them in a systematic fashion.
+
+	The \LaTeX\ Docstrip/Doc-option approach evolved through several
+	different models and so is a complex format.  Docstrip (a
+	program written in \TeX's macro language) was used to strip
+	comments from |doc| files making |sty| files, and the \LaTeX\
+	Doc-option separately extracted \LaTeX\ code from comments in
+	|doc| files to make printed documentation.  Both Doc and
+	Docstrip required the user to type in file names whenever they
+	ran---which made them useless for batch processing.  So separate
+	driver files (with suffixes |drv| and |ins|) were added to
+	distributions.  Finally, the |doc| files, which used to be
+	usable as |sty| files (just a little slower because of the
+	comments) were have been changed to be documents instead (making
+	|drv| files redundant, once the |ltxdoc.cfg| configuration file
+	was added to the conventions) and given a new suffix |dtx|.
+
+	The system I~use---called PDCCODE---is simpler and faster, but
+	omits indexes, special change-log commands, and all the features
+	that come with \LaTeX\ formatting.  It doesn't have Docstrip's
+	{\it options}\/ feature, which allows several largely-similar
+	files to be generated from the same source.\footnote\dag{I do
+	have an experimental version |pdccode2.tex| which does this but
+	I~am not particularly happy with it yet.}  It doesn't print
+	statistics at the end, or do checksums, or even print comforting
+	lines of asterisks and percent signs in the log file.
+
+	My |dtx| files use a single macro file |pdccode.tex| which
+	defines a `code mode' where lines are written to the macro file
+	as well as appearing in the printed documentation.  One pass
+	generates both the macro file and the documentation in |dvi|
+	form.  The |pdccode.tex| file also includes enough layout
+	commands to typeset the comments.
+%}}}
+%{{{  using pdccode
+\section{Summary of using PDCCODE}
+
+	These commands are explained in more detail below.
+	
+\subsec{A skeleton  code file}
+
+	A code file using |pdccode.tex| will look something like this:
+$$\it
+\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
+	"%" name "--" one line description\cr
+\noalign{\smallskip}
+	"%%%@TeX-document-file {"\cr
+	header comments for the document\cr
+	"%%%}"\cr
+\noalign{\smallskip}
+	"\relax"\cr
+	"\input pdccode"\cr
+	"\document"\cr
+	"\rcs$" RCS identification string "$\endrcs"\cr
+	"\codefile{" file name "}"\cr
+	"\author{" author name "}"\cr
+	"\title{" title for the document "}"\cr
+\noalign{\smallbreak}
+	"\section{Introduction}"\cr
+	introduction\cr
+\noalign{\smallbreak}
+	"\section{File identification}"\cr
+	"\code"\cr
+	"  \|\% " file name "\fileversion~\filedate~--" one line desc\cr
+	"  |"\cr
+	"  |%%%@TeX-definition-file {"\cr
+	"  " header comments for macro file\cr
+	"  |%%%}"\cr
+	"  |"\cr
+	"  \|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\}"\cr
+	"  |"\cr
+	"\endcode"\cr
+\noalign{\smallbreak}%
+	definitions and commentary\cr
+\noalign{\smallbreak}%
+	"\endcodefile"\cr
+	"\enddocument"\cr
+	"\bye"\cr
+}$$
+
+\subsec{Commands in code sections}
+
+	Code sections start with |\code| and end with |\endcode|.  Before
+	the first |\code| you must do |\codefile{|\<file name>|}| to
+	specify the file.
+
+	Vertical mode material may be used between lines (e.g.,
+	|\smallbreaks|).  Unexpanded code lines are introduced with "|",
+	expanded lines with "\|".  In expanded lines, use "\{", "\}",
+	"\\", "\%", "\~" for those characters, "~" for a single space.
+
+\subsec{Commands in commentary}
+
+	Most of the commentary will be typeset using the conventions of
+	plain \TeX.
+
+	|\author{|\<text>|}|  (must precede |\title|)
+
+	|\title{|\<heading>|}|
+
+	|\section{|\<heading>|}|
+
+	|\subsec{|\<heading>|}|
+
+	|\noindenttrue|
+
+	|\footnote|
+
+	|\defverbatim|\<one-character control sequence>
+
+	|$|\<number>|\mm$| |$|\<number>|\em$| |$|\<number>|\pt$|
+	|$|\<number>|\inch$| 
+
+	|\<|\<name>|>| |\cs{|\<name>|}|
+	|\arg{|\<argument name>|}|
+
+	|\TeX| |\LaTeX| |\LaTeX~2e|
+
+	|\notepar| \<paragraph> |\endnotepar|
+	
+	
+%}}}  using pdccode
+%{{{  file identification
+\section{File identification}
+
+	Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
+	file.
+\code \catcode`\"=12
+	\|\% pdccode.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- self-documenting TeX macros
+	|
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "Macros for documented TeX macros (DTX files).
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%% }
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
+	|
+\endcode
+%}}}  file id
+
+\bigskip\noindent
+	We start by making a nickname for a scratch register.  This is
+	|\toks@| in plain \TeX; this definition gives it a name I~can
+	use without catcode hackery.
+\code
+	|\toksdef\toksa=0
+\endcode
+
+%{{{  rcs support
+	
+\section{RCS Support}
+
+	RCS (Revision Control System) is a free source code control
+	system which is available from the Free Software Foundation.
+	It inserts keyword-value pairs enclosed in dollar signs into the
+	source code.  This command extracts the file's version, date,
+	author and locker (if there is one).  It is used like this:
+$$\centerline{\vbox{\tt\def~{\char32 \ignorespaces}
+		\halign{#\hfil\cr
+	\cs{rcs}\$Id:~\<name>,v~\<version>~\<date>~\<ignored>\quad\cr
+	\hfill~\<author>~\<ignored>~{\rm[}\<locker>~{\rm]}\$\cs{endrcs}\cr
+}}} $$
+ 	The \<locker> field is non-empty iff the file is `locked'
+	(meaning it has been edited and the changes are not checked in
+	yet).  The |\filename| macro is defined, even though it will
+	almost certainly be identical to |\jobname|.
+\code
+	|\def\rcs#1: #2,v #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8$#9\endrcs{
+	|    \def\filename{#2}
+	|    \def\fileversion{#3}
+	|    \def\filedate{#4}
+	|    \def\fileauthor{#6}
+	|    \def\filelocker{#8}
+	|}
+\endcode
+	
+%}}}  rcs support
+%{{{  verbatim text
+\section{Verbatim text}
+
+	Verbatim text is text that is printed identically to the
+	characters in the manuscript file.  In the code sections, a
+	vertical bar is used to make lines for the code file.  In the
+	documentation, the vertical bar is used as a self-matching
+	verbatim mode character.
+
+	These definitions should be the same as the corresponding code
+	in |pdcfmt2.dtx|.
+
+\subsec{Lists of active characters}
+
+	The verbatim text macros need to know if any characters have
+	been made special apart from the usual ones.  This command tells
+	the verbatim macros that |#1| is an active char; in addition to
+	setting its catcode, this makes sure that the character will be
+	re-catcoded appropriately when in verbatim mode.  |#1| should be
+	a something that will work after `|`|'; usually this means a
+	one-character control sequence.
+\code
+	|\def\declareactivechar#1{%
+	|    \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
+	|    \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }%
+	|    \catcode`#1\active
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	Two list macros in the style of |\dospecials| are defined.  The
+	first is for characters that must be set to catcode~12, such as
+	`|\|', `|{|', `|}|', `|_|', `|$|', `|#|', `|&|', and `|%|'.  The
+	other is for a few characters that are given catcode~13, such as
+	`|`|', `|'|', `|~|', `|^|' and SP.
+\code
+	|\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%}
+	|\def\verbatimactives{\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ }
+\smallbreak
+	|\chardef\other=12
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Setting up verbatim mode}
+
+	This is a macro common to various verbatim text modes.  The
+	default spacing of whatever font is used, without any
+	adjustments of spacefactor for punctuation.  The characters
+	`|`|', `|'|', `|~|', and `|^|' produce slightly lowered glyphs.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everyverbatim
+\smallbreak
+	|\bgroup \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup
+	|    \def\setupverbatim{%
+	|        \frenchspacing
+	|        \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
+	|        \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains
+	|        \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives
+	|        \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq 
+	|        \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum
+	|        \the\everyverbatim
+	|    }
+	|}\the\toksa
+\endcode
+
+	Here are the definitions for the munged glyphs.  These are only
+	necessary in CM-Typewriter-like fonts; using something
+	like Courier, these definitions could probably be omitted.
+
+	The names `rq' and `lq' are based on the use of |\lq| and |\rq|
+	in plain \TeX.  An alternative definition for |\ttrq| would be
+	|\chardef\ttrq=13|, producing `{\tt\char13 }'.
+\code
+	|\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
+	|\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
+	|\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
+	|\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
+\endcode
+	This makes the difference between |`'^~| and
+	{\tt`'\char`\^\char`\~}.\footnote*{It turns out that on some
+	\TeX\ systems, the CMTT font has been hacked to have an
+	ASCII-style reverse-apostrohe-cum-grave-accent as character~96
+	and a matching apostrophe-cum-acute-accent as charcter~39,
+	thereby correcting the defects that my definitions of |\ttlq|
+	and |\ttrq| address.  But such modified fonts are
+	nonstandard---they should {\it not} be called CMTT---and should
+	be replaced.}
+
+\subsec{Defining a self-matching character for verbatim text}
+
+	A macro for defining a self-matching verbatim character (I~got
+	the idea of a macro for declaring verbatim characters from the
+	\LaTeX~2e documentation macros).  |#1| must be a one-character
+	control sequence.  If it isn't active already, then
+	|\declareactivechar| is applied to it first.
+\code
+	|\def\defverbatim#1{%
+	|    \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi
+	|    \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
+	|        \def~{%
+	|            \leavevmode
+	|            \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim
+	|            \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup
+	|       }%
+	|    }}\the\toksa
+	|}
+\endcode
+	Note that there must be a font called |\tt| for it to switch to.
+	(The catcode of |#1| is set to 13 after calling |\setupverbatim|
+	because |#1| will be included in |\verbatimplains|.)
+
+	Finally, we define vertical bar as the conventional
+	self-matching verbatim-mode character.
+\code
+	|\defverbatim\|
+\smallbreak
+	|\hyphenchar\tentt=-1
+\endcode
+	Both |\defverbatim| and |\defineactivechar| have local scope.
+
+%}}}  verbatim text
+%{{{  code sections
+%{{{   intro
+\section{Code sections}
+
+	The markers |\code| \dots |\endcode| mark code to be written to
+	the definition file.  Each line starts with either "|" or "\|"
+	and finishes with  the end of the line in the manuscript file.
+
+	Lines that start with "|" are written out as-is; no macro
+	expansion is allowed.  This is how the vast majority of lines
+	are done.
+
+	Lines starting "\|" are expanded.  This is so that things like
+	the current version ID (extracted from the RCS identification
+	line or set with |\def|) may be included in the code file.
+	Within such an expanded line, the following macros are defined:
+    $$\halign{\indent#\hfil&&\quad#\hfil\cr
+	|\%|&	|%|&	per cent sign&
+	|\{|&	|{|&	left brace&
+	|\}|&	|}|&	right brace\cr
+	|\\|&	|\|&	backslash&
+	|~|&	\tt\char32 & space&
+	|\~|&	|~|&	tilde\cr
+	}
+    $$
+	(This list is probably incomplete.)
+%}}}   intro
+%{{{   code file name
+	
+\subsec{Setting the codefile name}
+
+	Before the first code section, the |\codefile{|\<file name>|}|
+	command specifies the code file.  The last code section should
+	be followed by |\endcodefile|.  Only one code file may be open
+	at a time.
+\code
+	|\newwrite\CODEwrite
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\codefile#1{
+	|    \ifeof\CODEwrite\else \endcodefile \fi	
+	|    \def\thecodefile{#1} \openout\CODEwrite=#1
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endcodefile{
+	|    \message{Code written on \thecodefile.}
+	|    \closeout\CODEwrite
+	|}	
+\endcode
+%}}}   code file name
+%{{{   code sections
+	
+\subsec{Code sections}
+
+	Switching to `code mode' is easy, because most of the work is
+	really done by the "|" and "\|" commands.
+
+\code
+	|\def\code{
+	|    \smallskip
+	|    \begingroup
+	|    \let|\CODEline \let\|\CODElinex
+	|    \let\{=\CODElb \let\}=\CODErb \let\\=\CODEbslash 
+	|    \def~{ } \let\~\CODEtilde
+	|    \the\everycode
+	|    \obeylines
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endcode{
+	|    \smallbreak
+	|    \endgroup
+	|}
+\endcode
+%}}}   code sections
+%{{{   code lines
+\subsec{Code lines}
+
+	This is the definition for unexpanded code lines. 
+\code
+	|\def\CODEline{%
+	|    \begingroup	% matched by \CODElinei
+	|    \setupverbatim \catcode`\|\other
+	|    \CODElinei
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	In |\CODElinei|, We must redefine the characters (such as |`|)
+	that are active within verbatim text to expand to their
+	catcode-12 equivalents when they are written to the code file
+	currectly.
+
+	Since one of these is |^|, we temporarily give |@| the meaning
+	of |^| so that we may safely change the catcode of |^|.
+\code
+	|\begingroup\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
+	|            \catcode\lq\@=\catcode\lq\^ \catcode\lq\^=\active
+ 	|            \catcode\lq\@@M=\active \toksa={\endgroup %
+	|    \def\CODElinei#1@@M{%
+	|        \begingroup\let`\lq \let'\rq %
+	|            \let^\CODEcircum \let~ \CODEtilde%
+	|            \edef\tmp{#1}%
+	|            \write\CODEwrite\expandafter{\tmp}%
+	|        \endgroup %
+	|        \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par %
+	|        \endgroup % matches \CODEline
+	|    }%
+	|}\the\toksa
+\endcode
+
+	The definition for |\CODElinex| (expanded code lines) is much
+	simpler: 
+\code
+	|\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=13 \toksa={\endgroup %
+	|    \def\CODElinex#1^^M{%
+	|        \edef\tmp{\write\CODEwrite{#1}}\tmp %
+	|        {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}%
+	|    }%
+	|} \the\toksa
+\endcode
+%}}}   code lines
+%{{{   catcode hacks
+\subsec{Macros for making category-12 characters}
+
+	For characters that are active in verbatim mode (like |`|), or
+	which must be specially generated in expanded code lines (such
+	as braces generated with {\tt\cs{\char123 }}), we have a
+	`|\CODE|-' macro that generates an explicit character token with
+	catcode~12.
+
+\code
+	|\begingroup\catcode`\/=0 \catcode`\\=\other /toksa={/endgroup
+	|    /def/CODEbslash{\}
+	|}/the/toksa
+\smallbreak
+	|\begingroup\catcode`\^=\other \toksa={\endgroup
+	|    \def\CODEcircum{^}
+	|}\the\toksa
+\smallbreak
+	|\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup
+	|    \def\CODEtilde{~}
+	|}\the\toksa
+\smallbreak
+	|\begingroup\catcode`\%=\other \toksa={\endgroup
+	|    \def\%{%}
+	|}\the\toksa
+\smallbreak
+	|\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup
+	|    \def\CODEtilde{~}
+	|}\the\toksa
+\smallbreak
+	|\begingroup\catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2 
+	|        \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other 
+	|        \toksa=[\endgroup
+	|    \def\CODElb[{] \def\CODErb[}]
+	|]\the\toksa
+\endcode
+%}}}   catcode hacks
+%{{{   customization
+\subsec{Customization}
+
+	The token list register |\everycode| is expanded at the start of
+	every code section, the token list register |\everycodeline| at
+	the start of every code line.  The default definitions select
+	typewriter font for the code listings, with each line numbered.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everycode
+	|\newtoks\everycodeline
+\smallbreak
+	|\everycode{\tt \baselineskip=0.8\baselineskip \lineskiplimit=0pt }
+\smallbreak
+	|\newcount\lineno
+	|\everycodeline{\llap{$ \global\advance\lineno1 
+	|        \scriptstyle\the\lineno $\enspace}%
+	|        \mark\expandafter{\the\lineno}}
+\endcode
+%}}}   customization
+%}}}  code sections
+%{{{  formating
+%{{{   intro
+\section{Layout}
+
+	The PDCCODE macros include enough basic formatting commands to
+	make a simple document---since this file needs to be
+	self-contained. The formatting is fairly primitive, so that
+	|pdccode.tex| will not be excessively long.
+
+	The text is set in the default plain \TeX\ fonts: 10-point
+	Computer Modern Roman.  Titles are in CM Sans Serif Bold
+	Extended, headings in CMSS Demibold Condensed, and subheadings
+	in CMSS Italic: all of these are standard fonts which should be
+	available on all \TeX\ systems.
+
+	The line width is wide enough that code lines do not need to be
+	printed in a reduced font (which looks silly).
+
+	the first tokenm of a document is |\relax| and everything except
+	the initial |\input| and final |\bye| in the document is
+	enclosed in |\document|\dots|\enddocument|.  This is so that
+	documents using the PDCCODE conventions can be embedded within a
+	another document which by redefining these tokens.
+\code
+	|\let\document\relax \let\enddocument\relax
+\endcode
+
+	I have to set some \TeX~3 parameters because we don't seem to
+	have definitions for them in the local version of |plain.tex|.
+\code
+	|\lefthyphenmin=3 \righthyphenmin=2 \errorcontextlines10000
+\endcode
+
+%}}}   intro
+%{{{   layout
+\subsec{Layout}
+
+	The text width is wide enough for 72-character code lines.    
+\code
+	|\parindent=2em \hsize=36\fontdimen6\tentt \advance\hsize\parindent
+\endcode
+	A largish left margin is used set---perhaps readers will find it
+	useful for writing comments.
+\code	
+	|\hoffset=210mm \advance\hoffset-\hsize \advance\hoffset-25mm
+	|\newdimen\leftmargin \leftmargin=\hoffset \advance\leftmargin-25mm
+	|\advance\hoffset-1in
+\endcode
+
+	The vertical margins are set so that if the file is formatted
+	for A4 ($297\mm$) paper and fed into a driver which thinks it is
+	formatted for American Letter ($11\inch$) paper no information
+	will be lost.  We allow for $7\mm$ unprintable area at the edges
+	of paper (this is reasonable for a laser printer), and for the
+	headline being $24\pt + 6\pt - 10\pt = 20\pt$ above the top of
+	the text.  (The $6\pt$ allows for the height of the headline,
+	which is in 7-pt type.)
+\code
+	|\voffset=297mm \advance\voffset-11in 
+	|\advance\voffset7mm \advance\voffset20pt
+	|\vsize=297mm \advance\vsize-2\voffset \advance\vsize-2\baselineskip
+	|\advance\voffset-1in
+\endcode
+	
+	We use ragged-right (ranged-left) printing.  (Readability
+	studies have indicated that ragged-right printing is, if
+	anything, easier to read than with both sides aligned.)  To do
+	this we remove the stretch and shrink components of the font we
+	use, and make the right margin stretchable.
+\code
+	|\def\do#1{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt }
+	|\do\tenrm \do\tenit \do\tenbf
+\smallbreak
+	|\rightskip=0pt plus 2em minus 2pt \adjdemerits=0 \tolerance=500
+	|\parfillskip=0pt plus 0.8\hsize
+\endcode
+%}}}   layout
+%{{{   title and headline
+\subsec{Title and headline}
+
+	The author and title info are printed at the top of the first
+	page---in lieu of a separate title page---and the title goes in
+	the headline of subsequent pages, followed by the version ID and
+	date as extracted from the RCS identification string.  If the
+	file locker is non-empty (i.e., the file is being edited), an
+	`e' is appended to the version ID in the headline.
+\code
+	|\def\author#1{\def\theauthor{#1}} \author{P. Damian Cugley}
+\smallbreak
+	|\font\titlefont=cmssbx10 scaled \magstep3
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\title#1{
+	|    \vglue2\baselineskip
+	|    \begingroup \parindent-\leftmargin \hyphenpenalty10000 \titlefont 
+	|	#1\smallskip
+	|    \endgroup
+	|    \leftline{Version \fileversion, 
+	|        last changed \fileauthor\space \mungedate\filedate}
+	|    \ifx\filelocker\empty\else
+	|        \leftline{Edited by \filelocker\unskip\ \today}
+	|    \fi
+	|    \medskip 
+	|    \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule 
+	|    \medskip
+	|    \rightline{\theauthor}
+	|    \bigskip
+	|    \headline{\hfil\global\headline{%
+	|        \sevenbf \hskip-\leftmargin \themarks \hfil #1 
+	|        \fileversion
+	|        \ifx\filelocker\empty  
+	|            \space\mungedate\filedate
+	|        \else 
+	|            e\space\today
+	|        \fi
+	|    }}
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\themarks{%
+	|    \ifx\firstmark\empty\else
+	|        \firstmark
+	|        \ifx\firstmark\botmark \else --\botmark \fi
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	Some macros for printing the date.  The |\mungedate| macro
+	converts from RCS's format (using slashes) to ISO format (using
+	short dashes).
+\code
+	|\def\today{\mungedate{\number\year/\twodigits\month/\twodigits\day}}
+	|\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1}
+	|\def\mungedate#1{$ \textfont0=\font \mathcode`/="7B #1 $}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}   title and author
+%{{{   sectioning
+\subsec{Sectioning}
+
+	The sectioning commands do no more than generate numbered
+	headings---there are no tables of contents or marks required.
+\code
+	|\font\secfont=cmssdc10 at 12pt
+	|\font\subsecfont=cmssi10
+\smallbreak
+	|\newcount\seccount
+	|\newcount\subseccount
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\section#1{%
+	|    \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0
+	|    \bigbreak
+	|    \begingroup
+	|        \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
+	|        \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
+	|        \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.\enspace}#1
+	|        \medskip
+	|    \endgroup
+	|    \noindenttrue
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\subsec#1{%
+	|    \advance\subseccount1
+	|    \medbreak
+	|    \begingroup
+	|        \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
+	|        \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
+	|        \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.%
+	|            \number\subseccount.\enspace}#1
+	|        \nobreak\smallskip
+	|    \endgroup
+	|    \noindenttrue
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	Here's a simple hack to remove the indentation of the first
+	paragraph following a section heading.
+\code
+	|\newif\ifnoindent
+\smallbreak
+	|\everypar{%
+	|    \ifnoindent
+	|        {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+	
+%}}}   sectioning
+%{{{   footnotes
+\subsec{Footnotes}
+
+	Plain \TeX's footnote command is adjusted to use a new parameter
+	to specify the value of |\rightskip| in footnotes.\footnote*{The
+	default definition sets |\rightskip| to $0\pt$, which is
+	moderately disastrous given that spaces cannot stretch or
+	shrink.}  It was the trickiness involved in changing definitions
+	like this that persuaded me to not use `|@|' characters in macro
+	files.
+\code
+	|\newskip\footnoterightskip \footnoterightskip=\rightskip
+\smallbreak
+	|\catcode`@=11
+	|\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup
+	|  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+	|  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+	|  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM
+	|  \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\footnoterightskip 
+	|  \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \rm
+	|  \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t}
+	|\catcode`@=11
+\endcode
+	This definition is a drop-in replacement for the one in {\it\TeX
+	book} Appendix~B (p.\thinspace363 in my copy).
+
+%}}}   footnotes
+%{{{   abbrevs
+\subsec{Miscellaneous abbreviations} 
+
+	The |\<| macro for writing the names of syntactic entities (as
+	\<foo>) is like in {\it\TeX book} Appendix~E.  The |\cs| macro
+	prints a control sequence name; I use this where the easier
+	dodge of writing "|\foo|" won't work (e.g., in the argument to
+	another macro).  Similarly |\arg| places its argument in
+	typewriter-style braces.  The |\pt| macro works in maths mode.
+\code
+	|\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}}
+	|\def\cs#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\\#1}}
+	|\def\arg#1{\leavevmode\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}}
+	|\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} \def\em{\,{\rm em}} \def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
+	|\def\inch{''}
+\endcode
+
+	To make a version of the \LaTeX\ logo that should work
+	acceptably with a range of fonts ({\it\LaTeX}, {\bf\LaTeX},
+	{\subsecfont\LaTeX}), I~first define a macro for raising letters
+	until they are flush with the prevailing cap height.  I also
+	loosen up the `{\it\TeX}\/' logo (so that it also works with
+	sanserif fonts) and make it set the spacefactor to 1000 (to
+	override \TeX's assumption that a full stop following a capital
+	$X$ isn't the end of a sentence).
+\code	
+	|\def\flushtop#1{%
+	|    \leavevmode
+	|    \begingroup
+	|        \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\setbox2=\hbox{X}%
+	|        \dimen0=\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
+	|        \raise\dimen0 \box0
+	|    \endgroup
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em \lower0.5ex \hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
+	|\def\LaTeX{L\kern-0.1em \flushtop{a}\TeX}
+\endcode
+
+	Occasional paragraphs are written in italics and marked with
+	`note'.
+\notepar
+	The command says `notepar' not just `note' because in my macro
+	files I~use \/|\note| for numbered footnotes (\/{\rm \TeX book},
+	Exercise~15.12).\footnote*{Footnotes in |dtx| files are produced
+	with the plain |\footnote| command.}
+
+	Notes may occasionally be more than one paragraph long.
+\endnotepar
+\code
+	|\def\notepar{
+	|    \smallskip
+	|    \begingroup
+	|    \leftskip2\parindent \advance\rightskip\parindent minus \parindent
+	|    \noindent\kern-\parindent{\bf Note}\quad\it
+	|    \ignorespaces
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endnotepar{
+	|    \smallbreak
+	|    \endgroup
+	|}
+\endcode
+%}}}   abbrevs
+%}}}  formatting
+
+\bigskip\noindent
+	The file is finished with an |\endinput| command; this can be
+	used by other prgorams to check that this file hasn't been
+	truncated by \TeX\ coming to a halt part-way through processing
+	the |dtx| file.
+\code
+	|\endinput
+\endcode
+\endcodefile
+\enddocument
+\bye
+%}}} pdccode
+	
+%Local variables:
+%fill-prefix: "	"
+%fold-folded-p: t
+%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..aaeb25e3ea9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+% pdccode.tex 1.6 1995/03/30 -- self-documenting TeX macros
+
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdccode.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.6",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Macros for documented TeX macros (DTX files).
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on pdccode.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdccode.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%% }
+
+\message{1.6 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\toksdef\toksa=0
+\def\rcs#1: #2,v #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8$#9\endrcs{
+    \def\filename{#2}
+    \def\fileversion{#3}
+    \def\filedate{#4}
+    \def\fileauthor{#6}
+    \def\filelocker{#8}
+}
+\def\declareactivechar#1{%
+    \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
+    \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }%
+    \catcode`#1\active
+}
+\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%}
+\def\verbatimactives{\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ }
+\chardef\other=12
+\newtoks\everyverbatim
+\bgroup \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup
+    \def\setupverbatim{%
+        \frenchspacing
+        \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
+        \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains
+        \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives
+        \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq
+        \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum
+        \the\everyverbatim
+    }
+}\the\toksa
+\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
+\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
+\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
+\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
+\def\defverbatim#1{%
+    \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi
+    \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
+        \def~{%
+            \leavevmode
+            \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim
+            \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup
+       }%
+    }}\the\toksa
+}
+\defverbatim\|
+\hyphenchar\tentt=-1
+\newwrite\CODEwrite
+\def\codefile#1{
+    \ifeof\CODEwrite\else \endcodefile \fi
+    \def\thecodefile{#1} \openout\CODEwrite=#1
+}
+\def\endcodefile{
+    \message{Code written on \thecodefile.}
+    \closeout\CODEwrite
+}
+\def\code{
+    \smallskip
+    \begingroup
+    \let|\CODEline \let\|\CODElinex
+    \let\{=\CODElb \let\}=\CODErb \let\\=\CODEbslash
+    \def~{ } \let\~\CODEtilde
+    \the\everycode
+    \obeylines
+}
+\def\endcode{
+    \smallbreak
+    \endgroup
+}
+\def\CODEline{%
+    \begingroup % matched by \CODElinei
+    \setupverbatim \catcode`\|\other
+    \CODElinei
+}
+\begingroup\catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
+            \catcode\lq\@=\catcode\lq\^ \catcode\lq\^=\active
+            \catcode\lq\@@M=\active \toksa={\endgroup %
+    \def\CODElinei#1@@M{%
+        \begingroup\let`\lq \let'\rq %
+            \let^\CODEcircum \let~ \CODEtilde%
+            \edef\tmp{#1}%
+            \write\CODEwrite\expandafter{\tmp}%
+        \endgroup %
+        \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par %
+        \endgroup % matches \CODEline
+    }%
+}\the\toksa
+\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=13 \toksa={\endgroup %
+    \def\CODElinex#1^^M{%
+        \edef\tmp{\write\CODEwrite{#1}}\tmp %
+        {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}%
+    }%
+} \the\toksa
+\begingroup\catcode`\/=0 \catcode`\\=\other /toksa={/endgroup
+    /def/CODEbslash{\}
+}/the/toksa
+\begingroup\catcode`\^=\other \toksa={\endgroup
+    \def\CODEcircum{^}
+}\the\toksa
+\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup
+    \def\CODEtilde{~}
+}\the\toksa
+\begingroup\catcode`\%=\other \toksa={\endgroup
+    \def\%{%}
+}\the\toksa
+\begingroup\catcode`\~=\other \toksa={\endgroup
+    \def\CODEtilde{~}
+}\the\toksa
+\begingroup\catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2
+        \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other
+        \toksa=[\endgroup
+    \def\CODElb[{] \def\CODErb[}]
+]\the\toksa
+\newtoks\everycode
+\newtoks\everycodeline
+\everycode{\tt \baselineskip=0.8\baselineskip \lineskiplimit=0pt }
+\newcount\lineno
+\everycodeline{\llap{$ \global\advance\lineno1
+        \scriptstyle\the\lineno $\enspace}%
+        \mark\expandafter{\the\lineno}}
+\let\document\relax \let\enddocument\relax
+\lefthyphenmin=3 \righthyphenmin=2 \errorcontextlines10000
+\parindent=2em \hsize=36\fontdimen6\tentt \advance\hsize\parindent
+\hoffset=210mm \advance\hoffset-\hsize \advance\hoffset-25mm
+\newdimen\leftmargin \leftmargin=\hoffset \advance\leftmargin-25mm
+\advance\hoffset-1in
+\voffset=297mm \advance\voffset-11in
+\advance\voffset7mm \advance\voffset20pt
+\vsize=297mm \advance\vsize-2\voffset \advance\vsize-2\baselineskip
+\advance\voffset-1in
+\def\do#1{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt }
+\do\tenrm \do\tenit \do\tenbf
+\rightskip=0pt plus 2em minus 2pt \adjdemerits=0 \tolerance=500
+\parfillskip=0pt plus 0.8\hsize
+\def\author#1{\def\theauthor{#1}} \author{P. Damian Cugley}
+\font\titlefont=cmssbx10 scaled \magstep3
+\def\title#1{
+    \vglue2\baselineskip
+    \begingroup \parindent-\leftmargin \hyphenpenalty10000 \titlefont
+ #1\smallskip
+    \endgroup
+    \leftline{Version \fileversion,
+        last changed \fileauthor\space \mungedate\filedate}
+    \ifx\filelocker\empty\else
+        \leftline{Edited by \filelocker\unskip\ \today}
+    \fi
+    \medskip
+    \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule
+    \medskip
+    \rightline{\theauthor}
+    \bigskip
+    \headline{\hfil\global\headline{%
+        \sevenbf \hskip-\leftmargin \themarks \hfil #1
+        \fileversion
+        \ifx\filelocker\empty
+            \space\mungedate\filedate
+        \else
+            e\space\today
+        \fi
+    }}
+}
+\def\themarks{%
+    \ifx\firstmark\empty\else
+        \firstmark
+        \ifx\firstmark\botmark \else --\botmark \fi
+    \fi
+}
+\def\today{\mungedate{\number\year/\twodigits\month/\twodigits\day}}
+\def\twodigits#1{\ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1}
+\def\mungedate#1{$ \textfont0=\font \mathcode`/="7B #1 $}
+\font\secfont=cmssdc10 at 12pt
+\font\subsecfont=cmssi10
+\newcount\seccount
+\newcount\subseccount
+\def\section#1{%
+    \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0
+    \bigbreak
+    \begingroup
+        \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
+        \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
+        \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.\enspace}#1
+        \medskip
+    \endgroup
+    \noindenttrue
+}
+\def\subsec#1{%
+    \advance\subseccount1
+    \medbreak
+    \begingroup
+        \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
+        \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
+        \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.%
+            \number\subseccount.\enspace}#1
+        \nobreak\smallskip
+    \endgroup
+    \noindenttrue
+}
+\newif\ifnoindent
+\everypar{%
+    \ifnoindent
+        {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse
+    \fi
+}
+\newskip\footnoterightskip \footnoterightskip=\rightskip
+\catcode`@=11
+\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\footnoterightskip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \rm
+  \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t}
+\catcode`@=11
+\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}}
+\def\cs#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\\#1}}
+\def\arg#1{\leavevmode\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}}
+\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}} \def\em{\,{\rm em}} \def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
+\def\inch{''}
+\def\flushtop#1{%
+    \leavevmode
+    \begingroup
+        \setbox0=\hbox{#1}\setbox2=\hbox{X}%
+        \dimen0=\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
+        \raise\dimen0 \box0
+    \endgroup
+}
+\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em \lower0.5ex \hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
+\def\LaTeX{L\kern-0.1em \flushtop{a}\TeX}
+\def\notepar{
+    \smallskip
+    \begingroup
+    \leftskip2\parindent \advance\rightskip\parindent minus \parindent
+    \noindent\kern-\parindent{\bf Note}\quad\it
+    \ignorespaces
+}
+\def\endnotepar{
+    \smallbreak
+    \endgroup
+}
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..62bb283ff3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdccode2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,292 @@
+%{{{ pdccode.tex -- used to make self-documenting TeX code
+%{{{  rcs
+
+%%% version: $Revision: 1.2 $
+
+%  A simpler and less featureful system than the LaTeX "doc" package is used.
+%  Lines between \code and \endcode are printed to a file
+%  set with the \codefile{xx} command.  They are also listed
+%  "verbatim"
+
+\def\rcs#1: #2,v #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endrcs{
+    \def\filename{#2}
+    \def\fileversion{#3}
+    \def\filedate{#4}
+    \def\fileauthor{#6}
+}
+
+\rcs$Id: pdccode.tex,v 1.2 1994/12/03 16:26:00 pdc Exp pdc $\endrcs
+\message{\fileversion\space<\fileauthor\space\filedate>}
+%}}}  rcs
+%{{{  misc macros
+
+\errorcontextlines10000
+\def\expcs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
+\def\noexpcs{\expcs\noexpand}
+
+%}}}  misc macros
+%{{{  verbatim text
+
+%% Define verbatim text using |...|
+% This is used in the commentary
+
+%  Tell the verbatim macros that #1 is an active char; this
+%  makes sure that the character will be catcoded appropriately
+%  when in verbatim mode.  #1 should be a somethign that will
+%  wortk after "`".
+\def\declareactivechar#1{%
+	\toks0=\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
+	\edef\verbatimplains{\the\toks0 }%
+	\catcode`#1=13
+}
+
+\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%} % \{}_$#&%
+\def\verbatimactives{\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ } % `'~^<space>
+
+% \setupverbatim -- makes almost all special characters catcode 12
+%  except for ` ' ~ ^, which produce slightly lowered glyphs
+\bgroup \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toks0={\egroup
+    \def\setupverbatim{%
+	\frenchspacing
+	\spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
+	\def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1=12 }\verbatimplains
+	\def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1=13 }\verbatimactives
+	\let`=\ttlq \let'=\ttrq 
+	\let~=\tttilde \let^=\ttcircum
+	\the\everyverbatim
+	\hyphenchar\font=-1
+    }
+}\the\toks0
+
+\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
+\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
+\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
+\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
+
+\newtoks\everyverbatim	% expanded at start of every verbatim text
+
+
+%  Define #1 as a self-matching verbatim character.
+%  #1 must be a one-char control-sequence
+\def\defverbatim#1{%
+	\declareactivechar#1
+	\begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toks0={\endgroup
+		\def~{%
+			\leavevmode
+			\begingroup	% matched by closing char
+			\tt
+			\setupverbatim
+			\catcode`#1=13 \let~=\endgroup
+		}%
+	}}\the\toks0
+}
+
+\declareactivechar\| \defverbatim\|
+%}}}  verbatim text
+%{{{  writing code sections
+
+% \docodefiles is \do{xx}\do{yy} for a set of file identifiers
+% Each file identifier xx has \ifxx, \xxfalse, \xxtrue, \xxwrite
+% I am greatly hampered by the fact that \newwrite and \newif are \outer!
+\def\docodefiles{}
+
+\def\codefile#1#2{
+	\toks0=\expandafter{\docodefiles\do{#1}}
+	\edef\docodefiles{\the\toks0 }	
+	\expcs\CODEnewwrite{#1write}
+	\CODEnewif{#1} \csname#1true\endcsname
+	\expcs\openout{#1write}=#2
+	\expcs\def{filename#1}{#2}
+}
+\catcode`@=11
+\def\CODEnewwrite#1{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n #1}
+\catcode`@=12
+\def\CODEnewif#1{%
+	\expcs\edef{#1true}{\let\noexpcs{if#1}\noexpand\iftrue}
+	\expcs\edef{#1false}{\let\noexpcs{if#1}\noexpand\iffalse}
+	\csname#1false\endcsname
+}
+
+\def\allfilesfalse{\begingroup
+	\def\do##1{\global\csname##1false\endcsname}\docodefiles
+    \endgroup
+}
+\def\allfilestrue{\begingroup
+	\def\do##1{\global\csname##1true\endcsname}\docodefiles
+    \endgroup
+}
+
+
+\def\endcodefile#1{
+    \expcs\closeout{#1write}
+    \csname #1false\endcsname
+    \message{Code written to \csname filename#1\endcsname.}
+}	
+
+\def\code{
+	\smallskip
+	\begingroup
+	\let|\CODEline		% code line without expansion
+	\let\|\CODElinex	% code line with expansion
+	\let\{=\CODElb \let\}=\CODErb \let\\=\CODEbslash \def~{ }
+	\the\everycode
+	\obeylines 
+}
+\def\endcode{
+	\smallbreak
+	\endgroup
+}
+\def\CODEline{%
+	\begingroup
+	\setupverbatim
+	\catcode`\|=12
+	\CODElinei
+}
+
+
+% In \CODFElinei, We must redefine the characters that are active
+%  within verbatim text to expand to their catcode-12 equivalents when
+%  they are written to the code file.  Since one of these is ^, we
+%  temporarily give @ the meaning of ^ so that we may safely munge the
+%  catcode of ^.
+
+\begingroup \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13
+		\catcode\lq\@=\catcode\lq\^ \catcode\lq\^=13 
+		\catcode\lq\@@M=13 \toks0={\endgroup%
+	\def\CODElinei#1@@M{%
+		\begingroup\let`\lq \let'\rq \let^\CODEcircum \let~\CODEtilde %
+		    \edef\tmp{{#1}}%
+		    \def\do##1{\csname if##1\endcsname %
+		        \expcs\write{##1write}\tmp \fi %
+		    }\docodefiles %
+		\endgroup
+		\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par %
+		\endgroup %
+	}%
+	\def\CODElinex#1@@M{%
+		\def\do##1{\csname if##1\endcsname %
+		    \edef\filename{\csname filename##1\endcsname} %
+		    \edef\tmp{{#1}} %
+		    \expcs\write{##1write}\tmp \fi %
+	  	}\docodefiles %
+		\def\filename{\<filename>}%
+		{\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}%
+	}%
+}\the\toks0
+
+%  Make macros which expand to various special characters, with catcode 12:
+\begingroup\catcode`\/=0 \catcode`\\=12 /toks0={/endgroup
+       /def/CODEbslash{\}
+}/the/toks0
+\begingroup\catcode`\^=12 \toks0={\endgroup
+       \def\CODEcircum{^}
+}\the\toks0
+\begingroup\catcode`\~=12 \toks0={\endgroup
+       \def\CODEtilde{~}
+}\the\toks0
+\begingroup\catcode`\%=12 \toks0={\endgroup
+	\def\%{%}
+}\the\toks0
+\begingroup\catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2 \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12 \toks0=[\endgroup
+	\def\CODElb[{] \def\CODErb[}]
+]\the\toks0
+\newtoks\everycode
+\newtoks\everycodeline
+
+\def\filenamesanssuffix{\expandafter\CODEsanssuffix\filename.\CODEsanssuffix}
+\def\CODEsanssuffix#1.#2\CODEsanssuffix{#1}
+%}}}  writing code sections
+%{{{  layout
+
+
+\newcount\seccount
+\newcount\subseccount
+\font\secfont=cmssdc10 at 12pt
+\font\subsecfont=cmssi10
+
+\def\section#1{%
+	\advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0
+	\bigbreak
+	\begingroup
+		\secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
+		\parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
+		\number\seccount. #1
+		\medskip
+	\endgroup
+}
+
+\def\subsec#1{%
+	\advance\subseccount1
+	\medbreak
+	\begingroup
+		\subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
+		\parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
+		\number\seccount.\number\subseccount. #1
+		\nobreak\smallskip
+	\endgroup
+}
+
+\def\notepar{
+    \smallskip
+    \begingroup
+	\narrower\noindent\hang
+	{\bf Note}\quad\it
+	\ignorespaces
+}
+\def\endnotepar{
+	\smallbreak
+    \endgroup
+}
+
+%  	Leave a largish right margin; eventually marginalia will go
+%  there.  Allow enough line length for 80-character code lines.  This
+%  makes the text lines a bit longer than I'd like but I don't want to
+%  have to resort to having code lines in a smaller font.
+\hsize=40em \advance\hsize\parindent
+
+%	(297mm-11in) is the strip of paper lost if printed on USA
+%	letter paper; allow another bit for some laserprinters that
+%	can't print to the edge of the paper.
+\voffset=297mm \advance\voffset by -11in \advance\voffset by 0.25in
+\vsize=297mm \advance\vsize-2\voffset \advance\vsize-2\baselineskip
+\advance\voffset-1in
+
+\def\do#1{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt }
+\do\tenrm \do\tenit \do\tenbf
+
+\rightskip=0pt plus 2em minus 2pt
+\tolerance=500
+\lefthyphenmin=3 \righthyphenmin=2
+
+%}}}  layout
+%{{{  abbrevs
+
+\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}}
+\def\cs#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\tt\char`\\#1}}
+\def\arg#1{\leavevmode\hbox{{\tt\char`\{}#1{\tt\char`\}}}}
+\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}}
+\def\flushtop#1{%
+	\leavevmode
+	{%
+		\setbox0=\hbox{#1}\setbox2=\hbox{X}%
+		\dimen0=\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
+		\raise\dimen0 \box0
+	}%
+}
+\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X}
+\def\LaTeX{L\kern-0.167em\flushtop{a}\TeX}
+
+%}}}  abbrev
+\newskip\footnoterightskip \footnoterightskip=\rightskip
+\catcode`@=11
+\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip \rightskip\footnoterightskip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip \xspaceskip\z@skip \rm
+  \textindent{#1}\footstrut\futurelet\next\fo@t}
+\catcode`@=11
+
+
+%}}} pdccode.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0061070fd79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcdoc.def
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+% pdcdoc.def 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "pdcdoc.def",
+%%% version        = "1.2",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Sectioning macros for style files.
+%%%                   This macro file was generated by running plain
+%%%                   TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = ""
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\topmg=297mm \advance\topmg-11in \advance\topmg7mm
+\botmg=\topmg
+\advance\topmg\ht\strutbox \advance\topmg\headlineskip
+\ifdim \topmg<20mm \topmg=20mm \fi
+\ifdim \botmg<27mm \botmg=27mm \fi
+\setpaper{210mm}{297mm}
+\setnkgrid{4}{3}
+\colrule=0pt
+\leftmargin=\gridwd \advance\leftmargin\colsep
+\everypage={\ifdim\leftmargin>0pt
+    \setbox\leftbox=\hbox to \gridwd{}\fi}
+\everyfootnote={\notefonts}
+\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
+\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
+\everytag={\bf}
+\newcount\partno
+\def\thepartno{%
+    \ifcase\partno O\or I\or II\or III\or IV\or V\else
+        \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\partno}%
+    \fi
+}
+\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno \newcount\subsubsecno
+\def\thesecno{%
+    \n{%
+        \number\secno
+        \ifnum\subsecno>0
+            .\number\subsecno
+            \ifnum\subsubsecno>0
+         .\number\subsubsecno
+            \fi
+        \fi
+    }%
+}
+\newtoks\majorheadline
+\expandafter\majorheadline
+    \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}}
+\def\part#1{%
+    \global\advance\partno1
+    \newpageheading{2\baselineskip}{\headingfonts}
+        {}{\thepartno.\quad#1}
+    \TOCwrite\TOCentrypart{\thepartno}{#1}
+}
+\newcount\sectionpenalty
+\def\sectionheading#1{
+    \par
+    \vskip 0pt plus 0.3\vsize
+    \penalty\sectionpenalty \sectionpenalty-200
+    \vskip 1\bigskipamount plus -0.3\vsize
+    \begingroup \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
+        \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt
+        \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=500
+        \interlinepenalty=100
+        \headingfonts \nointerlineskip
+        \hbox{\hskip-\leftmargin
+         \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \leftmargin
+         \vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \hsize}
+       #1\par
+        \nobreak\smallskip
+    \endgroup
+    \global\noindenttrue
+}
+\newtoks\sectiontoks
+\newif\ifsecno \secnotrue
+\def\section#1{
+    \ifsecno
+        \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0 \global\subsubsecno0
+    \fi
+    \toks0={#1}
+    \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\ifsecno\S\thesecno\space\fi\the\toks0 }}
+    \edef\tmp{\ifsecno\noexpand\S\the\secno\space\fi}
+    \global\sectiontoks\expandafter{\tmp#1}
+    \sectionheading{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi #1}
+    \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\the\sectiontoks}}
+    \TOCwrite\TOCentrysection{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
+}
+\def\subsec#1{%
+    \ifsecno \global\advance\subsecno1  \global\subsubsecno0 \fi
+    \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts}{}
+        {\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1}
+    \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
+}
+\def\subsubsec#1{%
+    \ifsecno \global\advance\subsubsecno+1 \fi
+    \doheading\smallskipamount{\rm}{}{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1}
+    \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
+}
+\newif\ifnoheadline
+\newif\iftwosided
+\footline={%
+    \ifnoheadline
+        \global\noheadlinefalse
+        \hfil\bodyfonts\n\folio\hfil
+    \else
+        \hfil
+    \fi
+}
+\headline={%
+    \ifnoheadline
+        \hfil
+    \else
+        \bodyfonts
+        \iftwosided
+            \ifodd\pageno
+         \hfil
+         \expandafter\firstoftwo\botmark\quad
+         {\bf\n\folio}%
+            \else
+         {\bf\n\folio}\quad
+         \the\majorheadline
+         \hfil
+            \fi
+        \else
+            \the\majorheadline
+            \hfil
+           \expandafter\secondoftwo\topmark\quad
+            {\bf\n\folio}%
+        \fi
+    \fi
+}
+\def\firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
+\def\secondoftwo#1{}
+\newwrite\TOCfile
+\openout\TOCfile=\jobname.toc
+\def\TOCwrite#1#2#3{%
+    \begingroup\def\n{\string\n}
+    \def\tmp{#3}%
+    \edef\tmp{\string#1{#2}{\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp}}
+    \write\TOCfile\expandafter{\tmp{\folio}}\endgroup
+}
+\def\TOCtrim#1:->{}
+\def\TOCentrypart#1#2#3{
+    \smallskip
+    \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0\leftmargin
+    \moveleft\leftmargin\hbox to\dimen0{\strut\bf #1. #2\hfil}
+    \smallskip
+}
+\def\TOCentrysection#1#2#3{
+    \smallskip\noindent\llap{#1\kern1pc}%
+        {\bf \ignorespaces #2\quad\rm \n{#3}}\par
+}
+\def\TOCentrysubsec#1#2#3{
+    \ifvmode \noindent \else \quad \fi
+    {#1}~{\ignorespaces #2}
+}
+\def\TOCentrysubsubsec#1#2#3{}
+\def\frontmatter{
+    \write\TOCfile{\string\endinput}
+    \write\TOCfile{\folio}
+    \closeout\TOCfile
+    \vfill\supereject
+    \ifvoid\partialpage\else \null\vfill\eject \fi
+    \beginthe{frontmatter}
+    \pageno=-1 \secnofalse \noheadlinetrue
+    \def\TOCwrite##1##2##3{}
+}
+\def\endfrontmatter{
+    \section{Contents}
+    \input\jobname.toc
+    \vfill\supereject
+    \endthe{frontmatter}
+}
+\def\titlepage{
+    \vfill\eject
+    \beginthe{titlepage}
+    \noheadlinetrue
+    \def\splittitlepage{
+        \iftwosided \vfill\eject\null\vfill \else \vfill \fi
+    }
+}
+\def\endtitlepage{
+    \eject
+    \endthe{titlepage}
+}
+\def\abstract{
+    \smallskip
+    \beginthe{abstract}
+        \setbox\parbox\hbox to \gridwd{\subheadingfonts Abstract\hfil}
+        \noindenttrue \bodyfonts
+}
+\def\endabstract{
+        \smallskip
+    \endthe{abstract}
+}
+\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}}
+\def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
+\def\MF{{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi META}\-%
+        {\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi FONT}}
+\def\MSDOS{\leavevmode\hbox{MS-DOS}}
+\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
+\begingroup\catcode`\|=12 \toks0={\endgroup
+    \def\dfn#1{\ifx\index\UNDEFINED\else\index{#1|INDdfn}\fi{\bi #1}}
+} \the\toks0
+\declareactivechar\* \def*#1*{{\it#1\/}}
+\def\|{%
+    \relax\ifmmode
+        \Vert
+    \else
+        \begingroup
+        \ttb \setupverbatim
+        \catcode`\|=13 \let|\endgroup
+    \fi
+}
+\def\inputifexists#1{%
+    \openin15=#1
+    \ifeof15 \else \input #1 \fi
+    \closein15
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6d8c5c78af2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1194 @@
+% pdcfmt2.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcfmt2.tex -*-tex-*-
+        
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "PDCFMT2 -- Formatting Macros",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 2.4 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/04/06 11:55:16 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and is the source code for 
+%%%                the TeX definitions file pdcfmt2.tex.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
+%%%                definitions file and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
+%%%}
+
+%{{{ pdcfmt2
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+\document
+\rcs$Id: pdcfmt2.dtx,v 2.4 1995/04/06 11:55:16 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+
+\def\example{
+    \smallskip\hrule\nobreak\smallskip
+    \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0-1pc \divide\dimen0 2
+    \halign to \hsize\bgroup\vtop{\tt\def~{\hfil\break} \def\\{\char`\\\relax} \hsize=\dimen0 ##}\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil&
+	\vtop{\hsize=\dimen0 ##}\tabskip=0pt\cr
+}
+\def\endexample{
+	\crcr\egroup
+    \nobreak\smallskip\hrule\smallskip
+}	
+
+\codefile{pdcfmt2.tex}
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  introduction
+	
+\author{P. Damian Cugley}
+\title{PDCFMT2---Formatting Macros}
+\section{Introduction}
+	
+	This document describes |pdcfmt2.tex|, a collection of
+	formatting macros for plain \TeX\ documents.  For example, it
+	defines commands for making bulleted lists, verbatim text, and
+	generic headings.  For longer documents, a higher-level `style
+	file' like |pdccmdoc.tex| will define commands to start sections
+	and generate a table of contents and so on.
+
+	The definitions file and the printed documentation are both in
+	|pdcfmt2.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The
+	\LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for
+	similar purposes.}  which, when processed by plain \TeX,
+	generates a fresh copy of |pdcfmt2.tex| in the current directory
+	in addition to the |dvi| file.  This ensures that the printed
+	documentation and the code it describes are identical.  The
+	|dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|.
+
+	The name of the macros file ends in `-|2|' to prevent confusion
+	with |pdcfmt.tex| version 1.1.10, with which it is slightly
+	incompatible.
+
+%}}}  introduction
+%{{{  File identification
+\section{File identification}
+	
+	Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
+	file.
+
+\code
+	\|\% pdcfmt2.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- macros for formatting
+	|
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "Formatting macros for plain TeX documents.
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%% }
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
+	|
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  getting started
+%{{{  internal
+
+\section{Internal definitions}
+
+	Most internal control sequence names will start with `|FMT|'.
+	Here are a few miscellaneous definitions used to save a token
+	here or there.
+
+	I will often use |\toksa| to create definitions containing
+	characters with unusual catcodes.  The idiom is
+$$\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
+	|\begingroup| \<assignments> |\toksa={\endgroup|\cr
+	\quad\<definitions>\cr
+	|} \the\toksa|\cr
+}$$ 
+ 	When |\toksa| is expanded, it closes the group (undoing the
+	\<assignments>) but then scans the \<definition> using the
+	catcodes set by \<assignments>.  (In extreme cases, the
+	definition of |\toksa| might be enclosed in |\uppercase|, to get
+	strange characters into a definiton.)
+
+	The advantage of this idiom over using |\gdef| in a group is
+	that the definitions need not be global.  Avoiding global
+	assignments makes it more likely that the document will be
+	embeddable in other documents.
+
+	Using |\toksa| instead of |\toks0| is more robust when using
+	|\uppercase|, because digits are be given |\uccode| values by
+	|maamac.tex|.
+\code
+	|\toksdef\toksa=0
+	|\chardef\other=12
+\endcode
+	
+%}}}  internal
+%{{{  verbatim text
+
+\section{Verbatim text}
+
+	`Verbatim' text means text designed to match the ASCII
+	characters in the manuscript file as closely as possible.  It
+	kis most often used in computer manuals, where commands typed to
+	a computer or the contents of text files are to be presented.
+	Within verbatim text, most of \TeX's special characters are
+	temporarily disabled.
+
+\subsec{Lists of active chararcters}
+
+	The verbatim text macros need to know if any characters have
+	been made special apart from the usual ones.  This command tells
+	the verbatim macros that |#1| is an active char; in addition to
+	setting its catcode, this makes sure that the character will be
+	re-catcoded appropriately when in verbatim mode.  |#1| should be
+	a something that will work after `|`|'; usually this means a
+	one-character control sequence.
+\code
+	|\def\declareactivechar#1{%
+	|    \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
+	|    \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }%
+	|    \catcode`#1\active
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	Two list macros in the style of |\dospecials| are defined.  The
+	first is for characters that must be set to catcode~12, such as
+	`|\|', `|{|', `|}|', `|_|', `|$|', `|#|', `|&|', and `|%|'.  The
+	other is for a few characters that are given catcode~13, such as
+	`|`|', `|'|', `|~|', `|^|' and SP.
+\code
+	|\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%}
+	|\def\verbatimactives{\do\-\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ }
+\smallbreak
+	|\chardef\other=12
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Setting up verbatim mode}
+
+	This is a macro common to various verbatim text modes.  The
+	default spacing of whatever font is used, without any
+	adjustments of spacefactor for punctuation.  The characters
+	`|`|', `|'|', `|~|', and `|^|' are produce slightly lowered
+	glyphs.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everyverbatim
+\smallbreak
+	|\bgroup \catcode`\-=13\catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup
+	|    \def\setupverbatim{%
+	|        \frenchspacing
+	|        \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
+	|        \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains
+	|        \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives
+	|        \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq 
+	|        \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum \let-\ttminus
+	|        \the\everyverbatim
+	|    }
+	|}\the\toksa
+\endcode
+
+	Here are the definitions for the munged glyphs.  These are only
+	necessary in CM Typewriter; when using a PostScript font,
+	different definitions would be necessary.
+
+	The names `rq' and `lq' are based on the use of |\lq| and |\rq|
+	in plain \TeX.  An alternative definition for |\ttrq| would be
+	|\chardef\ttrq="0D|, producing `{\tt\char"0D }'.
+\code
+	|\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
+	|\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
+	|\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
+	|\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
+	|\def\ttminus{-}
+\endcode
+	This makes the difference between |`'^~| and
+	{\tt`'\char`\^\char`\~}.
+
+	The macro |\ttminus| is included because it is needed for
+	PostScript font support.
+
+\subsec{Defining a self-matching character for verbatim text}
+
+	A macro for defining a self-matching verbatim character (I~got
+	the idea of a macro for declaring verbatim characters from the
+	\LaTeX~2e documentation macros).  |#1| must be a one-character
+	control sequence.  If it isn't active already, then
+	|\declareactivechar| is applied to it first.
+\code
+	|\def\defverbatim#1{%
+	|    \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi
+	|    \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
+	|        \def~{%
+	|            \leavevmode
+	|            \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim
+	|            \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup
+	|       }%
+	|    }}\the\toksa
+	|}
+\endcode
+	Note that there must be a font called |\tt| for it to switch to.
+	(The catcode of |#1| is set to 13 after calling |\setupverbatim|
+	because |#1| will be included in |\verbatimplains|.)
+
+	Finally, we define vertical bar as the conventional
+	self-matching verbatim-mode character.
+\code
+	|\defverbatim\|
+\endcode
+	Both |\defverbatim| and |\defineactivechar| have local scope.
+
+\subsec{List a file verbatim}
+
+	This does something similar to the |lines| environment (see
+	below), except here an external file is read in verbatim (see
+	{\it\TeX book} Appendix~D, Section~3).  The
+	|\startlinenumbering| macro may be put in the |\everylisting|
+	token register to create a listing with numbered lines.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everylisting
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\listfile#1{
+	|    \medskip
+	|    \begingroup
+	|        \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt
+	|        \def\par{\null\endgraf}\obeylines
+	|        \setupverbatim \maketabstab
+	|        \tt \the\everylisting  
+	|        \input#1 
+	|    \endgroup
+	|    \medskip\noindent\ignorespaces
+	|}
+\endcode
+	This macro redefines character |^^I| (horizontal tab) to produce
+	the equivalent of eight spaces.  This isn't quite the same as
+	what HTs are used for with UNIX files, but it works adequately
+	if all your tabs are at the start of the line (i.e., if tabs are
+	used only for indentation, not to make tables).
+\code
+	|{\catcode`\^^I=\active
+	| \gdef\maketabstab{\catcode`\^^I\active \def^^I{\hskip 4em}}
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  verbatim text
+%{{{  everypar
+	
+\section{Everypar hacks}
+
+\subsec{Parameters}
+
+	The following may be set by higher-level macros to change the
+	apearance of the next paragraph.
+
+	If the flag |\ifnoindent| is set, then the indentation of the
+	next paragraph will be removed (by deleting the box added by
+	\TeX's |\indent| primitive).  Thus |\noindenttrue| works like
+	|\noindent|, except that there may be blank lines between
+	|\noindenttrue| and the paragraph it affects.
+\code
+	|\newif\ifnoindent
+\endcode
+	This flag is reset globally once it has had its effect.
+
+	If the box |\parbox| is non-void, then its value is typeset in
+	the left margin of the next paragraph.  (At present this does an
+	implicit |\noindenttrue| but later versions may allow the next
+	paragraph to be indented.)  The righthand edge of the parbox
+	will be distance |\parboxsep| from the left edge of the text
+	area.
+\code
+	|\newbox\parbox	
+	|\newdimen\parboxsep \parboxsep=1pc
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Setting \cs{everypar}}
+\code
+	|\everypar={%
+	|    \ifvoid\parbox
+	|        \ifnoindent {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse \fi 
+	|    \else
+	|        {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse
+	|        \dp\parbox=0pt
+	|        \hbox to 0pt{\hss \box\parbox \hskip\parboxsep}%
+	|    \fi
+	|}	
+\endcode
+%}}}  everypar
+%{{{  environment intrinsics
+	
+\section{Environment infrastructure}
+
+	An environment is a structure used to typeset textual elements
+	consisting of several \TeX\ paragraphs (usually embedded within
+	one conceptual paragraph).  It is a concept like \LaTeX\
+	environments, but with the syntax changed to be more
+	plain-\TeX-like.  
+
+	Since environments have one argument that may span many lines in
+	the file we use more verbose brackets than |{|--|}| to make it
+	easier to spot where they begin and end.  This is a structure in
+	a document looking like this:
+    $$
+\vbox{\halign{#\hfil\cr
+	|\|\<name>\<args>\cr
+	\quad\dots\cr
+	|\end|\<name>\cr
+}}
+    $$ 
+
+	A new environment is defined by defining macros called
+	|\|\<name> and |\end|\<name>.  Within the |\|\<name> and
+	|\end|\<name> macros, calls to |\beginthe| and |\endthe| are
+	used to check that environments are nested properly.
+\code
+	|\def\beginthe#1{%
+	|    \begingroup\def\PDCFMTblockname{#1}%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endthe#1{%
+	|    \def\tmp{#1}%
+	|    \ifx\tmp\PDCFMTblockname
+	|        \endgroup
+	|    \else
+	|        \errmessage{You should have said \string\endthe{\blockname}}%
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+    
+\subsec{A generic end-of-environment macro}
+
+	This macro does a |\smallskip| (if there is not already a larger
+	skip on the current list), and sets the `noindent' flag so that
+	the following \TeX\ paragraph is not indented.  
+\code
+	|\def\PDCFMTendenv#1{
+	|    \smallskip
+	|    \endthe{#1}
+	|    \global\noindenttrue
+	|}  
+\endcode
+
+	Where an environment describes text that should be indented,
+	usually |\parindent| should be used (for consistency).  If
+	|\parindent| is zero we still want to indent the text, and we
+	use |\envindent| to describe how much to indent it by.
+\code
+	|\newdimen\envindent \envindent=1pc
+\smallskip
+	|\def\PDCFMTindent{%
+	|    \ifdim\parindent>0pt
+	|        \parindent
+	|    \else
+	|        \envindent
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+%}}} environment intrinsics
+%{{{  quotations
+	
+\section{Quotations}
+	
+	This is a simple environment, with the left margin indented and
+	the first paragraph in the quotetd text not indented.  
+\example
+	It is ... who said~
+	\\quotation~
+	\indent Shookum hip rallo dyne.~
+	\\endquotation~
+	Indeed, it burgle gurgler.
+&	
+	It is interesting to remember the words of
+	Spencone Tipeth, who said
+	\smallskip\leftskip\parindent \noindent
+	Shookum hip rallo
+	dyne.\smallskip\leftskip0pt \noindent Indeed, it burgle gurgler.
+\endexample
+The token
+	register |\everyquotation| might be used to arrange for all
+	quotations to be in smaller type with
+	$$\hbox{|\everyquotation={\smallfonts}|}$$
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everyquotation
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\quotation{
+	|    \smallskip
+	|    \beginthe{quotation}
+	|    \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent
+	|    \noindenttrue
+	|    \the\everyquotation
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endquotation{\PDCFMTendenv{quotation}}
+\endcode
+	The differences from using |{\narrower|\dots|\par}| (apart from
+	how it looks in the source file) include (a)~the right margin
+	isn't indented; (b)~it indents by |\envindent| if there is no
+	|\parindent| and (c)~it is preceeded and followed by a
+	smallskip.
+%}}}  quotations
+%{{{  textlists (bullets + numbered) 
+	
+\section{Textlists---bulleted or numbered lists}
+
+	Here's a generic list-of-items environment, used to implemented
+	bulleted and numbered lists.  Each item is started with the
+	convenient |\\| macro (and so may contain more than one
+	paragraph).  It is called a `textlist' to distinguish it from
+	other meanings of the word `list'.  Usually textlists will be
+	generated with higher-level macros like |\bullets| and
+	|\numbered|.
+
+\subsec{A generic textlist environment}
+
+	The token register |\everytextlist| is expanded at the start
+	of every textlist.  The level of nesting is recorded in
+	|\textlistdepth| (a to-level list is depth~0, a list inside
+	that is depth~1, and so on).  The flag |\ifnumbered| controls
+	whether items are numbered (using |\numberfordepth|) or
+	bulleted (using |\bulletfordepth|).
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everytextlist
+	|\newif\ifnumbered
+	|\newcount\textlistdepth  \textlistdepth=-1
+	|\newcount\textlistcount
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\textlist{%
+	|    \par 
+	|    \beginthe{textlist}
+	|    \advance\textlistdepth 1
+	|    \textlistcount0
+	|    \def\\{
+	|        \smallskip\noindent
+	|        \advance\textlistcount1
+	|        \llap{%
+	|            \ifnumbered
+	|                \numberfordepth\textlistdepth\textlistcount
+	|            \else
+	|                \bulletfordepth\textlistdepth
+	|            \fi\enspace}%
+	|        \ignorespaces
+	|    }
+	|    \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent
+	|    \the\everytextlist
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endtextlist{\PDCFMTendenv{textlist}}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Bulleted lists}
+
+	This describes a bulleted list, where each paragraph is indented
+	and preceeded by a mark in the margin.  
+\example
+	I would like to make...~\\bullets~\\\\ this point; and~\\\\ that
+	point~\\endbullets~And so on and so forth.
+& I would like to make the following very important and relevant
+	itemized points:\smallskip\item{$\bullet$}this point;
+	and\smallskip\item{$\bullet$}that
+	point\smallskip\noindent And so on and so forth.
+\endexample
+Bullets environments may
+	be nested, in which case different marks are used.  The sign is
+	chosen with |\bulletfordepth|.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everybullets
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\bullets{\textlist \numberedfalse \the\everybullets}
+	|\let\endbullets=\endtextlist
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\bulletfordepth#1{%
+	|    \ifcase#1 $\bullet$\or --\or $\circ$\else $\cdot$\fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+
+\subsec{Numbered lists}
+
+	The numbered list is similar.  The style of numbering changes
+	with the listing depth; you can change this by redefining
+	|\numberfordepth|.
+    $$
+\centerline{\vbox{\halign{#\hfil&\qquad\hfil# &&\hfil# \cr
+	Depth 0&1.&2.&3.&\dots\cr
+	Depth 1&(1)&(2)&(3)&\dots\cr
+	Depth 2&({\it a\/})&({\it b\/})&({\it c\/})&\dots\cr
+	Depth 3+&(i)&(ii)&(iii)&\dots\cr
+}}}
+    $$ 
+ 	There is also a token regieter |\everynumbered| for any extra
+	customization.  This is read after |\everytextlist|.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everynumbered
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\numbered{\textlist \numberedtrue \the\everynumbered}
+	|\let\endnumbered=\endtextlist
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\numberfordepth#1#2{%
+	|    \ifcase#1 \n{\number#2}.\or (\n{\number#2})\or
+	|        ({\it\alphabetletter#2\/})\else (\romannumeral#2)\fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+	It turns out that sometimes it is useful to be able to impose a
+	format on numbers generated by formatting macros.  For example,
+	I~occasionally find it useful to force all numbers to be
+	generated in maths mode.  To do this, all numbers generated by
+	macros are enclosed in |\n{|--|}|.  By default, |\n| is
+	equivalent to |\relax|.
+\code
+	|\let\n\relax
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Picking a letter of the alphabet}
+
+	This macro behaves as much like the primitives |\number| and
+	|\romannumeral| as it can: it expands entirely within \TeX's
+	mouth, and so may be used in |\edef|s and the like.  It produces
+	|???| or |!!!| if its argument is not in the range 1--26.
+	The macro is defined so as to reduce the number of tokesn to be
+	skipped  when |#1| is less than 6.
+\code
+	|\def\alphabetletter#1{%
+	|    \ifcase#1 ??? \or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\else 
+	|        \xxxalphabetletter#1\fi
+	|}
+	|\def\xxxalphabetletter#1{%
+	|    \ifcase#1 \or\or\or\or\or\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
+	|        k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or 
+	|        v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else !!!\fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  textlists (bullets + numbered)
+%{{{  tagged list
+	
+\section{Tagged lists}
+
+	In other words, description lists.  Each paragraph starts with
+	the `tag' set either in the left margin or sticking in to the
+	current line if it is too long to fit.  The tag for each
+	paragraph is introduced with `|\\|\arg{\<text>}'.
+
+	The maximum width of tag labels (including the 1\thinspace en
+	space that goes between label and text) in is stored in
+	|\tagmaxwidth|.  If there is not room, then the label is run on
+	in to the paragraph and separated from the text by a quad space.
+\code
+	|\newdimen\tagmaxwidth
+\endcode
+	As well as giving a new definition to the |\\| macro, the
+	|\tagged| command mast choose a value for |\tagmaxwidth|.  If
+	there is a large left margin (signalled by giving |\leftmargin|
+	a positive value) then tags will go in there; otherwise the text
+	will be indented and the amount of indentation used as the
+	maximum label width.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everytagged
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\tagged{%
+	|    \par
+	|    \beginthe{tagged}
+	|    \let\\\TAG
+	|    \ifdim\leftmargin=0pt 
+	|        \tagmaxwidth\PDCFMTindent
+	|    \else
+	|        \tagmaxwidth\leftmargin
+	|    \fi
+	|    \the\everytagged
+	|    \ifdim\tagmaxwidth>\leftmargin
+	|        \leftskip\tagmaxwidth \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endtagged{\PDCFMTendenv{tagged}}
+\endcode
+	The adjustment to |\leftmargin| comes after scanning
+	|\everytagged| so that it is possible to adjust |\tagmaxwidth|
+	inside |\everytagged|.
+
+	Trickery with |\futurelet| and |\aftergroup| (like that used in
+	plain \TeX's |\footnote| command) is used to allow catcode
+	changes in \<text> to work.  This allows macros that generate
+	`verbatim' text to work.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everytag
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TAG{%
+	|    \smallskip\noindent
+	|    \setbox0=\hbox\bgroup        % matched by \TAGfinish
+	|    \the\everytag\ignorespaces
+	|    \futurelet\next\TAGtest
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TAGtest{%
+	|    \ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next
+	|        \let\next\TAGgotbrace
+	|    \else
+	|        \let\next\TAGnobrace
+	|    \fi \next
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TAGgotbrace{%
+	|    \bgroup\aftergroup\TAGfinish 	
+	|    \let\next
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TAGnobrace#1{%
+	|    #1\TAGfinish
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TAGfinish{%
+	|    \unskip\hskip0.5em\egroup       % matches \TAG
+	|    \ifdim \wd0 < \tagmaxwidth
+	|        \wd0=\tagmaxwidth
+	|        \llap{\box0}%
+	|    \else
+	|        \hskip-\tagmaxwidth
+	|        \unhbox0 \unskip\quad
+	|    \fi
+	|    \ignorespaces
+	|}
+\endcode
+	It might be interesting to generalize these macros so that new
+	macros with an argument scanned this way may be created more
+	easily.
+%}}}  tagged list
+%{{{  lines
+	
+\section{Lines environment (for program listings etc)}
+
+	In the |lines| environment, each line in the manuscript file
+	becomes a new paragraph (i.e., a separate line on the printed
+	page).  A |%| at the end of a line may be used to split a file
+	line in to several logical lines.  In addition, the |lines|
+	environment is bracketed by horizontal rules.  The effect is
+	similar to that produced by the |\beginlines|--|\endlines|
+	macros in {\it\TeX book} Appendix~E.
+
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everylines
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\lines{
+	|    \par
+	|    \beginthe{lines}
+	|    \nobreak\smallskip\hrule\nobreak\smallskip
+	|    \obeylines
+	|    \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt 
+	|    \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
+	|    \the\everylines
+	|    \nobreak
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endlines{
+	|    \nobreak\smallskip
+	|    \endthe{lines}
+	|    \hrule\smallskip
+	|    \global\noindenttrue
+	|}  
+\endcode
+
+	For longer listings it may be nice to have the lines numbered
+	for later reference.  The following two macros may be put in
+	|\everylines| to enable line numbering---the first starts from~1
+	in each listing environment, the other continues the numbering
+	from where it left off.
+
+	The line number is kept in |\linenumber| (which may be adjusted
+	by the user).  Only every 5th line is numbered.  The number of
+	lines until the next printed one is held in |\PDCFMTcount|.
+	Both these are always set globally (which means lines
+	environments cannot be nested!).
+\code
+	|\newcount\linenumber
+	|\newcount\PDCFMTcount
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\startlinenumbering{%	
+	|    \global\linenumber=0 \global\PDCFMTcount=5 
+	|    \everypar{\numberthisline}%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\continuelinenumbering{%
+	|    \everypar{\numberthisline}%
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	The |\numberthisline| macro is invoked at the beginning of every
+	paragraph.  It increments |\linenumber|, and writes the line
+	number of every fifth line in the right margin.  By default it
+	uses the same font as used in subscripts; this can be changed by
+	changing the token register |\everylinenum|.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everylinenum \everylinenum{\the\scriptfont0 }
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\numberthisline{%
+	|    \strut
+	|    \global\advance\linenumber1 \global\advance\PDCFMTcount-1
+	|    \ifnum\PDCFMTcount>0 \else
+	|	\global\advance\PDCFMTcount 5
+	|	\rlap{\the\everylinenum \kern\hsize\kern1em \the\linenumber}%
+	|    \fi
+	|}%
+\endcode
+
+	Within the lines environment it can be useful to indicate where
+	lines have been skipped.  This macro also adjusts the
+	|\linenumber| macro.
+\code
+	|\def\linesskipped#1{%
+	|    \strut \hskip20pt $\vdots$ \hskip20pt
+	|    {\rm(\it #1 lines omitted\rm)}\par
+	|    \advance\linenumber#1\relax
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  lines
+%{{{  display, table
+	
+\section{Displays, Tables -- wrapper about \cs{halign}}
+
+	The |display| environment does a generic (meaning not
+	necessarily mathematical) display, in a manner similar to the
+	|\begindisplay|--|\enddisplay| macros in {\it\TeX book}
+	Appendix~E.  As with Knuth's macro, assignments may follow on
+	the same line as |\display|, and |\cr| and |&| may be used to
+	split the display into rows and columns.
+\code
+	|\outer\def\display{\obeylines\startdisplay}
+	|\bgroup\obeylines \toksa={\egroup %
+	|    \def\startdisplay#1^^M{%
+	|        \catcode`\^^M=5 $$ #1 % matched by \enddisplay
+	|        \displayindent\PDCFMTindent %
+	|        \halign\bgroup##\hfil&&\quad##\hfil\cr %
+	|    } %
+	|}\the\toksa %
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\enddisplay{\crcr\egroup$$}
+\endcode
+
+	The |table| environment is similar, ecept that what follows
+	|\table| is an arbitrary |\halign| specification.
+\code
+	|\def\table{%
+	|    $$                  % matching $$ is in \endtable
+	|    \displayindent\PDCFMTindent 
+	|    \halign \bgroup
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\let\endtable=\enddisplay
+\endcode
+
+\notepar
+	Both the {\tt table} and {\tt display} environments must go
+	within paragraphs.  That is, there should not be blank lines
+	before |\table|, or after |\endtable| unless the table ends the
+	paragraph.
+\endnotepar
+%}}}  display, table
+%{{{  ebnf
+	
+\section{(E)BNF}
+
+	BNF is Bakus-Naur Formalism; EBNF is Extended BNF.  The same
+	environment does either format.  The style I~happen to like, has
+	non-terminal sumbols written like \<this>, and terminal symbols
+	enclosed in `--'.  Optional text is enclosed in brackets (I~like
+	to put spaces between the brackets and the enclosed text for
+	clarity) and repeatable text in braces.
+
+	In the manuscript file, each production is a separate paragraph.
+	The macro |\>| goes between the left hand side and right hand
+	side of a production; by default, it expands to `$::=$'.
+	Alternatives are separated by |\\|; by default this expands to a
+	bar `$\mid$'.  If the terminal symbols happen to be keyboard
+	characters, use the verbatim text character {\tt\char`\|} which
+	adds quotation marks around the text it produces.  For example,
+	the following expression
+    $$
+	\hbox{\<foo>\enspace$::=$\enspace`|f|' `|o|' `|o|' $\mid$
+	\<bar> [ \<mumble> `{\bf munge}' ].}
+    $$
+ 	may be produced with
+    $$
+	\defverbatim\~
+	\hbox{~\<foo> \> |f| |o| |o| \\ \<bar> [ \<mumble> `{\bf munge}' ].~}
+    $$  
+ 	Braces are produced with |\{| and |\}|.
+
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everybnf
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\bnf{
+	|    \nobreak\smallskip
+	|    \beginthe{bnf}
+	|    \advance\leftskip2\parindent \parindent=-\parindent 
+	|    \parskip0pt plus 1pt
+	|    \rightskip=1\rightskip plus 3em
+	|    \def\\{$\mid$}
+	|    \def\>{\unskip\enspace$::=$\enspace\ignorespaces}
+	|    \def|{`\begingroup\tt\setupverbatim\catcode`\|=13
+	|            \def|{\endgroup'}}
+	|    \def\{{$\lbrace$} \def\}{$\rbrace$}
+	|    \the\everybnf
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endbnf{
+	|    \smallskip
+	|    \endthe{bnf}
+	|    \global\noindenttrue
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	The macro |\<| is based on the one in Appendix~E of the {\it\TeX
+	book}.  For example, |\<foo>| produces `\<foo>'.
+\code
+	|\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle${\it#1\/}$\rangle$}}
+\endcode
+	The difference is that the name is in italics: \<name> not
+	$\langle$name$\rangle$.
+
+\notepar
+	This macro is not intened for be used to generate character
+	names like Return and Tab; I suggest just saying `Return' and
+	`Tab' for these.
+
+	There is a style of RFC-822 email addresses written in the form
+	`\/|Damian Cugley <pdc@alleged.co.uk>|'.  I suggest that when
+	presenting email addresses in printed documents this be rendered
+	as something like `\/{\rm Damian Cugley (|pdc@alleged.co.uk|)}'.
+\endnotepar
+%}}}  ebnf
+%{{{  headings
+	
+\section{Headings}
+
+	Here are some macros for making headings for sections of a
+	document.  There are two styles of layout supported by these
+	heading macros: the usual style~$N$, with headings above the
+	first paragraph of the section, and the `tab-indexed' style~$T$,
+	with headings in the left margin, aligned with the first line of
+	the paragraph.
+
+
+\subsec{The left margin parameter}
+	For style~$T$ headings, this is the size of the extra margin at
+	the left side of the page (so $({\it hoffset}+1\,{\rm in})-{\it
+	leftmargin}$ is the margin between the left edge of headings and
+	the edge of the paper).  Set this parameter to $0\pt$ for
+	style~$N$.
+
+\code
+	|\newdimen\leftmargin
+\endcode
+
+
+\subsec{Headings that don't start a new page}
+
+	This macro is intended to be used by higher-level macro with
+	names like |\section|, which take care of numbering section
+	headings and so on.
+    $$
+	\hbox{\tt\cs{doheading}\arg{\<skip>}\arg{\<style>}%
+		\arg{\<coda>}\arg{\<text>}}
+    $$
+ 	Where \<skip> is the skip to put before the heading (for
+	example, a \<dimendef token> like like |\medskipamount| or
+	|\bigskipamount|, or a \<dimen> enclosed in braces); \<style> is
+	tokens to insert before the \<text> (such as assignments that
+	select the font); \<coda> is tokens that follow the \<text>
+	(which might produce a rule under the heading, for example;
+	usually this is empty); and \<text> is the text of the heading
+	supplied by the user.
+\code
+	|\newskip\headingtemp
+	|\def\doheading#1#2#3#4{
+	|    \ifdim\lastskip<#1\relax \removelastskip \vskip#1\relax \fi
+	|    \ifdim \leftmargin>0pt
+\endcode
+	If the left margin is greater than zero then we generaten a
+	style~$T$ heading.  This is done by putting the text in
+	|\parbox|, which will be used by the |\everypar|.
+\code
+	|        \global\setbox\parbox=\vtop{%
+	|            \hsize=\leftmargin \advance\hsize-\parboxsep
+	|            \parindent=0pt
+	|            \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 3em
+	|            \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
+	|            \strut#2#4#3
+	|        }
+	|    \else
+\endcode
+	Otherwise we typeset the heading as a separate paragraph.
+\code
+	|        \begingroup
+	|            \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
+	|            \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize 
+	|            \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
+	|            \strut#2#4#3
+	|            \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip
+	|            \par
+	|        \endgroup
+\endcode
+	The vertical space between the heading and the following text is
+	calculated from the difference in baselineskips between the
+	fonts used in the heading and those used in body text, plus $\it
+	smallskipamount$.
+\code
+	|        \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip 
+	|        \ifdim\headingtemp>0pt \nobreak \vskip 1.0\headingtemp \fi
+	|        \smallskip
+	|        \noindenttrue
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Headings that start a new page}
+
+	Major divisions of a book start on a nw page.  The parameters to
+	the macro are similar to those for |\doheading|:
+    $$
+	\hbox{\tt\cs{newpageheading}\arg{\<skip>}\arg{\<style>}%
+		\arg{\<coda>}\arg{\<text>}}
+    $$
+	Where here the \<skip> is the extra space at the top of the page.
+
+\code
+	|\def\newpageheading#1#2#3#4{
+	|    \vfill\supereject % ensure no insertions still floating
+	|    \null\vskip#1\relax
+	|    \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
+	|        \advance\hsize\leftmargin
+	|        \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
+	|        \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize 
+	|        \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
+	|        #2\strut#4#3
+	|        \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip
+	|        \par
+	|    }
+	|    \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip 
+	|    \advance\headingtemp\smallskipamount
+	|    \vskip \headingtemp 
+	|    \noindenttrue
+	|    \def\tmp{#4}
+	|    \message{*\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp.  }
+	|}
+\endcode
+%}}}  headings
+%{{{  footnotes
+\section{Footnotes}
+
+	We define a new command |\note| that replaces use of the
+	|\footnote| command.  This takes one parameter---the text of the
+	footnote---and supplies automatically-numbered footnote markers.
+
+	The |\newcount| command implicitly sets the counter to~0.
+
+\code
+	|\newcount\notecount
+\smallskip
+	|\def\note{%
+	|    \global\advance\notecount+1
+	|    \footnote{\number\notecount}%
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	We add a parameter for the indentation of footnote paragraphs.  
+\code
+	|\newdimen\footnoteparindent
+	|\footnoteparindent=\parindent
+\endcode
+
+	Now we modify the definition of |\footnote| in plain~\TeX\ (see
+	TeXbook p.\thinspace363).  It has the same function as
+	plain~\TeX's |\footnote|, but uses extra parameters
+	(|\everyfootnote|, |\footnotetextmark|), and handles the case
+	${\it parindent}=0\pt$.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everyfootnote
+\smallbreak
+	|\catcode`\@=11			
+	|\def\footnote#1{\let\@sf\empty
+	|  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+	|  \footnotetextmark{#1}\@sf\vfootnote{#1}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup % matched by \@foot
+	|    \interlinepenalty=\interfootnotelinepenalty
+	|    \parindent=\footnoteparindent
+	|    \leftskip=0pt 
+	|    \the\everyfootnote
+	|    \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
+	|    \floatingpenalty=20000
+	|    \indent\footstrut
+	|    \ifdim\parindent>1em 
+	|        \llap{\footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace}%
+	|    \else
+	|        \footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace
+	|    \fi
+	|    \futurelet\next\fo@t
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\@foot{\smallskip\egroup}
+\smallskip
+	|\catcode`\@=12
+\endcode
+	These two parameters control the formatting of the footnote
+	marker in the text and in the note itself.  They take one
+	parameter, a \<number>.  The default definitions simply use a
+	superscript in maths mode.
+\code
+	|\def\footnotetextmark#1{$^{#1}$}
+	|\def\footnotenotemark#1{$^{#1}$}
+\endcode
+%}}}  footnotes
+%{{{  in-paragraph commands
+
+\section{Miscellaneous in-paragraph commands}
+
+
+\subsec{Writing the current date}
+
+\let\n=\relax
+\def\today{\n{\number\day} \monthname\month\ \n{\number\year}}
+\def\monthname#1{%
+    \ifcase#1\or
+        January\or February\or March\or April\or 
+        May\or June\or July\or August\or 
+        September\or October\or November\or December%
+    \fi
+}
+	
+	We define a macro |\today| that prints today's date.  I used to
+	have the option of the abbreviated date but decided this was an
+	unnecessary complication.  The format `\today' is usual
+	in non-American countries, and is recommended by {\it Hart's
+	Rules}\footnote*{Horace Hart, {\it Hart's Rules for Compositors
+	and Readers at the University Press, Oxford}, 39th~ed.,
+	completely revised (Oxford University Press, 1990),
+	p.\thinspace19.} and Strunk \&
+	White.\footnote\dag{William Strunk jun., and E.~B. White, {\it
+	The Elements of Style}, 3rd~ed.\ (Macmillan, 1979),
+	p.\thinspace3.  The American format is given first but followed
+	by the observation that the day--month--year format is `an
+	excellent way to write that date; the figures are separated by a
+	word, and are, for that reason, quickly grasped'.}
+\code
+	|\def\today{\n{\number\day} \monthname\month\ \n{\number\year}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\monthname#1{%
+	|    \ifcase#1\or
+	|        January\or February\or March\or April\or 
+	|        May\or June\or July\or August\or 
+	|        September\or October\or November\or December%
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+	Redefine the |\monthname| macro if you want different names for
+	the months.
+
+
+\def\isodate{\n{\number\year}--\twodigits\month--\twodigits\day}
+\def\twodigits#1{%
+    \ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1%
+}
+
+	Here's a definition for the date in ISO~8601/BS~4795
+	format,\footnote\ddag{{\it The Oxford Writers' Dictionary}
+	(Oxford University Press, 1990), under `date'.  I~have not read
+	the relevant standards.} which puts the year first, giving
+	`\isodate':
+\code
+	|\def\isodate{\n{\number\year}--\twodigits\month--\twodigits\day}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\twodigits#1{%
+	|    \ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1%
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+
+\subsec{Raising things}
+
+	The |\flushtop| macro prints its argument in a box raised so
+	that the its top is aligned with the top of a letter X in the
+	current font.
+\code
+	|\def\flushtop#1{%
+	|    \leavevmode
+	|    \begingroup
+	|        \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox2\hbox{X}%
+	|        \dimen0\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
+	|        \raise\dimen0\box0
+	|    \endgroup
+	|}
+\endcode
+	This allows us to define a fairly generic version of the \LaTeX\
+	logo:
+\code
+	|\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{a}}
+	|\def\LaTeX{\La\TeX}
+\endcode
+	I have not given a definition for the \LaTeX~2e logo, since
+	I~think that `|\LaTeX~2e|' (or `|\LaTeX2e|' if you prefer) is
+	adequate, whereas Addison--Wesley think it should be `|\LaTeX|
+	|\kern0.05em| |2$| |_{\textstyle| |\varepsilon}| |$|' in regular
+	text and something involving bold maths in boldface.  SImilarly,
+	I do not include macros for Bib\TeX, Sli\TeX, AMS-\TeX, and so
+	on; the |texlogos.sty| file from the Eplain package has
+	definitions for these.
+
+\def\superiorletter#1{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam
+	\vphantom{t}\smash{#1}}}
+
+	Here's a variation which raises a scriptstyle letter so that
+	its {\it x}-height matches the cap-height of the body text,
+	thus making `M\superiorletter{\b c\kern0.1ex }Donald' and
+	`1\superiorletter{\b a}', `1\superiorletter{\b o}',
+	`1\superiorletter{er}', `2\superiorletter{\`eme}',
+	`1\superiorletter{st}', `2\superiorletter{nd}',
+	`3\superiorletter{rd}' and `659\superiorletter{th}' (which I
+	prefer to $659^{\rm th}$).
+\code
+	|\def\superiorletter#1{%
+	|    \flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \vphantom{x}\smash{#1}}%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\Mc{M\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \b{c}}}
+\endcode
+
+
+%}}}  in-paragraph commands
+\endcodefile
+\enddocument
+\bye
+%}}} pdcfmt2
+	
+%Local variables:
+%fill-prefix: "	"
+%fold-folded-p: t
+%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a7d81d4b601
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,398 @@
+% pdcfmt2.tex 2.4 1995/04/06 -- macros for formatting
+
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfmt2.tex",
+%%% version        = "2.4",
+%%% date           = "1995/04/06",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Formatting macros for plain TeX documents.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on pdcfmt2.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcfmt2.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%% }
+
+\message{2.4 <pdc 1995/04/06>}
+
+\toksdef\toksa=0
+\chardef\other=12
+\def\declareactivechar#1{%
+    \toksa\expandafter{\verbatimplains\do#1}%
+    \edef\verbatimplains{\the\toksa }%
+    \catcode`#1\active
+}
+\def\verbatimplains{\do\\\do\{\do\}\do\_\do\$\do\#\do\&\do\%}
+\def\verbatimactives{\do\-\do\`\do\'\do\~\do\^\do\ }
+\chardef\other=12
+\newtoks\everyverbatim
+\bgroup \catcode`\-=13\catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\'=13 \catcode`\`=13 \toksa={\egroup
+    \def\setupverbatim{%
+        \frenchspacing
+        \spaceskip0pt \xspaceskip0pt % use spacing of font
+        \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##112 }\verbatimplains
+        \def\do##1{\catcode\lq##1\active }\verbatimactives
+        \let`\ttlq \let'\ttrq
+        \let~\tttilde \let^\ttcircum \let-\ttminus
+        \the\everyverbatim
+    }
+}\the\toksa
+\def\ttlq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char18 }}
+\def\ttrq{\lower0.125ex \hbox{\char19 }}
+\def\tttilde{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\~ }}
+\def\ttcircum{\lower0.5ex \hbox{\char`\^ }}
+\def\ttminus{-}
+\def\defverbatim#1{%
+    \ifcat\noexpand#1\noexpand~\else \declareactivechar#1 \fi
+    \begingroup \uccode`\~=`#1 \uppercase{\toksa={\endgroup
+        \def~{%
+            \leavevmode
+            \begingroup \tt \setupverbatim
+            \catcode`#1\active \let~\endgroup
+       }%
+    }}\the\toksa
+}
+\defverbatim\|
+\newtoks\everylisting
+\def\listfile#1{
+    \medskip
+    \begingroup
+        \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt
+        \def\par{\null\endgraf}\obeylines
+        \setupverbatim \maketabstab
+        \tt \the\everylisting
+        \input#1
+    \endgroup
+    \medskip\noindent\ignorespaces
+}
+{\catcode`\^^I=\active
+ \gdef\maketabstab{\catcode`\^^I\active \def^^I{\hskip 4em}}
+}
+\newif\ifnoindent
+\newbox\parbox
+\newdimen\parboxsep \parboxsep=1pc
+\everypar={%
+    \ifvoid\parbox
+        \ifnoindent {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse \fi
+    \else
+        {\setbox0=\lastbox}\global\noindentfalse
+        \dp\parbox=0pt
+        \hbox to 0pt{\hss \box\parbox \hskip\parboxsep}%
+    \fi
+}
+\def\beginthe#1{%
+    \begingroup\def\PDCFMTblockname{#1}%
+}
+\def\endthe#1{%
+    \def\tmp{#1}%
+    \ifx\tmp\PDCFMTblockname
+        \endgroup
+    \else
+        \errmessage{You should have said \string\endthe{\blockname}}%
+    \fi
+}
+\def\PDCFMTendenv#1{
+    \smallskip
+    \endthe{#1}
+    \global\noindenttrue
+}
+\newdimen\envindent \envindent=1pc
+\def\PDCFMTindent{%
+    \ifdim\parindent>0pt
+        \parindent
+    \else
+        \envindent
+    \fi
+}
+\newtoks\everyquotation
+\def\quotation{
+    \smallskip
+    \beginthe{quotation}
+    \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent
+    \noindenttrue
+    \the\everyquotation
+}
+\def\endquotation{\PDCFMTendenv{quotation}}
+\newtoks\everytextlist
+\newif\ifnumbered
+\newcount\textlistdepth  \textlistdepth=-1
+\newcount\textlistcount
+\def\textlist{%
+    \par
+    \beginthe{textlist}
+    \advance\textlistdepth 1
+    \textlistcount0
+    \def\\{
+        \smallskip\noindent
+        \advance\textlistcount1
+        \llap{%
+            \ifnumbered
+                \numberfordepth\textlistdepth\textlistcount
+            \else
+                \bulletfordepth\textlistdepth
+            \fi\enspace}%
+        \ignorespaces
+    }
+    \advance\leftskip\PDCFMTindent
+    \the\everytextlist
+}
+\def\endtextlist{\PDCFMTendenv{textlist}}
+\newtoks\everybullets
+\def\bullets{\textlist \numberedfalse \the\everybullets}
+\let\endbullets=\endtextlist
+\def\bulletfordepth#1{%
+    \ifcase#1 $\bullet$\or --\or $\circ$\else $\cdot$\fi
+}
+\newtoks\everynumbered
+\def\numbered{\textlist \numberedtrue \the\everynumbered}
+\let\endnumbered=\endtextlist
+\def\numberfordepth#1#2{%
+    \ifcase#1 \n{\number#2}.\or (\n{\number#2})\or
+        ({\it\alphabetletter#2\/})\else (\romannumeral#2)\fi
+}
+\let\n\relax
+\def\alphabetletter#1{%
+    \ifcase#1 ??? \or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\else
+        \xxxalphabetletter#1\fi
+}
+\def\xxxalphabetletter#1{%
+    \ifcase#1 \or\or\or\or\or\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
+        k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or
+        v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else !!!\fi
+}
+\newdimen\tagmaxwidth
+\newtoks\everytagged
+\def\tagged{%
+    \par
+    \beginthe{tagged}
+    \let\\\TAG
+    \ifdim\leftmargin=0pt
+        \tagmaxwidth\PDCFMTindent
+    \else
+        \tagmaxwidth\leftmargin
+    \fi
+    \the\everytagged
+    \ifdim\tagmaxwidth>\leftmargin
+        \leftskip\tagmaxwidth \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
+    \fi
+}
+\def\endtagged{\PDCFMTendenv{tagged}}
+\newtoks\everytag
+\def\TAG{%
+    \smallskip\noindent
+    \setbox0=\hbox\bgroup        % matched by \TAGfinish
+    \the\everytag\ignorespaces
+    \futurelet\next\TAGtest
+}
+\def\TAGtest{%
+    \ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next
+        \let\next\TAGgotbrace
+    \else
+        \let\next\TAGnobrace
+    \fi \next
+}
+\def\TAGgotbrace{%
+    \bgroup\aftergroup\TAGfinish
+    \let\next
+}
+\def\TAGnobrace#1{%
+    #1\TAGfinish
+}
+\def\TAGfinish{%
+    \unskip\hskip0.5em\egroup       % matches \TAG
+    \ifdim \wd0 < \tagmaxwidth
+        \wd0=\tagmaxwidth
+        \llap{\box0}%
+    \else
+        \hskip-\tagmaxwidth
+        \unhbox0 \unskip\quad
+    \fi
+    \ignorespaces
+}
+\newtoks\everylines
+\def\lines{
+    \par
+    \beginthe{lines}
+    \nobreak\smallskip\hrule\nobreak\smallskip
+    \obeylines
+    \parindent=0pt \parskip=0pt
+    \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
+    \the\everylines
+    \nobreak
+}
+\def\endlines{
+    \nobreak\smallskip
+    \endthe{lines}
+    \hrule\smallskip
+    \global\noindenttrue
+}
+\newcount\linenumber
+\newcount\PDCFMTcount
+\def\startlinenumbering{%
+    \global\linenumber=0 \global\PDCFMTcount=5
+    \everypar{\numberthisline}%
+}
+\def\continuelinenumbering{%
+    \everypar{\numberthisline}%
+}
+\newtoks\everylinenum \everylinenum{\the\scriptfont0 }
+\def\numberthisline{%
+    \strut
+    \global\advance\linenumber1 \global\advance\PDCFMTcount-1
+    \ifnum\PDCFMTcount>0 \else
+ \global\advance\PDCFMTcount 5
+ \rlap{\the\everylinenum \kern\hsize\kern1em \the\linenumber}%
+    \fi
+}%
+\def\linesskipped#1{%
+    \strut \hskip20pt $\vdots$ \hskip20pt
+    {\rm(\it #1 lines omitted\rm)}\par
+    \advance\linenumber#1\relax
+}
+\outer\def\display{\obeylines\startdisplay}
+\bgroup\obeylines \toksa={\egroup %
+    \def\startdisplay#1^^M{%
+        \catcode`\^^M=5 $$ #1 % matched by \enddisplay
+        \displayindent\PDCFMTindent %
+        \halign\bgroup##\hfil&&\quad##\hfil\cr %
+    } %
+}\the\toksa %
+\def\enddisplay{\crcr\egroup$$}
+\def\table{%
+    $$                  % matching $$ is in \endtable
+    \displayindent\PDCFMTindent
+    \halign \bgroup
+}
+\let\endtable=\enddisplay
+\newtoks\everybnf
+\def\bnf{
+    \nobreak\smallskip
+    \beginthe{bnf}
+    \advance\leftskip2\parindent \parindent=-\parindent
+    \parskip0pt plus 1pt
+    \rightskip=1\rightskip plus 3em
+    \def\\{$\mid$}
+    \def\>{\unskip\enspace$::=$\enspace\ignorespaces}
+    \def|{`\begingroup\tt\setupverbatim\catcode`\|=13
+            \def|{\endgroup'}}
+    \def\{{$\lbrace$} \def\}{$\rbrace$}
+    \the\everybnf
+}
+\def\endbnf{
+    \smallskip
+    \endthe{bnf}
+    \global\noindenttrue
+}
+\def\<#1>{\leavevmode\hbox{$\langle${\it#1\/}$\rangle$}}
+\newdimen\leftmargin
+\newskip\headingtemp
+\def\doheading#1#2#3#4{
+    \ifdim\lastskip<#1\relax \removelastskip \vskip#1\relax \fi
+    \ifdim \leftmargin>0pt
+        \global\setbox\parbox=\vtop{%
+            \hsize=\leftmargin \advance\hsize-\parboxsep
+            \parindent=0pt
+            \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 3em
+            \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
+            \strut#2#4#3
+        }
+    \else
+        \begingroup
+            \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
+            \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize
+            \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
+            \strut#2#4#3
+            \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip
+            \par
+        \endgroup
+        \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip
+        \ifdim\headingtemp>0pt \nobreak \vskip 1.0\headingtemp \fi
+        \smallskip
+        \noindenttrue
+    \fi
+}
+\def\newpageheading#1#2#3#4{
+    \vfill\supereject % ensure no insertions still floating
+    \null\vskip#1\relax
+    \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
+        \advance\hsize\leftmargin
+        \parindent=0pt \parfillskip=0pt plus 1fil
+        \leftskip=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus0.25\hsize
+        \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=5000
+        #2\strut#4#3
+        \global\headingtemp=\baselineskip
+        \par
+    }
+    \advance\headingtemp-\baselineskip
+    \advance\headingtemp\smallskipamount
+    \vskip \headingtemp
+    \noindenttrue
+    \def\tmp{#4}
+    \message{*\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp.  }
+}
+\newcount\notecount
+\def\note{%
+    \global\advance\notecount+1
+    \footnote{\number\notecount}%
+}
+\newdimen\footnoteparindent
+\footnoteparindent=\parindent
+\newtoks\everyfootnote
+\catcode`\@=11
+\def\footnote#1{\let\@sf\empty
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
+  \footnotetextmark{#1}\@sf\vfootnote{#1}}
+\def\vfootnote#1{\insert\footins\bgroup % matched by \@foot
+    \interlinepenalty=\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \parindent=\footnoteparindent
+    \leftskip=0pt
+    \the\everyfootnote
+    \splittopskip=\ht\strutbox \splitmaxdepth=\dp\strutbox
+    \floatingpenalty=20000
+    \indent\footstrut
+    \ifdim\parindent>1em
+        \llap{\footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace}%
+    \else
+        \footnotenotemark{#1}\enspace
+    \fi
+    \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+\def\@foot{\smallskip\egroup}
+\catcode`\@=12
+\def\footnotetextmark#1{$^{#1}$}
+\def\footnotenotemark#1{$^{#1}$}
+\def\today{\n{\number\day} \monthname\month\ \n{\number\year}}
+\def\monthname#1{%
+    \ifcase#1\or
+        January\or February\or March\or April\or
+        May\or June\or July\or August\or
+        September\or October\or November\or December%
+    \fi
+}
+\def\isodate{\n{\number\year}--\twodigits\month--\twodigits\day}
+\def\twodigits#1{%
+    \ifnum#1<10 0\fi \number#1%
+}
+\def\flushtop#1{%
+    \leavevmode
+    \begingroup
+        \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox2\hbox{X}%
+        \dimen0\ht2 \advance\dimen0-\ht0
+        \raise\dimen0\box0
+    \endgroup
+}
+\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{a}}
+\def\LaTeX{\La\TeX}
+\def\superiorletter#1{%
+    \flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \vphantom{x}\smash{#1}}%
+}
+\def\Mc{M\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\fam \b{c}}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a7010f20a09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,607 @@
+% pdcfsel.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcfsel.tex -*-tex-*-
+        
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "PDCFSEL, a font selection scheme for TeX",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 3.5 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/03/28 19:05:54 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and defines pdcfsel.tex,
+%%%                a file of definitions for managing font selection in
+%%%                documents based on the plain TeX macros.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
+%%%                definitions file and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
+%%%}
+
+%{{{ pdcfsel
+%{{{  premable
+
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+
+\document
+\rcs$Id: pdcfsel.dtx,v 3.5 1995/03/28 19:05:54 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+
+\codefile{pdcfsel.tex}
+	
+%}}}  premable
+%{{{  intro
+	
+\author{P. Damian Cugley}	
+\title{PDCFSEL, a font-selection scheme for \TeX}	
+\section{Introduction}
+
+	This document describes PDCFSEL, a file of font selection macros
+	designed to be used with documents using the plain \TeX\ format
+	(rather than \LaTeX, for example).
+
+	The PDCFSEL macros perform a similar function to the so-called
+	New Font Selection Scheme~2 (used in \LaTeX~2e).  PDCFSEL uses a
+	simpler model of font selection, and so is a smaller
+	package---about 110~lines of code---which is just as well as a
+	copy of it will probably need to be included with documents
+	using it.  The description of which fonts are used in a document
+	can be relatively compact, despite not using any special
+	database files.
+
+\subsec{Organizing fonts into fontsets}
+
+	We can arrange the fonts used in an imaginary \TeX\ document in
+	a table like so (with an asterisk marking fonts that have to be
+	scaled to fit):
+    $$\def\*{{\rm*}}
+\vbox{\halign{\strut#\hfil&\quad\vrule#&&\quad\tt#\hfil\cr
+	&&		|\rm|&|\it|&|\bf|&|\bi|&|\mi|&|\sy|\cr
+\noalign{\nointerlineskip}\omit& height \jot\cr
+\noalign{\hrule}\omit& height 1\jot\cr
+\noalign{\nointerlineskip}%
+	body text&&	cmr10&	cmti10&	cmbx10&	cmbxti10& cmmi10& cmsy10\cr
+	footnotes&&	cmr8&	cmti8&	cmbx8&	cmbxti10\*& cmmi8& cmsy8\cr
+	script&&	cmr7&	cmti7&	cmbx7&	cmbxti10\*& cmmi7& cmsy7\cr
+	scriptscript&&	cmr5&	cmti7\*& cmbx5&	cmbxti10\*& cmmi5& cmsy5\cr
+\noalign{\nointerlineskip}\omit& height\jot depth\jot&\multispan6\dotfill\cr
+\noalign{\nointerlineskip}%
+	heading&& 	cmss12& cmssi12& -&-&-&-\cr
+	subheading&&	cmss10& cmssi10& -&-&-&-\cr
+}}
+    $$ 
+	The column headings are {\it font nicknames}.  These nicknames
+	are used as described in the {\it\TeX book} to switch between
+	fonts in the same row.  Each has a corresponding {\it fam}
+	used in maths mode, with symbolic names like |\itfam| and
+	|\bffam| (we define $\hbox{|\rmfam|}=0 $ for consistency).
+	I~have added nicknames |\mi| and |\sy| for maths italic and
+	maths symbol respectively.
+
+	Each row of the table is a {\it fontset}.  Plain \TeX\ defines a
+	single fontset (which is like the `body text' row of this
+	table); in Appendix~E, Knuth discusses formats that switch
+	between different fontsets with macros like |\ninepoint| and
+	|\eightpoint|.  \LaTeX~2.09 uses many fontsets, called
+	|\normalsize|, |\large|, and so on.  (NFSS~2 uses a more complex
+	system, where size, weight, and slant may be changed
+	independently of each other.)
+
+	In this table, subheadings and body text have different fontsets
+	in the above, even though the fonts are the same size.  Also,
+	there are no |\sf| fonts; the headings are printed in sanserif
+	by using a fontset with |\rm| mapped on to a sanserif font.
+	This is more logical and flexible than the \LaTeX\ approach.
+
+	We can call font families which allow this table to work tidily
+	`regular', and families (like Computer Modern) that require
+	exceptions `irregular'.  The above table has one exception
+	(|\it| in scriptscript must use a scaled font); the CM Bold
+	Extended Text Italic fonts can be described as regular if we
+	think of the `body text' entry as being `|cmbxti10 at 10pt|', so
+	that the fonts in that column are scaled fonts without
+	exception.  To make font specification compact, we want to take
+	advantage of regular families as much as possible, while not
+	making it difficult to include exceptions.
+
+\subsec{Introduction to using  PCDFSEL}
+
+	PDCFSEL uses no databases of font families, and loads no fonts
+	by default.  This makes it more flexible, but also requires
+	document designers to write a `mini-database' of those fonts
+	used in the document.  The above scheme might be defined as
+	follows:
+\smallskip
+\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
+	|\input pdcfsel|\cr
+\noalign{\smallbreak}%
+	|\newfam\bifam|\cr
+\noalign{\smallbreak}%
+	|\def\texttemplate{%|\cr
+	|    \m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}\m{bf}{cmbx}\@\m{bi}{cmbxti10}%|\cr
+	|    \M{mi}{cmmi}\M{sy}{cmsy}%|\cr
+	|}|\cr
+	|\loadfont\scriptscriptit{cmti7 at 5pt }|\cr
+	|\xfontset{scriptscript}\texttemplate{5}|\cr
+	|\xfontset{script}\texttemplate{7}|\cr
+	|\fontset{note}\texttemplate{8}{10pt}{scriptscript}{scriptscript}|\cr
+	|\fontset{body}\texttemplate{10}{12pt}{script}{scriptscript}|\cr
+\noalign{\smallbreak}%
+	|\def\headingtemplate{%|\cr
+	|    \f{rm}{cmss}\f{it}{cmssi}%|\cr
+	|}|\cr
+ |\fontset{subheading}\headingtemplate{10}{12pt}{subheading}{subheading}|\cr
+ |\fontset{heading}\headingtemplate{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}|\cr
+\noalign{\smallbreak}%
+	|\bodyfonts|\cr
+}
+\smallbreak
+\noindent
+	This defines commands |\bodyfonts|, |\notefonts|,
+	|\headingfonts| and |\subheadingfonts| which switch between
+	fontsets.  (The {\it script} and {\it scriptscript} fontsets,
+	which are defined with |\xfontset|, are used only in maths
+	mode and don't need `-|fonts|' commands.)  These -|fonts|
+	commands are not usually used directly in documents;
+	|\notefonts| will be used in some |\footnote| command,
+	|\headingfonts| in some heading-generating command, and so on.
+	
+	Changes of fontset are accompanied by changes in parameters like
+	|\baselineskip| and pseudo-parameters like |\smallskipamount|,
+	and give definitions to the {\it maths font tables}
+	|\textfont\rmfam|, \dots, |\scriptscriptfont\syfam| (for those
+	fonts that will be used in maths mode).
+
+	We want font nickname commands to be efficient, because they
+	are expected to be more common than changes between rows in
+	the table.  In this implementation, after an invocation of
+	|\bodyfonts|, the macro |\rm| expands to exactly `|\fam\rmfam
+	\bodyrm|'.  
+
+\subsec{How the rest of this document is organized}
+
+	The remainder of this document is a description of all of
+	|pdcfsel.tex|, including more details of how the commands it
+	defines are used.
+
+	Running this document (|pdcfsel.dtx|) through plain \TeX\
+	creates the definitions file (|pdcfsel.tex|) in addition to
+	the usual |dvi| and |log| files.  This way the macros and
+	their documentation may be kept together in one file.  The
+	definition lines are numbered.
+
+	The definitions start with macros for loading individual
+	fonts, followed by the macros used to group fonts into
+	fontsets.
+%}}}  intro
+%{{{  getting started
+	
+\section{Getting started}
+
+\subsec{File identification}
+
+	We start with some comments indentifying the file.
+\code
+        |% pdcfsel.tex -- macros for loading fonts -*-tex-*-
+        |
+        |%%%@TeX-document-file {
+        |%%% title      = "PDC Font Selection Scheme",
+        |%%% filename   = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex",
+        \|\%\%\% version \space\space\space= "\fileversion",
+        \|\%\%\% Date \space\space\space\space\space\space= "\filedate",
+	\|\%\%\% creator\space\space\space\space= "\filename",
+        |%%% package    = "pdcmac 1.0",
+        |%%% author     = "P. Damian Cugley",
+        |%%% email      = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+        |%%% address    = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+        |%%%               Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+        |%%% abstract   = "A file of definitions for managing font 
+        |%%%               selection in documents based on the plain 
+        |%%%               TeX macros.  
+	|%%%                 This file was generated by running
+	|%%%               plain TeX on pdcfsel.dtx.",
+        |%%% dependencies = ""
+        |%%%}
+        |
+	\|\string\message\{\fileversion\space\string<%
+		\fileauthor\space\filedate\string>\}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Private names}
+
+        Macros internal to FSEL all have names starting `|\FSEL|'.
+
+\subsec{Macros for edefs}
+
+	These save typing |\expandafter| a lot.  The expression
+	`|\expcs|\<token>\arg{\<tokens>}', creates a csname from
+	\<tokens> and applies \<token> to the result.  In the body of an
+	|\edef|, The expression `|\noexpcs|\arg{\<tokens>}' converts
+	\<tokens> to a csname without expanding the result.
+\code
+	|\def\expcs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
+	|\def\noexpcs{\expcs\noexpand}
+\endcode
+%}}}  getting started
+%{{{  selecting demand-loading
+	
+\section{Selecting auto-loading mode} 
+
+	The flag |\ifFSELautoload| is true, fonts are auto-loaded when
+	they first used instead of all at the start.  This is useful
+	when not all the fonts described by the fontsets will be
+	needed.  The flag is set with the user command
+	|\autoloadfonts|.
+
+	When demand-loading, the fonts used
+        are written to a file named after the document with a |.fnt|
+	suffix.  This checklist might
+        be used to decide which fonts need to be sent with the
+        document if it is being sent to someone to compile on a
+        different \TeX\ system.
+\code
+        |\newif\ifFSELautoload
+        |\def\autoloadfonts{
+        |    \FSELautoloadtrue
+        |    \csname newwrite\endcsname \FSELfile
+        |    \immediate\openout\FSELfile=\jobname.fnt
+        |}
+\endcode
+%}}}  selecting demand-loading
+%{{{  making csname for one font
+	
+\section{How to set up the csname for one font}
+
+        The macro |\loadfont| is used to load individual fonts, defining
+	a control sequence name (csname) which may be used later to
+	switch to that font.  When not demand-loading fonts, this is
+	just like |\global\font| followed by expanding the
+	|\everyloadfont| macro.
+
+	If the csname is already defined, then this command does
+	nothing.  This is so that irregularities in the font scheme for
+	the document can be allowed for.  Parameter |#1| is the csname,
+	for example `|\bodyrm|', and |#2| is the external name, for
+	example `|cmr10|' or `|cmr10 at 12pt|'.
+\code
+        |\def\loadfont#1#2{%
+        |    \ifx#1\relax 
+	|        \FSELloadfont#1{#2}%
+	|    \else\ifx#1\UNDEFINED
+	|        \FSELloadfont#1{#2}%
+	|    \fi\fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+	(We have to compare |#1| against both |\relax|, which is
+	produced by |\csname|--|\endcsname|, and a completely undefined
+	csname.)  The macro |\FSELloadfont| doesa the actual work of
+	loading the font.
+\code
+	|\def\FSELloadfont#1#2{%
+        |    \ifFSELautoload
+\endcode
+\begingroup \leftskip=\parindent \advance\leftskip4\fontdimen6\tentt
+\noindent{\it Demand-loading}.  We don't load the font, instead we
+	define a csname as a macro.  When expanded this new macro will
+	(a)~write the font name to the |fnt| file; (b)~define the macro
+	|\subfont| to load |cmr10| instead (in case \TeX\ stops with a
+	`font not loadable' message); (c)~load the font for real (this
+	overwrites the macro); (d)~call |\everyloadfont| for per-font
+	customization and (e)~switch to the new font.
+\par\endgroup
+\code
+        |        \edef#1{%
+        |            \write\FSELfile{#2}%
+        |            \def\noexpand\subfont{\global\font\noexpand#1cmr10 }%
+        |            \global\font\noexpand#1#2\relax
+        |            \noexpand\everyloadfont\noexpand#1{#2}%
+        |            \noexpand#1%
+        |        }%
+        |    \else
+\endcode
+\leftline{\hskip4\fontdimen6\tentt \indent{\it Immediate loading}.}
+\code
+        |        \global\font#1#2\relax  \everyloadfont#1{#2}%
+        |    \fi
+        |}
+\endcode
+
+	The macro |\everyloadfont| is expanded immediately after
+	actually loading a font.  (The definition used is that one
+	current when the font is actually loaded, not the one current
+	when |\loadfont| was executed.)  Its |#1| parameter is always a
+	\<fontdef token>, i.e., it can be to used as a parameter to
+	|\fontdimen1|.  The |#2| parameter is the external name of the
+	font.
+\code
+        |\def\everyloadfont#1#2{}
+\endcode
+	For example, in a document with a ragged-right margin, this
+	might be used to suppress the stretch and
+        shrink of interword spaces by being defined as follows
+    $$
+\vbox{\halign{#\hfil\cr
+	|\def\everyloadfont#1#2{%|\cr
+	|    \fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt|\cr
+	|}|\cr
+}}
+    $$
+%}}}  making csname for one font
+%{{{  making a fontset
+	
+\section{How to set up a fontset}
+
+	Now that we know how to define individual font csnames, we
+        need the mechanism for grouping them in to fontsets.  A
+	fontset is defined by a template macro which says what font
+	nicknames are defined and gives part of the external font
+	name.  The template macro takes no parameters and expands to
+	a list each of whose elements are of the form
+    $$ 
+\vbox{\halign{$#$\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr
+	\<type> \arg{\<nickname>} \arg{\<partial name>}&
+		or\cr
+	\cs{@} \<type> \arg{\<nickname>} \arg{\<external name>}&
+		for a scaled font.\cr
+}}
+    $$ 
+	where a \<type> is one of the control sequences |\f|, |\m| or
+	|\M|, and \<nickname> is the two- or three-letter nickname
+	used for the font (without any leading backslash), for example
+	|rm|, |it|, |bf|.  There must be a font fam called
+	|\|\<nickname>|fam| (|\rmfam|, |\itfam| etc.\ are already
+	defined).
+
+	If there is no |\@|, then the \<partial name> is a font name
+	sans the size specification, such as |cmr|.  The size in
+	points will be appended to this (|cmr| + $10\pt$ = |cmr10|).
+	If |\@| is included then the \<external name> is the complete
+	font name, such as |cmr10| or |ptmr|.  This will be followed
+	by `{\tt\char32 at\char32 10pt\char32 }', say.
+
+	The \<type> specifies how much support for mathematics this font
+	requires.  This is because maths mode requires that all fonts
+	that might be used in a formula be loaded (because the font
+	tables |\textfont|, |\scriptfont| and |\scriptscriptfont| must
+	be set).  The code |\f| means that the font is not used in
+	maths, |\m| means that |\textfont| and |\scriptfont| will be set
+	correctly for this fam, and |\M| means that |\scriptscriptfont|
+	will also be set.  In these cases there must be a corresponding
+	token ending in `-|fam|' that expands to the fam number.
+
+	The fontset name is a sequence of \<letter>s, like `|body|',
+	`|note|', `|script|', `|heading|'.  This is turned into a
+	fontset selection macro by adding `|\|' to the front and
+	`|fonts|' to the end (e.g., |\bodyfonts|).  The csnames for
+	loaded fonts are formed from the fontset name + the nickname
+	(e.g., |\bodyrm|).
+
+\subsec{Defining the csnames for a fontset}
+
+	The macro |\xfontset| defines all the csnames for the fonts in a
+	fontset, without defining a `-|fonts|' macro.  This is used to
+	define a fontset that is never selected in its own right (e.g.,
+	its fonts are used only as subscripts and superscripts), and
+	also used internally by the |\fontset| command.  Its arguments
+	are |#1| the fontset name, |#2| the csname of a template macro,
+	and |#3| a \<number> that specifies the font size (sans the
+	`|pt|').
+\code
+        |\def\xfontset#1#2#3{
+        |    \def\f##1##2{\expcs\loadfont{#1##1}{##2#3}}
+        |    \let\m=\f \let\M=\f 
+        |    \def\@##1##2##3{\expcs\loadfont{#1##2}{##3 at #3pt }}
+        |    #2
+        |}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Defining a complete fontset}
+
+	The user command |\fontset| is used to define a complete
+	fontset.  Its parameters are
+        |#1| (a string of letters) is the fontset name,
+        |#2| (a csname) is a template macro,
+        |#3| (a \<number>) is size in points,
+        |#4| (a \<skip>) is baseline skip,
+        |#5| (a fontset name) is the scriptstyle fontset, and
+        |#6| (a fontset name) is the scriptscriptstyle fontset.
+\code
+        |% Set up a fontset -- define \#1fonts
+        |\def\fontset#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+        |    \xfontset{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+\endcode
+\begingroup\leftskip=\parindent \advance\leftskip2\fontdimen6\tentt
+\noindent
+	Now to define the |\#1fonts| macro.  When demand-loading, this
+	macro will call |\#1mathfonts| (to ensure the fonts needed for
+	maths are loaded).  Then it will call |\FSELnicknames| to
+	define |\rm|, |\it|, etc., and to define |\textfont\rmfam|, etc.
+	Finally it will set the baseline skip and related parameters and
+	switch to the new |\rm| font.
+\par\endgroup
+\code
+        |    \expcs\edef{#1fonts}{%
+        |       \ifFSELautoload \noexpcs{#1mathsfonts}\fi
+        |       \noexpand\FSELnicknames{#1}{#5}{#6}\noexpand#2%
+        |       \noexpand\setbaselineskip{#4}%
+        |       \noexpand\rm
+        |    }%
+\endcode
+\begingroup\leftskip=\parindent \advance\leftskip2\fontdimen6\tentt
+\noindent
+	If we are demand-loading, we must define |\#1mathsfonts| as well.
+\par\endgroup
+\code
+        |    \ifFSELautoload
+        |       \expcs\def{#1mathsfonts}{\FSELloadmaths{#1}{#5}{#6}#2}%
+        |    \fi
+        |}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Setting font nicknames}
+
+	|\FSELnicknames|
+	gives definitions to |\f|, |\m| and |\M| so that expanding the
+	template macro defines |\rm| and the like.  If the fontset name
+	is |ffff|, and a nickname |xx| is introduced with |\f|, the
+	macro |\xx| is defined to |\ffffxx|.  If it is introduced with
+	|\m|, then the font table entries  |\textfont\xxfam| and |\scriptfont\xxfam| are also
+	set, and |\xx| expands to `|\fam\xxfam \ffffxx|'.  If it is
+	introduced with |\M| then |\scriptscriptfont\xxfam| is also set.
+
+	The parameters are |#1| the fontset name, |#2| the fontset name
+	for scriptstyle, and |#3| the fontset name for
+	scriptscriptstyle.  The implicit fourth parameter is the
+	template macro.
+\code
+        |\def\FSELnicknames#1#2#3{%
+        |    \let\@\relax
+        |    \def\f##1##2{%
+        |       \expcs\edef{##1}{\noexpcs{#1##1}}%
+        |    }%
+        |    \def\m##1##2{%
+        |       \expcs\textfont{##1fam}\csname#1##1\endcsname
+        |       \expcs\scriptfont{##1fam}\csname#2##1\endcsname
+        |       \expcs\edef{##1}{%
+	|           \fam\expcs\noexpand{##1fam}%
+	|           \expcs\noexpand{#1##1}%
+	|       }%
+        |    }%
+        |    \def\M##1{%
+        |       \expcs\scriptscriptfont{##1fam}\csname#3##1\endcsname
+        |       \m{##1}%
+        |    }%
+        |}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Setting the baseline skip}
+	The second helper macro, |\setbaselineskip|, sets
+	|\baselineskip| and a bunch of related paramaters and
+	pseudo-parameters like |\smallskipamount|.  It takes one
+	parameter, a \<skip>.
+\notepar
+	My definitions for the skips that go before and after displays
+	put less white\-space around displays than is set in plain \TeX.
+	This can be changed by redefining this macro in a style file.
+\endnotepar
+\code
+        |\def\setbaselineskip#1{%
+        |    \baselineskip#1\relax \normalbaselineskip\baselineskip
+        |    \jot0.25\baselineskip
+        |    \smallskipamount 0.25\baselineskip plus 0.083\baselineskip
+        |       minus 0.083\baselineskip
+        |    \medskipamount 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.167\baselineskip
+        |       minus 0.167\baselineskip
+        |    \bigskipamount 1\baselineskip plus 0.333\baselineskip
+        |       minus 0.333\baselineskip
+        |    \abovedisplayskip\medskipamount
+        |    \abovedisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip 
+        |    \advance\abovedisplayshortskip-1\abovedisplayskip
+        |    \belowdisplayskip\medskipamount
+        |    \belowdisplayshortskip\smallskipamount
+        |}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Loading maths fonts}
+	Finally, we need to force the fonts used in maths at a given
+	size to be loaded.  for |\f| fonts this does nothing; for |\m|
+	fonts it loads the text and script fonts; for |\M| fonts it also
+	loads the scriptscript font.
+
+	This is done the first time this fontset is selected, even if no
+	formulas are used (rather than trying to do something
+	complicated like use |\everymath|\dots).  Because this macro
+	only needs to be used once for each fontset, it finishes by
+	redefining |\#1mathfonts| to be the same as |\relax|.
+	
+	Its parameters are |#1| the fontset name, |#2| the fontset name
+	for scriptstyle, and |#3| the fontset name for scriptscriptstyle.
+\code
+        |\def\FSELloadmaths#1#2#3{%
+        |    \let\@\relax \def\f##1##2{}%
+        |    \def\m##1##2{\csname#1##1\endcsname \csname#2##1\endcsname}%
+        |    \def\M##1{\csname#3##1\endcsname \m{##1}}%
+        |    \global\expcs\let{#1mathsfonts}\relax
+        |}
+\endcode
+	
+%}}}  making a fontset
+%{{{  finishing up
+	
+\section{Finishing up}
+	
+	We define |\rmfam|, |\mifam| and |\syfam| as aliases for the
+	numbers $0$, $1$ and $2$.  This is so that the maths fonts may
+	be included in the font templates without any special
+	arrangements.   The names |\itfam|,  |\bffam|, |\ttfam|, and |\slfam| are set in |plain.tex|.
+\code
+        |\chardef\rmfam=0 \chardef\mifam=1 \chardef\syfam=2
+\endcode
+	Note that we do not include an alias for the the maths
+	extension font's fam number.  This is because there is only
+	one maths extension font---|cmex10|---used for all sizes, so it
+	does not belong in any fontset.
+
+\section{Summary of user commands}
+
+	The following lists the user commands provided by FSEL.  A
+	\<fontset name> is a sequence of letters like |note|;
+	\<points> is a \TeX\ \<number> representing size in points
+	(without any final |pt|); an \<external name> is the external
+	name for a font (e.g., `|cmr12|').
+
+\medskip\hrule\medskip
+
+\begingroup \parindent=0pt
+
+	|\autoloadfonts|
+
+	|\loadfont|\<csname>\arg{\<external name>}
+
+	|\xfontset|\arg{\<fontset name>}\<csname>\arg{\<points>}
+
+	|\fontset|\arg{\<fontset
+	name>}\<csname>\arg{\<points>}\arg{\<skip>}\arg{\<fontset
+	name>}\arg{\<fontset name>}
+
+	|\def\everyloadfont#1#2{| \dots\ |}|
+
+	|\def\setbaselineskip#1{| \dots\ |}|
+
+\medskip\hrule\medskip
+
+\endgroup
+
+%}}}  finishing up
+%{{{  bugs
+
+\section{Bugs}
+
+	FSEL clobbers the macros |\f|, |\m|, |\M| and |\@|.
+%}}}  bugs
+\endcodefile
+\enddocument
+\bye
+	
+%}}} pdcfsel
+
+%Local variables:
+%fold-folded-p: t
+%fill-prefix: "	"
+%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3b68aada1ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+% pdcfsel.tex -- macros for loading fonts -*-tex-*-
+
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title      = "PDC Font Selection Scheme",
+%%% filename   = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcfsel.tex",
+%%% version    = "3.5",
+%%% Date       = "1995/03/28",
+%%% creator    = "pdcfsel.dtx",
+%%% package    = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author     = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email      = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address    = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%               Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract   = "A file of definitions for managing font
+%%%               selection in documents based on the plain
+%%%               TeX macros.
+%%%                 This file was generated by running
+%%%               plain TeX on pdcfsel.dtx.",
+%%% dependencies = ""
+%%%}
+
+\message{3.5 <pdc 1995/03/28>}
+\def\expcs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
+\def\noexpcs{\expcs\noexpand}
+\newif\ifFSELautoload
+\def\autoloadfonts{
+    \FSELautoloadtrue
+    \csname newwrite\endcsname \FSELfile
+    \immediate\openout\FSELfile=\jobname.fnt
+}
+\def\loadfont#1#2{%
+    \ifx#1\relax
+        \FSELloadfont#1{#2}%
+    \else\ifx#1\UNDEFINED
+        \FSELloadfont#1{#2}%
+    \fi\fi
+}
+\def\FSELloadfont#1#2{%
+    \ifFSELautoload
+        \edef#1{%
+            \write\FSELfile{#2}%
+            \def\noexpand\subfont{\global\font\noexpand#1cmr10 }%
+            \global\font\noexpand#1#2\relax
+            \noexpand\everyloadfont\noexpand#1{#2}%
+            \noexpand#1%
+        }%
+    \else
+        \global\font#1#2\relax  \everyloadfont#1{#2}%
+    \fi
+}
+\def\everyloadfont#1#2{}
+\def\xfontset#1#2#3{
+    \def\f##1##2{\expcs\loadfont{#1##1}{##2#3}}
+    \let\m=\f \let\M=\f
+    \def\@##1##2##3{\expcs\loadfont{#1##2}{##3 at #3pt }}
+    #2
+}
+% Set up a fontset -- define \#1fonts
+\def\fontset#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+    \xfontset{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+    \expcs\edef{#1fonts}{%
+       \ifFSELautoload \noexpcs{#1mathsfonts}\fi
+       \noexpand\FSELnicknames{#1}{#5}{#6}\noexpand#2%
+       \noexpand\setbaselineskip{#4}%
+       \noexpand\rm
+    }%
+    \ifFSELautoload
+       \expcs\def{#1mathsfonts}{\FSELloadmaths{#1}{#5}{#6}#2}%
+    \fi
+}
+\def\FSELnicknames#1#2#3{%
+    \let\@\relax
+    \def\f##1##2{%
+       \expcs\edef{##1}{\noexpcs{#1##1}}%
+    }%
+    \def\m##1##2{%
+       \expcs\textfont{##1fam}\csname#1##1\endcsname
+       \expcs\scriptfont{##1fam}\csname#2##1\endcsname
+       \expcs\edef{##1}{%
+           \fam\expcs\noexpand{##1fam}%
+           \expcs\noexpand{#1##1}%
+       }%
+    }%
+    \def\M##1{%
+       \expcs\scriptscriptfont{##1fam}\csname#3##1\endcsname
+       \m{##1}%
+    }%
+}
+\def\setbaselineskip#1{%
+    \baselineskip#1\relax \normalbaselineskip\baselineskip
+    \jot0.25\baselineskip
+    \smallskipamount 0.25\baselineskip plus 0.083\baselineskip
+       minus 0.083\baselineskip
+    \medskipamount 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.167\baselineskip
+       minus 0.167\baselineskip
+    \bigskipamount 1\baselineskip plus 0.333\baselineskip
+       minus 0.333\baselineskip
+    \abovedisplayskip\medskipamount
+    \abovedisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip
+    \advance\abovedisplayshortskip-1\abovedisplayskip
+    \belowdisplayskip\medskipamount
+    \belowdisplayshortskip\smallskipamount
+}
+\def\FSELloadmaths#1#2#3{%
+    \let\@\relax \def\f##1##2{}%
+    \def\m##1##2{\csname#1##1\endcsname \csname#2##1\endcsname}%
+    \def\M##1{\csname#3##1\endcsname \m{##1}}%
+    \global\expcs\let{#1mathsfonts}\relax
+}
+\chardef\rmfam=0 \chardef\mifam=1 \chardef\syfam=2
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ac5aae10e59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.fnt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+cmr12
+cmr9
+cmti12
+cmti9
+cmbx12
+cmbx9
+cmmi12
+cmmi9
+cmsy9
+cmtt12
+cmss10 scaled 1200
+cmmi10 scaled 1728
+cmmi10 scaled 1200
+cmsy10 scaled 1728
+cmsy10 scaled 1200
+cmr10
+cmr7
+cmti10
+cmti7
+cmbx10
+cmbx7
+cmmi10
+cmmi7
+cmsy10
+cmsy7
+cmtt10
+cmtt10 scaled 1200
+cmbxti10 at 12pt 
+cmbxti10 at 10pt 
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f2304296a7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,942 @@
+% pdcguide.dtx -- user guide for PDCMAC -- Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-04-06>	
+	
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "The PDCMAC Package",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcguide.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision$",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date$",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "A brief user guide for the PDCMAC package.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccmlft.tex, pdcmacvn.tex, ..."
+%%%}
+
+%{{{ pdcguide 
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\errorcontextlines10000
+
+\ifx\usepsfonts!
+    \def\bodyfontname{pplr} \def\bodyttfontname{phvr} 
+    \def\headingttfontname{phvro}
+    \input pdcpsdoc
+    \mathcode`.=\gbdecimal \mathcode`/="202F
+\else
+    \input pdccmdoc  \mathcode`.="0201 \mathcode`/="213D
+\fi
+
+\input pdcmacvn
+\majorheadline{PDCMAC Release $\pdcmacversion$} \twosidedtrue
+\noheadlinetrue 
+    
+\def\n#1{$ \textfont0=\font \mathcode`i=`i \mathcode`v=`v \mathcode`x=`x #1 $}
+
+\def\plainslash{/} \declareactivechar\/ \let/\plainslash
+\def\texmf#1#2{{\tt\let/=\slash%  $ for matching
+	\$texmf/#1%
+	\def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty \plainslash \else /#2\fi}}
+\def\url#1#2#3{{\tt#1:\penalty\exhyphenpenalty
+	\plainslash\plainslash \let/=\slash #2%
+	\def\tmp{#3}\ifx\tmp\empty \plainslash \else /#3\fi}}
+
+\newcount\tablecount \tablecount2
+\def\newtableid{\global\advance\tablecount1 \number\tablecount}
+
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  intro
+\section{What is this thing you Earth people call PDCMAC?}
+%{{{   intro
+\subsec{Introduction}
+		
+	PDCMAC is collection of \TeX\ definition files (macro files)
+	which may be useful for setting documents using plain \TeX\
+	(`plain' here meaning \TeX\ formats following similar
+	conventions to those of Appendix~B of the {\it\TeX book}, as
+	opposed to more complex formats like \LaTeX).  This package is
+	much less powerful than \LaTeX~2e; it is intended to be a
+	simpler solution to simpler requirements.  Because it is less
+	complex, the macro code should be more readily adapted by other
+	\TeX\ hackers.
+
+	The package includes a font-selection system, an output routine,
+	general formatting macros, and `style files' which input the
+	other files and set the format for documents.
+
+	The name `PDCMAC' is pronounced `{\it p-d-c}-mac'.  In file
+	names where case matters it is always written in all-lower-case.
+	The fairly consistent use of a `|pdc|-' or `|ma|-' prefix in
+	this and other names is intended to prevent these files clashing
+	with files from other packages.  (The `|ma|-' files are part of
+	the Malvern package.)
+%}}}   intro
+%{{{   conventions
+\subsec{Conventions in this guide}
+
+	Contents and names of computer files, and commands to be typed
+	literally are printed in {\tt this distinctive font}.
+	Placeholders to be filled in with real file names etc.~are
+	written in {\it this italic font}.
+	
+%}}}   conventions
+%{{{   copying
+	
+\subsec{Copying}
+	The PDCMAC files are copyright \copyright\ 1990--1995 P. Damian
+	Cugley.  They may be used in documents, and distributed as a
+	complete package as per the GNU General Public Licence
+	(reproduced at the end of this document).
+
+	The |tex| files generated by the |dtx| files are like `object
+	files'; you should not distribute them without their source
+	files (the |dtx| files).
+
+	Do not modify the generated |tex| files; if you must modify the
+	macros, do this by editing the |dtx| files and running them
+	through \TeX\ again.  If you must distribute modified versions
+	(instead of persuading me to modify my copies), help reduce the
+	proliferation of incompatible versions by doing the following:
+\bullets
+	\\describe the modifications clearly in the printed
+	documentation;
+
+	\\say who modifed them in the header comments in the definition
+	files, and change the version identifier;
+
+	\\use a different name for the modifed definition files.
+\endbullets
+	The last point is so that documents using the unmodified
+	versions can coexist with the ones using modified ones.
+
+
+	
+%}}}  copying
+%{{{   feedback
+	
+\subsec{Feedback}
+	I am very interested to hear from people who find a use for this
+	package.  Please send comments and suggestions, or reports of
+	bugs, to the address above.  If you find PDCMAC useful or
+	amusing, please send me a pretty postcard.  Thanks.
+
+%}}}  feedback
+%}}}  intro
+%{{{  unpack install
+\section{Unpacking and installing the files}
+%{{{   unpack
+
+\subsec{Unpacking}
+
+	Two common formats for archives are 
+\bullets
+\\	(on Unix) 
+	|tar| files, compressed using GNU |zip| (|gzip|), and
+\\	(on MS-DOS) PKZIP-style archives.
+\endbullets
+	Compressed tarfiles will have names like |pdcmac-1.0.tar.gz| or
+	|pdcmac10.tgz| (the latter form is required by ISO-9660\note{ISO
+	9660 is the standard for CD-ROM file systems.  Its file names
+	are like MS-DOS file names: a sequence of 8-letter components
+	followed by a `|.|' and three-letter suffix.  ISO~9660 names use
+	capital letters, but on case-sensitive operating systems these
+	are usually transliterated to lower-case.}  file systems).
+	Unpack the package with something like
+\display \defverbatim\"
+	"zcat pdcmac10.tgz | tar -xf -"
+\enddisplay
+	This generates a new directory called |pdcmac-1.0|.
+
+	PKZIP archives unpack files into the current directory, so they
+	are unpacked like this:
+\display 
+	|md pdcmac|\cr
+	|cd pdcmac|\cr
+	|unzip a:\pdcmac10.zip|\cr
+\enddisplay
+	assuming the zipfile is so named.
+
+	There is a list of the files in the release in the appendix.
+%}}}   unpack
+%{{{   compile
+	
+\subsec{Generating the macro files}
+
+	The macro files are packaged with their documentation in
+	|dtx|\note{The \LaTeX~2e distribution uses the file name suffix
+	|dtx| for files with a similar function.  Unlike the \LaTeX\
+	system, the |dtx| files for PDCMAC produce the printed
+	documentation and unpack the macro files themselves using a
+	single macro file |pdccode.tex| and a single run through plain
+	\TeX; there are no |drv| or |ins| files.}  files; run plain
+	\TeX\ on each of the |dtx| files in turn to generate the macro
+	files and the printed documentation.  The resulting definition
+	files have almost no comments in them; instead you must read the
+	|dtx| files or the printed documentation.
+
+	The macro files are written in the current working directory.
+	They are identical to the code lines in the printed
+	documentation (they are generated from the same text in the
+	|dtx| files).
+
+	There is a file |pdcmondo.tex| which reads all of the |dtx|
+	files in turn except |pdcsty.dtx| and produces one large (70+
+	pages) document as well as all their macro files.  This is most
+	useful if you want to make a printed listing rather than keeping
+	|dvi| files for reading online.
+
+%}}}   compile
+%{{{   install
+\subsec{Installing the files}
+
+	The definition (|tex|) files belong in a directory where \TeX\
+	can find them.  In the new soon-to-be-standardized file name
+	conventions TWG-TDS~$0.61$\note{The TUG Working Group on a \TeX\
+	Directory Structure, {\it A Directory Structure for
+	Implementation-Independent \TeX\ Files} Version~$0.61$
+	(\url{ftp}{ftp.th-darmstadt.de/pub/tex/TDS-compliant/draft}{twg-tds.dvi},
+	10~February 1995).} this is the directory
+	\texmf{tex/plain/pdcmac}{}.  On older systems, the files go with
+	all the other macro files.
+
+	With TWG-TDS~$0.61$ the documentation goes in
+	\texmf{doc/plain/pdcmac}{}.  If you do not have a directory for
+	documentation, the documentation files might as well go in the
+	\TeX\ inputs directory as well.
+%}}}   install
+%{{{   configure
+	
+\subsec{Configuration on Unix systems}
+
+	There is a |configure| script and makefile template included,
+	which allows the process of unpacking to be run automatically on
+	Unix systems.\note{The configuration system is based on the GNU
+	Coding Standards, but was written by hand rather than using
+	Autoconf.}  The remainder of this section assumes you are
+	installing PDCMAC on a Unix system.
+
+\subsec{Run\-ning |configure|}
+
+	Start by running a Bourne Shell on the |configure| script, by
+	typing `|sh configure|'.  This examines your file system and
+	attempts to guess suitable directories in which to put macro and
+	documentation files.  The |configure| script understands options
+	listed in Table~1.
+
+\midinsert
+\noindent{\bf Table 1}\quad  Options for |configure|.  Other
+	options are ignored.\smallskip
+\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
+    \def\,{{\rm,}}
+    \def\\#1\, #2&{\vbox to \ht\strutbox{\hbox{$
+	\left.
+	\vcenter{\ialign{\strut##\hfil\cr#1 \cr#2 \cr}}
+	\right\rbrace
+	$}\vss}&}
+    \halign to \bodywd{\tt#\hfil\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil&
+		\vtop{\noindent#\smallskip}\tabskip=0pt\cr
+\noalign{\hrule height 1pt \vskip1.5\jot}%
+\it Option&\omit\it Meaning\hfil\cr
+\noalign{\vskip1\jot \hrule \vskip1.5\jot}%
+	\ttminus h\, \ttminus \ttminus help&
+		Print a summary of options\cr
+	\ttminus n\, \ttminus \ttminus no\ttminus create&
+		Create |config.status| but don't run it to make |makefile|.\cr
+	\\\ttminus t$dir$\, \ttminus \ttminus texmf=$dir$&
+		Says where to find a \TeX\ directory hierarchy.  For example,
+		`|-t|\allowbreak|/usr/texmf|' or `|-t|\allowbreak|/usr/local/lib/tex3.14/tex|'.  The
+		|configure| script will often guess correctly without this
+		option.\cr
+	\\\ttminus p$dir$\, \ttminus \ttminus prefix=$dir$&
+		Specifies the parent of the \TeX\ directory, for example,
+		`|-p/usr|' or `|-p/usr/local/lib|'.  This is for compatability
+		with the GNU coding standards.\cr
+	\\\ttminus wtds\, \ttminus \ttminus with\ttminus tds& Specify that the \TeX\ directory uses some
+		approximation to the TWG-TDS $0.61$ file name
+		conventions.  This should not be necessary as
+		|configure| will usually guess correctly.
+	\cr
+\noalign{\vskip\jot \hrule height 1pt}%
+}    }
+\endinsert
+
+	The configuration process creates a script |config.status| which
+	records the configuration; running |config.status| generates a
+	file |makefile|\note{Usually a makefile is called |Makefile|,
+	but I~wanted to make the package proof against file name munging
+	from being copied onto MS-DOS discs.}  from the template
+	|makefile.in|.
+
+	The |config.status| script has one option |-r| (or |--recheck|),
+	which re-runs |configure| with the same arguments as were used
+	to generate |config.status|; any options following |-r| are
+	passed to |configure|.  
+
+%}}}   configure
+%{{{   make
+	
+\subsec{Running |make|}
+
+	Now you can use the |make| command to unpack and install all the
+	files.  Do `|make|' to generate all the definition files and
+	documentation.  Then `|make install|' to copy the macros into
+	\TeX's macros directory and the documentation into \TeX's
+	documentation area (assuming there is one).  The standard
+	targets which the makefile understands are listed in Table~2.
+
+\midinsert
+\noindent{\bf Table 2}\quad  Conventional targets defined in |makefile|.\smallskip
+\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
+    \def\,{{\rm,}}
+    \def\\#1\, #2&{\vbox to \ht\strutbox{\hbox{$
+	\left.
+	\vcenter{\ialign{\strut##\hfil\cr#1 \cr#2 \cr}}
+	\right\rbrace
+	$}\vss}&}
+    \halign to \bodywd{\tt make #\hfil\tabskip=0pt plus 1fil&
+		\vtop{\noindent\strut#\strut\smallskip}\tabskip=0pt\cr
+\noalign{\hrule height 1pt \vskip1.5\jot}%
+\omit\it Command&\omit\it Meaning\hfil\cr
+\noalign{\vskip1\jot \hrule \vskip1.5\jot}%
+    all&
+	Generate all the definitions files and |dvi| files\cr
+    install&
+	Generate the definition files and copy them in to \TeX's
+	macro area.  Also copy the |dvi| files into \TeX's documentation
+	area, if possible.\cr
+    uninstall&
+	Delete all the files that `|make install|' would install.\cr
+    mostlyclean& Delete some files but not as many as `|make clean|'.\cr
+    clean& Delete files from the current directory that are normally
+	created by `|make all|'.  Don't delete files that could be built
+	using the makefile but which come with the distribution.\cr
+    distclean& Delete some more files, including those made by
+	configuration.  If you have unpacked the files and generated the
+	macro files without creating any other files, this should leave
+	only the files in the distribution.\cr
+    realclean& Delete files deleted `|make distclean|' and any others
+	that can be rebuilt using the makefile.\cr
+    TAGS& Generate a tags table file for Emacs.\cr
+    dist& Make a tarfile and zipfile for the package.\cr
+\noalign{\vskip\jot \hrule height 1pt}%
+}    }
+\endinsert
+%}}}   make
+%}}}  unpack install
+%{{{  using
+	
+\section{Using PDCMAC style files for your documents}
+
+	Normally a document will start by reading one of the style
+	files, which in turn load the various definition files.  The
+	style files are intended to be more-or-less compatible with each
+	other.  I have arbitrarily divided the style files into
+	`leaflets' and `docs'.
+%{{{   leaflets
+
+\subsec{Leaflet styles}
+
+	A leaflet is only a few pages, so does not need a table of
+	contents or division into large units.  There is still a
+	|\section| command, but it is designed for smaller divisions
+	than the |\section| command used in `docs' (in a leaflet,
+	|\section| produces a heading with prominence similar to that
+	produced by |\subsec| in a doc).
+	
+	A leaflet-style document has no front matter, and so should
+	start with some sort of heading for the title.
+\lines \it
+	|\input pdccmlft|
+	|\majorheadline{| title |} \noheadlinetrue|
+	\quad commands to generate the title at the top of the first page
+\smallskip
+	\quad text of the document, perhaps using |\section| commands
+\smallskip
+	|\bye|
+\endlines
+%}}}   leaflets
+%{{{   docs
+	
+\subsec{Doc styles}
+
+	A doc is something larger than a leaflet but smaller than a
+	book.  It has a table of contents and numbered sections and
+	subsections, with section titles being reproduced in the
+	headline.  There is no provision for cross-references and
+	automatic bibliography (which require an |aux| file and at least
+	two passes through \TeX).  
+
+	Sections may be grouped into larger divisions I have called
+	\dfn{part}s.  Parts are numbered independently of sections, in
+	upper-case roman numerals.  (There is no special reason for not
+	numbering sections within parts; I~just prefer to have fewer
+	levels of numbering, so we get `\S$12.6$' instead of
+	`Subsection~$4.1.6$'.)
+
+\lines\it
+	|\input pdccmdoc|
+	|\part{| title |}|  ---or--- |\majorheadline{| title |}|
+	|\section{| title |}|
+	\quad contents of section
+\smallbreak
+	more sections
+\smallbreak
+	|\frontmatter|
+	\quad front matter
+	|\endfrontmatter|
+	|\bye|
+\endlines
+	
+\subsec{Front matter}
+
+	The front matter of the document---the title page, preface,
+	forword, etc.---must be printed {\it last}, with the table of
+	contents at the end of the front matter; this is so that the
+	table of contents may be accumulated during the \TeX ing of the
+	file.\note{It has a benefit for people reading the document with
+	a browser: page~1 of the document is the first page of the DVI
+	file, which makes selecting a given page easy, and the table of
+	contents is at the very end, so the browser's `go to last page'
+	command can be used to find the table of contents quickly.}
+     	The front matter starts with |\frontmatter| and may contain
+	|\section| commands.  Such sections will be unnumbered and will
+	not appear in the table of contents.
+	
+	For a short document, a separate title page is probably
+	excessive, and an abstract may be preferable to a preface.  In
+	this case the first page after |\frontmatter| could have the
+	title of the document (with author etc.)\ followed by an
+	abstract, any copyright information (or other small print), and
+	the contents (generated by |\endfrontmatter|).  In other words,
+	something like this:
+\lines\it
+	|\frontmatter|
+	\quad commands to print the title, etc.
+	\quad|\abstract|
+	\qquad the text of the abstract
+	\quad|\endabstract|
+	\quad copyright information, etc.
+	|\endfrontmatter|
+\endlines
+ 	For a longer document, there will be a separate title page and
+	perhaps a preface.
+\lines\it
+	|\frontmatter|
+	\quad|\titlepage|
+	\qquad commands to print the title, etc.
+	\quad|\splittitlepage|
+	\qquad print copyright information, etc.
+	\quad|\endtitlepage|
+	\quad|\section{Preface}|
+	\qquad text of preface, etc.
+	|\endfrontmatter|
+\endlines
+ 	The macro |\splittitlepage| marks the division between the title
+	page (title recto, page~i) and the back of the title page (title
+	verso, page~ii), which is where copyright information goes.
+	When formatting for one-sided printing, the copyright
+	information belongs on the title recto, because the title verso
+	will be blank, so |\splittitle| instead does |\vfill|.
+%}}}   docs
+%{{{   new syms
+\subsec{New symbols}
+
+	Several new symbols common to Malvern~A and PostScript fonts are
+	added (listed in Table~3).  Approximations built from other
+	glyphs are available in Computer Modern documents.
+
+
+\def\chartable#1{%
+    \midinsert
+	\leftline{{\bf Table \newtableid}\quad #1}\smallskip
+	\def\cs##1{\hbox to \gridwd{\hbox to2em{\csname##1\endcsname\hfil} 
+		{\tt\char`\\##1}\hfil}}
+	\def\mcs##1{\hbox to \gridwd{\hbox to2em{$\csname##1\endcsname$\hfil} 
+		{\tt\char`\\##1}\hfil}}
+	\def\mch##1{\hbox to \gridwd{\hbox to2em{$##1$\hfil} 
+		{\tt##1}\hfil}}
+	\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox\bgroup
+	    \hrule\medskip
+	    \halign\bgroup ##\hfil&& \hskip\colsep##\hfil\cr
+}
+\def\endchartable{
+	    \egroup
+            \smallskip\hrule
+	\egroup
+    \endinsert
+}
+
+\chartable{New symbols}
+	\cs{cents}&	\cs{pounds}& \cs{yen}&		\cs{florin}\cr
+	\cs{currency}& 	\cs{lguillemet}& \cs{rguillemet}& \cs{gbdecimal}\cr
+	\cs{permille}&	\cs{registered}& \cs{orda}& 	\cs{ordo}\cr
+	\cs{S}&		\cs{P}&		\cs{dag}&	\cs{ddag}\cr
+\endchartable
+
+	The symbols in the last row are `new' in the sense that they
+	will change according to the current font when using Malvern or
+	PostScript fonts.
+
+	
+	The maths symbols in Table~4 will be in the current |\rm| font
+	(fam~0) in PostScript documents.
+\begingroup\catcode`_=12 \catcode`\|=12
+\chartable{Maths symbols taken from Adobe's latin character set}
+	\mch{<}&	\mch{>}&	\mcs{_}&	\mch{|}\cr
+	\mcs{backslash}& \mcs{setminus}& \mcs{sim}&	\mcs{mid}\cr
+	\mcs{bullet}	&\mcs{lbrace}&	\mcs{rbrace}\cr
+\endchartable
+\endgroup
+	
+%}}}   new syms
+%}}}  using
+
+\section{Appendix}	
+%{{{  tagged-table intrinsics
+
+\def\taggedtable#1#2#3{
+    \medskip
+    \noindent{\bf Table \newtableid}\quad#1
+    \medskip
+    \moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{\hsize=\bodywd
+	\hrule height 1pt  \medskip
+	\line{\it\strut\hbox to \leftmargin{#2\hfil}{\it #3}\hfil}
+	\smallskip \hrule
+    }
+    \tagged \everytag{\tt}
+}
+\def\endtaggedtable{
+    \endtagged
+    \removelastskip \medskip \hrule height 1pt \bigskip
+}
+
+%}}}  tagged-table intrisnics
+%{{{  file types
+\subsec{File suffixes}
+
+	In this document, `a |foo| file' refers to a file of the type
+	conventionally given a name ending in `-|.foo|' (using lower
+	case because \TeX\ file names are always given in lower case).
+	This table lists some conventional file name suffixes used for
+	files in this package.
+
+\taggedtable{File suffixes used in this package}{\hbox to
+	\gridwd{Suffix\hfil Origin}}{Meaning}
+\def\\#1#2{\TAG{\hbox to \gridwd{\tt#1\hfil\rm#2}}}
+\\{1}{Unix}
+	Manual page for a program, in |nroff| format.
+\\{def}{\LaTeX~2e}
+	Definitions used by macro files but not expected to be referred
+	to directly in user documents.
+\\{dtx}{\LaTeX~2e}
+	Documented \TeX\ macros---a file which combines macro
+	definitions with their printed documentation.
+\\{eps}{Adobe}
+	An EPSF (Encapsulated PostScript Format) file.
+\\{fig}{Fig}
+	A picture file in Fig's undocumented format.
+\\{fnt}{PDCMAC}
+	Font list---a list of fonts used in a document, generated by the
+	PDCFSEL macros.
+%\\{idx}{\LaTeX~$2.09$}
+%	Unsorted index file.  (The lamentable convention of using |idx|
+%	and |ind|, both standing for `index' but representing different
+%	stages in the index-generation process, is for compatibility
+%	with \LaTeX.)
+\\{in}{GNU}
+	Template for a configuration file---when using the |configure|
+	script, the file |foo| is generated from the template |foo.in|.
+\\{tex}{\TeX}
+	(1)~A plain \TeX\ document. (2)~A plain \TeX\ definition file.
+\\{tgz}{GNU}
+	A Unix |tar| archive, compressed with GNU |zip|.  (Same as
+	|tar.gz|.)
+\\{txt}{traditional}
+	Plain ASCII text, readable on the terminal.
+\\{zip}{?PKZIP}
+	An MS-DOS PKZIP archive.
+\endtaggedtable
+	
+%}}}  file types
+%{{{  file list
+	
+\subsec{List of files}
+
+	Here is a list of files supplied with the package.  A list of
+	the files generated from these---the definition files, used in
+	documents---form the next section.
+
+	All the names are chosen so that they may be copied onto, say,
+	an ISO~9660\note{See note~1 on page 2.} or MS-DOS file system and
+	back to a sensible file system without the names being changed.
+
+\taggedtable{Files supplied in the package.}{File}{Contents}
+\\{00readme.txt}
+	Brief description of the package.
+
+\\{configure}
+	A shell script used to automatically configure the makefile for
+	Unix systems.  (This is an unavoidable exception to the rule
+	that names are ISO-9660-compatible.)
+
+\\{copying.tex}
+	A copy of the GNU General Public Licence, in \TeX able form.
+
+\\{copying.txt}
+	A copy of the GNU General Public Licence.
+
+\\{dtxtags}
+	Shellscript for making tag files in |etags|(1) format.
+
+\\{dtxtags.1}
+	A Unix manual entry for |dtxtags|.\note{This (and three more
+	shellscripts used in the makefile) are not intended to be
+	installed anywhere, but I~included manual pages just in case
+	they are---or in case the installer is curious as to what these
+	scripts do.}
+
+\\{fig2epsf}
+	A Unix shellscript that converts figures from Fig's format into
+	Encapsulated PostScript Format (EPSF) version~$3.0$ files.  It
+	uses |fig2dev| (from the TransFig package) to do most of the
+	work.  (It munges the PostScript code produced by |fig2dev|
+	2.1.4.1 so that it will print and will work with Ghostview.)
+
+\\{fig2epsf.1}
+	A Unix manual page for |fig2epsf|.  
+
+\\{install.txt}
+	Installation hints.
+
+\\{makefile.in}
+	Template from which the configuration process generates a
+	makefile, used by Unix's |make| command to automate compilation
+	and installation.  Should be called |Makefile.in| but that's not
+	ISO-9660-compliant.
+
+\\{magrmac.dtx}
+	Documentation for Malvern Greek macros.  This replaces the file
+	|magrmac.tex| included in Malvern release~$1.2$.
+
+\\{magrman.tex}
+	Brief user manual for |magrmac.tex|.  This replaces the version
+	distributed with Malvern~$1.2$.  It requires some Malvern~G
+	fonts.
+
+\\{oput01.eps oput02.eps}
+	Diagrams for |pdcoput5.dtx|.\note{The second edition of the {\it
+	PostScript Language Reference Manual} says these should be called
+	`-|.epsf|', but such names are not ISO-9660-compliant, so I~have
+	switched to `-|.eps|'.}
+
+\\{oput01.fig oput02.fig}
+	Source code for the above figures (Fig format).
+
+\\{pdcadobe.dtx}
+	Source code and documentation for |pdcadobe.tex|.
+
+\\{pdccode.dtx}
+	Source code and documentation for |pdccode.tex|.
+
+\\{pdccode.tex}
+	Macros used by |dtx| files.  This file has to be included
+	because |pdccode.dtx| can't be \TeX ed without it.
+
+\\{pdccode2.tex}
+	An experimental variation allowing multiple simultaneous
+	code files.
+
+\\{pdcfmt2.dtx}
+	Source code and documentation for formatting macros.
+
+\\{pdcfsel.dtx}
+	Source code and documentation for font selection macros.
+
+\\{pdcguide.dvi}
+	A copy of the user guide, already run through \TeX.
+
+\\{pdcguide.tex}
+	This user guide for PDCMAC.
+
+\\{pdcl1maa.dtx}
+	Source code and documentation for |pdcl1maa.tex|.
+
+\\{pdcmacvn.tex}
+	Version number for the whole package.
+
+\\{pdcmisc.dtx}
+	Source code and documentation for some small macro files.
+
+\\{pdcmondo.tex}
+	Makes a combined listing of all the |dtx| files (except
+	|pdcsty.dtx|).
+
+\\{pdcoput5.dtx}
+	Source code and documentation for an output routine.
+
+\\{pdcsty.dtx}
+	Source code and documentation for style files (|pdccmdoc.tex|,
+	|ma55doc.tex|, etc.).
+
+\\{pinstall}
+	A Unix shellscript that substitutes for the |install| command on
+	systems which don't have GNU |install|.\note{I am not going to
+	bother trying to make a makefile that will work with all the
+	different versions of |install|, since there is no easy way to
+	tell them apart and they are mutually incompatible.}
+
+\\{pinstall.1}
+	A Unix manual page for |pinstall|.
+
+\\{pmkdir}
+	A Unix shellscript used to create a directory.  Unlike plain
+	|mkdir|, it creates parent directories of the specified
+	directory if they do not exist.  This would be called
+	|pmkdirhier| but that name is not ISO-9660-compliant.
+
+\\{pmkdir.1}
+	A Unix manual page for |pmkdir|.
+
+\\{version.txt}
+	List of the version identifiers of the |dtx| files and the
+	shellscripts that come with the package.
+\endtaggedtable
+
+%}}}  file list
+%{{{  macro files
+	
+\subsec{List of definition files}
+
+	The following files are the ones that are intended to go in the
+	\TeX\ inputs area and to be used in documents.  Here a
+	\dfn{macro file} is simply a file of \TeX\ definitions; a
+	\dfn{style file} is a higher-level definition file that
+	specifies most of the things that affect the style of a document
+	(layout, fonts, macros, etc.).  Style files start by reading a
+	bunch of macro files.
+
+\taggedtable{Files generated from the |dtx| files.}{File}{Contents}
+\\{ma55doc.tex}
+	Style file for short documents with Malvern~55 as the text font.
+	A table of contents and page headlines are generated
+	automatically.
+
+\\{ma55lft.tex}
+	Style file for very short documents with Malvern~55 as the text
+	font. `Leaflet'-class documents have no table of contents.  
+
+\\{magrmac.tex}
+	Macros for typesetting in Greek with Malvern fonts (or any font
+	with the Malvern~G encoding).  There is a brief user's guide in
+	|magrman.tex|.
+
+\\{pdcadobe.tex}
+	Support for fonts with the Adobe Standard Roman and Adobe Symbol
+	repertoires\note{The \dfn{repertoire} of an encoding scheme is
+	the set of characters/glyphs it includes.  Since PostScript
+	fonts may be easily re-encoded, repertoire is more significant
+	then the actual encoding.} in the |dvi| file, and ISO~8859--1
+	(Latin-1) conventions in the manuscript file.  The output
+	encoding actually used is that variation on \TeX\ Text generated
+	by the |afm2tfm| that comes with DVIPS.  Newer \TeX\ systems
+	should instead use PostScript fonts with (a subset of) the 1990
+	Cork encoding.\note{Variously called `DC', `EC', `T1', and
+	`\TeX\ Extended Text---Latin', and described in {\it TUGboat}
+	10\#4.}  This file actually combines two functions: (1)~making
+	the various symbols availabe via commands like |\pounds| and
+	(2)~making Latin-1 characters in the manuscript produce
+	corresponding characters in the output.  Described in
+	|pdcadobe.dtx|.
+
+
+\\{pdccmdoc.tex}
+	Style file for short documents with Computer Modern Roman as the
+	text font.  A table of contents and page headlines are generated
+	automatically.
+
+\\{pdccmlft.tex}
+	Style file for very short documents with Computer Modern Roman
+	as the text font.  `Leaflet'-class documents have no table of
+	contents.
+
+\\{pdcfmt2.tex}
+	Macros for formatting text---bulleted and numbered lists, syntax
+	descriptions, verbatim text, headings, etc.  Most of
+	the facilities used by the style files come from this file.
+
+\\{pdcfsel.tex}	
+	Macros for selecting fonts.  Fonts are organized into
+	\dfn{fontset}s (selected with macros with names like
+	|\bodyfonts|) in which fonts are selected with nicknames like
+	|\it|, |\bf| (specified at the start of the document using
+	template macros).
+
+\\{pdchyex.tex}
+	Some random British English hyphenation exceptions (developed
+	while I~was using American English hyphenation paterns).  You
+	may not want to use this.  Described in |pdcmisc.dtx|.
+
+\\{pdcimth.tex}
+	Make letters in maths formulas come out in text italic instead
+	of math italic.  Useful if the body font isn't CMR, or if
+	multiple-letter identifiers are used.  Described in
+	|pdcmisc.dtx|.
+
+\\{pdcl1maa.tex}
+	Support for documents with using the ISO~8859--1 (Latin-1)
+	character set in the manuscript file and fonts with Malvern~A
+	encoding in the |dvi| file.  Described in |pdcl1maa.dtx|.
+
+\\{pdccmsub.tex}
+	Define some Malvern~A and PostScript glyphs (like \yen,
+	\registered) by overprinting CM glyphs.  Described in
+	|pdcmisc.dtx|.
+
+\\{pdcmigr.tex}
+	Make Greek capitals in maths mode use math italic (fam~1)
+	letters instead of letters from the roman font.  Especially
+	useful when there are no Greek caps in the roman font.
+	Described in |pdcmisc.dtx|.
+\endtaggedtable
+%}}}  macro files
+%{{{  old files
+\subsec{Obselete files}
+	
+	The following macro files were included with the Malvern~$1.0$
+	distribution, but were not intended to be installed.
+	Nevertheless they appear to have been copied into some older
+	versions of the Unix\TeX\ distribution.  They are obselete, and
+	their successors have new names (intended to reduce the chance
+	of accidental clashes).  I'd appreciate people removing them
+	from their \TeX\ systems.
+\display
+	|formac.tex|&
+	|parmac.tex|&
+	|utils.tex|&
+	|ssoutput.tex|\cr
+	|ldfonts.tex|&
+	|malvern.tex|&
+	|cmdoc.tex|\cr
+\enddisplay
+	The following documents are similarly obselete and should not be
+	in the macros directory anyway.
+\display
+	|aboutmalvern.tex|&
+	|latexfmv.tex|\cr
+\enddisplay
+	The following macro files have the new-style names, but are
+	superseded by PDCMAC~$1.0$ files.  You are not required to
+	remove then if you have documents using them.  Fortunately, they
+	appear not to have been absorbed by the Unix\TeX\ distribution
+	anyway.
+\display
+	|pdcfmt.tex|&
+	|pdcpars.tex|&
+	|pdcutil.tex|&
+	|pdcoput.tex|\cr
+\enddisplay
+	The new versions will have the major number of their version ID
+	appended to their names (e.g., |pdcfmt2.tex|), and this way new
+	and old versions may coexist, allowing older documents to still
+	be processed by \TeX.  The functionality of |pdcpars.tex| and
+	|pdcfmt.tex| have been taken over by |pdcfmt2.tex|.
+	
+
+%}}}  old files
+%{{{  gpl
+	
+\rigidbalancepartialpage{\bigskip}
+
+\begingroup \notefonts \setncolumns2 \everypage{} \leftmargin=0pt
+    \advance\textlistdepth2 \let\section=\subsec
+    \input copying.tex
+    \rigidbalancepartialpage{\bigskip}
+\endgroup
+
+	
+%}}}  gpl
+	
+\frontmatter
+%{{{  an absurd logo
+
+\ifx\asyfam\UNDEFINED
+%{{{   CMSSDC logo
+
+\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{
+
+\font\titlefont=cmssdc10 at 24pt
+
+\leftline{\titlefont P D C M A C\quad User Guide}
+
+\bigskip	
+} % end of vbox
+%}}}
+\else
+%{{{   PostScript logo
+
+\moveleft\leftmargin\vbox{\hsize=\bodywd
+	\font\thefont=pplr at 120pt
+	\input rotate
+
+	\line{\thefont
+	    \setbox0=\hbox{\lower0.975ex\hbox{pd}}\dp0=1ex \ht0=0pt \rotu0%
+	    c%
+	    \setbox0=\hbox{\lower0.95ex\hbox{vw}}\dp0=1ex \ht0=0pt \rotu0%
+	    c\hfil
+	}
+}
+\medskip	
+\leftline{\font\thotherfont=pplri at 60pt \thotherfont
+	\kern-0.1em USER GUIDE}
+\bigskip
+
+%}}}   PostScript logo
+\fi	
+%}}}  an absurd logo
+%{{{  titlepage
+
+\halign{#\hfil\cr
+	\headingfonts Edition 1 for Release 
+		$\textfont0=\font \pdcmacversion$\cr
+\noalign{\medskip}%
+	P. Damian Cugley\cr
+\noalign{\smallskip}%
+	Oxford University Computing Laboratory\cr
+	Parks Road\cr
+	Oxford \sc{OX2~7HN}\cr
+	UK\cr
+\noalign{\smallskip}%
+	|damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk|\cr
+}
+
+\bigskip
+\abstract
+	PDCMAC is a collection of macro files intended to be useful with
+	\TeX\ formats with similar conventions to those described in the
+	{\it\TeX book}.  This document describes how to unpack the files
+	and use them in \TeX\ documents.
+\endabstract
+
+\bigskip
+	
+\global\setbox\botbox\vbox{\hsize=\bodywd \prevdepth=0pt
+\noindent
+	{\it PDCMAC User Guide}.  \copyright~1995 P. Damian Cugley.  All
+	rights reserved.  Verbatim copies of this document (including
+	this copyright message) may be freely distributed.  This edition
+	first published March 1995.
+}
+
+\let\section=\subsec
+%}}}  title page
+\endfrontmatter	
+
+\bye
+%}}}
+%Local Variables:
+%fill-prefix: "	"
+%fold-folded-p: t
+%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a83c61b95e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+% pdchyex.tex 1.4 1995/03/30 -- some British hyphenations
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.4",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "A non-exhaustive set of hyphenation exceptions
+%%%                   designed to make TeX with American hyphenation
+%%%                   tables produce some British hyphenations.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.4 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 \uchyph=0
+\hyphenation{
+    le-gend le-gends re-adjust re-appear exact-ing
+    abs-cess abs-cess-es abs-cessed ana-lyse ana-lyses
+    ana-lysis ana-lyses appear-ance appear-ances bio-graphy
+    celeb-rate celeb-rates celeb-rations cor-respond-ence
+    depend-ent des-pise des-pises dis-pised dimin-ish
+    dimin-ish-es dimin-ish-ed dis-connect dis-connect-ed
+    dis-connects forget-ting gener-ally haemor-rhage
+    illus-trate immedi-ate immedi-ately immport-ance
+    inexplic-able inter-pret inter-est inter-ested
+    inter-est-ing minis-ter origin-ally philo-sophy
+    philo-sophic philo-sophic-ally prim-ary prob-ably
+    semb-lance
+    calm-est debt-ors fea-ther fea-thers post-humous lamb-like
+    poingn-ant tough-ish ach-ing archaeo-logy etymo-logy
+    philo-logist psycho-logist tauto-logy zoolo-gist
+    art-iest cig-ar-ette bio-logy bio-chem-is-try boy-friend
+    brit-ain brit-ish com-ic com-ics cug-ley dogs-body
+    dor-mouse gai-man graph-ic immedie-ate immedi-ate
+    immedi-ately issue mckean mis-hap mis-haps news-letter
+    news-paper night-crawler origin-ally origin-ator phys-ique
+    phys-iques porn-o-graphy porn-o-graphic rec-om-mend-ation
+    Ser-geant ser-geant Sien-kie-wicz spon-tan-e-ous
+    spon-tan-e-ously stop-ped strip-ped teen-ager teen-agers
+    tem-per-men-tal Thatch-er-ism Thatch-er-ite under-ground
+    under-grounds var-i-able venge-ance warp-smith warp-smiths
+    whirl-pool
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..fc42eb8365a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+% pdcimth.tex 1.4 1995/03/30 - maths letters in text italic
+\message{1.4 1995/03/30}
+
+\begingroup
+    \count0="7400 \count1=\count0
+    \advance\count0 by`A \advance\count1 by`a
+    \count2=`A \count3=`a \count4=26
+    \loop\ifnum\count4>0
+        \advance\count4 by-1
+        \global\mathcode\count2=\count0
+        \global\mathcode\count3=\count1
+        \advance\count0 by1 \advance\count1 by1
+        \advance\count2 by1 \advance\count3 by1
+    \repeat
+\endgroup
+\endinput
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.4",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines
+%%%                   mathcodes to use letters from the
+%%%                   text italic font instead of math italic.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%% }
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b7ec2dbe81a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,248 @@
+% pdcl1maa.dtx -- documentation & source for pdcl1maa.tex -*-tex-*-
+        
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "PDCL1MAA -- Formatting Macros",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 1.3 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:09:52 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and is the source code for 
+%%%                the TeX definitions file pdcl1maa.tex.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
+%%%                definitions file and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
+%%%}
+
+%{{{ pdcl1maa
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+
+\document
+\rcs$Id: pdcl1maa.dtx,v 1.3 1995/03/30 16:09:52 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+\codefile{pdcl1maa.tex}
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  introduction
+	
+\author{P. Damian Cugley}
+\title{PDCL1MAA---Macros for using Latin-1 characters with Malvern~A}
+\section{Introduction}
+	
+	This document describes |pdcl1maa.tex|, a collection of
+	definitions designed to make Malvern~A characters available
+	using the ISO~8859--1 input encoding (Latin-1).
+
+
+\subsec{About this document}
+
+	The definitions file and the printed documentation are both in
+	|pdcl1maa.dtx|, a `documented \TeX\ macros' file\footnote*{The
+	\LaTeX~2e distribution uses files with the `|dtx|' suffix for
+	similar purposes.}  which, when processed by plain \TeX,
+	generates a fresh copy of |pdcl1maa.tex| in the current directory
+	in addition to the |dvi| file.  This ensures that the printed
+	documentation and the code it describes are identical.  The
+	|dtx| file uses the macros in |pdccode.tex|.
+
+%}}}  introduction
+%{{{  File identification
+\section{File identification}
+	
+	Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
+	file.
+
+\code
+	\|\% pdcl1maa.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- Latin-1 chars in Malvern-A
+	|
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "ISO 8859-1 characters using Malvern-A fonts.
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%% }
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
+	|
+\endcode
+%}}}  file id
+%{{{  ISO 8859-1 support
+\section{ISO 8859--1 input}
+
+\subsec{Symbols}
+
+	Those characters whose code is the same as the code of the
+	corresponding glyph are left alone (with catcode~12).  For
+	example, |^^a3| (pounds sterling) is left alone.
+
+	Those that have an equivalent |\chardef| (or |\mathchardef|)
+	name are defined with |\let|.  Those with an equivalent standard
+	ligature use that ligature.
+
+	I don't use |\declareactivechar| on these because they would not
+	work properly in verbatim text with catcode~12.  (Extending
+	verbatim text to include Latin-1 will take a few definitions
+	along the same lines as |\ttlq| etc.)
+\code
+	|\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~
+%	A1
+% 	A2
+%	A3	
+%	A4
+	|\catcode`^^a5\active \let^^a5=\yen
+%	A6
+	|\catcode`^^a7\active \let^^a7=\S
+	|\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\"
+	|\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright
+	|\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda
+	|\catcode`^^ab\active \def^^ab{<<}
+	|\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot
+	|\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\-
+	|\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered
+	|\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\=
+\smallbreak
+	|\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees
+	|\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm
+	|\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2}
+	|\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3}
+	|\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\'
+	|\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu
+	|\catcode`^^b6\active \let^^b6=\P
+	|\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal
+	|\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\c
+	|\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1}
+	|\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo
+	|\catcode`^^bb\active \def^^bb{>>}
+	|\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14}
+	|\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12}
+	|\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34}
+	|\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`}
+\smallbreak	
+	|\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times
+	|\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Composite letters}
+
+
+	The characters that represent marks for composite
+	letters\footnote*{This phrase is used on the grounds that the
+	word {\it accent} tends to provoke lectures on ways in which
+	many composite letters do {\it not} represent accents in the
+	languages in which they are used.} are |\let| to the
+	corresponding composite-letter-making command---one may write
+	`{\tt\char"7F u\char"18 c}' to get `\"u\c c'.
+\code
+	|\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\`A}
+	|\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\'A}
+	|\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\^A}
+	|\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\~A}
+	|\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\"A}
+	|\catcode`^^c5\active \let^^c5=\AA
+	|\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE
+	|\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\c C}
+	|\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\`E}
+	|\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\'E}
+	|\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\^E}
+	|\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\"E}
+	|\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\`I}
+	|\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\'I}
+	|\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\^I}
+	|\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\"I}
+\smallbreak
+	|\catcode`^^d0\active \let^^d0=\DH
+	|\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\~N}
+	|\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\`O}
+	|\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\'O}
+	|\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\^O}
+	|\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\~O}
+	|\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\"O}
+	|\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O
+	|\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\`U}
+	|\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\'U}
+	|\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\^U}
+	|\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\"U}
+	|\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\'Y}
+	|\catcode`^^de\active \let^^de=\TH
+	|\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss
+\smallbreak
+        |\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\'a}
+	|\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\`a}
+	|\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\^a}
+	|\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\~a}
+	|\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\"a}
+	|\catcode`^^e5\active \let^^e5=\aa
+	|\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae
+	|\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\c c}
+	|\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\`e}
+	|\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\'e}
+	|\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\^e}
+	|\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\"e}
+	|\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\`i}
+	|\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\'i}
+	|\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\^i}
+	|\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\"i}
+\smallbreak
+	|\catcode`^^f0\active \let^^f0=\dh
+	|\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\~n}
+	|\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\`o}
+	|\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\'o}
+	|\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\^o}
+	|\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\~o}
+	|\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\"o}
+	|\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o
+	|\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\`u}
+	|\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\'u}
+	|\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\^u}
+	|\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\"u}
+	|\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\'y}
+	|\catcode`^^fe\active \let^^fe=\th
+	|\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\"y}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  ISO 8859-1 support
+\endcodefile
+\enddocument
+\bye
+%}}} pdcl1maa.dtx
+
+%Local variables:
+%fill-prefix: "\t"
+%fold-folded-p: t
+%End:
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..17f690c48d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+% pdcl1maa.tex 1.3 1995/03/30 -- Latin-1 chars in Malvern-A
+
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcl1maa.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.3",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "ISO 8859-1 characters using Malvern-A fonts.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on pdcl1maa.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcl1maa.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%% }
+
+\message{1.3 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\catcode`^^a0\active \let^^a0=~
+\catcode`^^a5\active \let^^a5=\yen
+\catcode`^^a7\active \let^^a7=\S
+\catcode`^^a8\active \let^^a8=\"
+\catcode`^^a9\active \let^^a9=\copyright
+\catcode`^^aa\active \let^^aa=\orda
+\catcode`^^ab\active \def^^ab{<<}
+\catcode`^^ac\active \let^^ac=\lnot
+\catcode`^^ad\active \let^^ad=\-
+\catcode`^^ae\active \let^^ae=\registered
+\catcode`^^af\active \let^^af=\=
+\catcode`^^b0\active \let^^b0=\degrees
+\catcode`^^b1\active \let^^b1=\pm
+\catcode`^^b2\active \def^^b2{^2}
+\catcode`^^b3\active \def^^b3{^3}
+\catcode`^^b4\active \let^^b4=\'
+\catcode`^^b5\active \let^^b5=\mu
+\catcode`^^b6\active \let^^b6=\P
+\catcode`^^b7\active \let^^b7=\gbdecimal
+\catcode`^^b8\active \let^^b8=\c
+\catcode`^^b9\active \def^^b9{^1}
+\catcode`^^ba\active \let^^ba=\ordo
+\catcode`^^bb\active \def^^bb{>>}
+\catcode`^^bc\active \def^^bc{\frac14}
+\catcode`^^bd\active \def^^bd{\frac12}
+\catcode`^^be\active \def^^be{\frac34}
+\catcode`^^bf\active \def^^bf{?`}
+\catcode`^^d7\active \let^^d7=\times
+\catcode`^^f7\active \let^^f7=\div
+\catcode`^^c0\active \def^^c0{\`A}
+\catcode`^^c1\active \def^^c1{\'A}
+\catcode`^^c2\active \def^^c2{\^A}
+\catcode`^^c3\active \def^^c3{\~A}
+\catcode`^^c4\active \def^^c4{\"A}
+\catcode`^^c5\active \let^^c5=\AA
+\catcode`^^c6\active \let^^c6=\AE
+\catcode`^^c7\active \def^^c7{\c C}
+\catcode`^^c8\active \def^^c8{\`E}
+\catcode`^^c9\active \def^^c9{\'E}
+\catcode`^^ca\active \def^^ca{\^E}
+\catcode`^^cb\active \def^^cb{\"E}
+\catcode`^^cc\active \def^^cc{\`I}
+\catcode`^^cd\active \def^^cd{\'I}
+\catcode`^^ce\active \def^^ce{\^I}
+\catcode`^^cf\active \def^^cf{\"I}
+\catcode`^^d0\active \let^^d0=\DH
+\catcode`^^d1\active \def^^d1{\~N}
+\catcode`^^d2\active \def^^d2{\`O}
+\catcode`^^d3\active \def^^d3{\'O}
+\catcode`^^d4\active \def^^d4{\^O}
+\catcode`^^d5\active \def^^d5{\~O}
+\catcode`^^d6\active \def^^d6{\"O}
+\catcode`^^d8\active \let^^d8=\O
+\catcode`^^d9\active \def^^d9{\`U}
+\catcode`^^da\active \def^^da{\'U}
+\catcode`^^db\active \def^^db{\^U}
+\catcode`^^dc\active \def^^dc{\"U}
+\catcode`^^dd\active \def^^dd{\'Y}
+\catcode`^^de\active \let^^de=\TH
+\catcode`^^df\active \let^^df=\ss
+\catcode`^^e0\active \def^^e0{\'a}
+\catcode`^^e1\active \def^^e1{\`a}
+\catcode`^^e2\active \def^^e2{\^a}
+\catcode`^^e3\active \def^^e3{\~a}
+\catcode`^^e4\active \def^^e4{\"a}
+\catcode`^^e5\active \let^^e5=\aa
+\catcode`^^e6\active \let^^e6=\ae
+\catcode`^^e7\active \def^^e7{\c c}
+\catcode`^^e8\active \def^^e8{\`e}
+\catcode`^^e9\active \def^^e9{\'e}
+\catcode`^^ea\active \def^^ea{\^e}
+\catcode`^^eb\active \def^^eb{\"e}
+\catcode`^^ec\active \def^^ec{\`i}
+\catcode`^^ed\active \def^^ed{\'i}
+\catcode`^^ee\active \def^^ee{\^i}
+\catcode`^^ef\active \def^^ef{\"i}
+\catcode`^^f0\active \let^^f0=\dh
+\catcode`^^f1\active \def^^f1{\~n}
+\catcode`^^f2\active \def^^f2{\`o}
+\catcode`^^f3\active \def^^f3{\'o}
+\catcode`^^f4\active \def^^f4{\^o}
+\catcode`^^f5\active \def^^f5{\~o}
+\catcode`^^f6\active \def^^f6{\"o}
+\catcode`^^f8\active \let^^f8=\o
+\catcode`^^f9\active \def^^f9{\`u}
+\catcode`^^fa\active \def^^fa{\'u}
+\catcode`^^fb\active \def^^fb{\^u}
+\catcode`^^fc\active \def^^fc{\"u}
+\catcode`^^fd\active \def^^fd{\'y}
+\catcode`^^fe\active \let^^fe=\th
+\catcode`^^ff\active \def^^ff{\"y}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7ccd9172b55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdclft.def
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+% pdclft.def 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "pdclft.def",
+%%% version        = "1.2",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "Sectioning macros for style files.
+%%%                   This macro file was generated by running plain
+%%%                   TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = ""
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\topmg=297mm \advance\topmg-11in \advance\topmg7mm
+\botmg=\topmg
+\advance\topmg\ht\strutbox \advance\topmg\headlineskip
+\ifdim \topmg<20mm \topmg=20mm \fi
+\ifdim \botmg<27mm \botmg=27mm \fi
+\setpaper{210mm}{297mm}
+\setnkgrid{4}{3}
+\colrule=0pt
+\leftmargin=\gridwd \advance\leftmargin\colsep
+\everypage={\ifdim\leftmargin>0pt
+    \setbox\leftbox=\hbox to \gridwd{}\fi}
+\everyfootnote={\notefonts}
+\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
+\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
+\everytag={\bf}
+\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno
+\def\thesecno{%
+    \n{%
+        \number\secno
+        \ifnum\subsecno>0
+            .\number\subsecno
+        \fi
+    }%
+}
+\def\section{
+    \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0
+    \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts\thesecno\enspace}{}
+}
+\def\subsec{
+    \global\advance\subsecno1
+    \doheading\smallskipamount{\bodyfonts\thesecno\enspace}{}
+}
+\newtoks\majorheadline
+\expandafter\majorheadline
+    \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}}
+\newif\ifnoheadline \newif\iftwosided
+\headline{%
+    \ifnoheadline
+        \hfil
+    \else\iftwosided
+        \ifodd\pageno
+            \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}%
+        \else
+            {\bf\folio}\quad \the\majorheadline\hfil
+        \fi
+    \else
+        \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}%
+    \fi\fi
+}
+\footline{%
+    \ifnoheadline
+        \global\noheadlinefalse
+        \hfil{\bf\folio}\hfil
+    \else
+        \hfil
+    \fi
+}
+\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}}
+\def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
+\def\MF{{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi META}\-%
+        {\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi FONT}}
+\def\MSDOS{\leavevmode\hbox{MS-DOS}}
+\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
+\begingroup\catcode`\|=12 \toks0={\endgroup
+    \def\dfn#1{\ifx\index\UNDEFINED\else\index{#1|INDdfn}\fi{\bi #1}}
+} \the\toks0
+\declareactivechar\* \def*#1*{{\it#1\/}}
+\def\|{%
+    \relax\ifmmode
+        \Vert
+    \else
+        \begingroup
+        \ttb \setupverbatim
+        \catcode`\|=13 \let|\endgroup
+    \fi
+}
+\def\inputifexists#1{%
+    \openin15=#1
+    \ifeof15 \else \input #1 \fi
+    \closein15
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e8a114b16d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmacvn.tex
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+\def\pdcmacversion{1.0.01}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a01860a53e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+% pdcmigr.tex 1.4 1995/03/30-- see end of file for more info
+\message{1.4 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+\mathchardef\Gamma   = "7100
+\mathchardef\Delta   = "7101
+\mathchardef\Theta   = "7102
+\mathchardef\Lambda  = "7103
+\mathchardef\Xi      = "7104
+\mathchardef\Pi      = "7105
+\mathchardef\Sigma   = "7106
+\mathchardef\Upsilon = "7107
+\mathchardef\Phi     = "7108
+\mathchardef\Psi     = "7109
+\mathchardef\Omega   = "710A
+\endinput
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.4",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines
+%%%                   \Gamma, ..., \Omega to use letters from the
+%%%                   maths italic font instead of the roman font.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%% }
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4e73e2c8eda
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,555 @@
+% pdcmisc.dtx -- documentation and source code for misc macro files -*-tex-*-
+
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "Miscellanous macro files",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcmisc.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 1.4 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:13:08 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and is the source code for 
+%%%                the TeX definitions files pdcmigr.tex, pdcimth.tex,
+%%%                pdchyex.tex, pdcmasyb.tex.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
+%%%                definitions files and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
+%%%}
+	
+%{{{ pdcmisc.dtx
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+
+\document
+\rcs$Id: pdcmisc.dtx,v 1.4 1995/03/30 16:13:08 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+
+\def\newfile{\lineno=0 }
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  intro
+\author{P. Damian Cugley}
+\title{Miscellaneous macro files}
+
+%}}}  intro
+%{{{  pdcmigr
+	
+\newfile
+\section{PDCMIGR: Use math italic Greek capitals}
+
+	Knuth notes that it is conventional to use unslanted Greek
+	capitals in maths, even though other letters are slanted
+	(I~personally think that it looks nicer to use slanted Greek
+	caps).  Thus \TeX\ takes the Greek capitals from fam~0 by
+	default.
+
+	If you are using a body text font that does not have the Greek
+	capitals---for example, almost any PostScript or Cork-style
+	font---then this no longer works.  Better then to switch to
+	using the Greek capitals from the math italic font (fam~1).
+	That's what the file |pdcmigr.tex| does.  The characters are
+	still in maths class~7, meaning that they will respect changes
+	to |\fam| made by font-switching commands.
+	
+\codefile{pdcmigr.tex}
+
+\code
+	\|\% pdcmigr.tex \fileversion~\filedate -- see end of file %
+		for more info
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\}
+\smallbreak
+	|\mathchardef\Gamma   = "7100
+	|\mathchardef\Delta   = "7101
+	|\mathchardef\Theta   = "7102
+	|\mathchardef\Lambda  = "7103
+	|\mathchardef\Xi      = "7104
+	|\mathchardef\Pi      = "7105
+	|\mathchardef\Sigma   = "7106
+	|\mathchardef\Upsilon = "7107
+	|\mathchardef\Phi     = "7108
+	|\mathchardef\Psi     = "7109
+	|\mathchardef\Omega   = "710A
+\endcode
+
+	This file has more comments than code.  Since the code is so
+	short I think I'll get away with putting the comments after an
+	|\endinput|.
+\code
+	|\endinput
+\smallskip
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines
+	|%%%                   \Gamma, ..., \Omega to use letters from the
+	|%%%                   maths italic font instead of the roman font.
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	|%%%                   plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	|%%%                   Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%% }
+\endcode
+
+\endcodefile
+%}}}  pdcmigr
+%{{{  pdcimth
+
+\newfile
+\section{PDCIMTH: use text italic letters in maths mode}
+
+	Very few existing font families have a separate math-italic font.  When
+	using these fonts as body fonts, with the Computer Modern fonts as
+	maths fonts, it looks wrong to have the maths letters in a completely
+	different style form the text italic.  Therefore it makes sense to
+	redefine maths mode so that the letters come from the text italic font.
+
+	This is also useful when multiple-letter identifiers are used in maths
+	mode.  We c an say |$difference:=height+depth$| and get `$\it
+	difference:=height+depth$' instead of `$difference:=height+depth$'.
+
+	In the following, the counters |\count0| to |\count4| are used as
+	follows:
+$$\centerline{\vbox{\halign{\tt\cs{#}\hfil&&\quad#\hfil\cr
+	count0&mathcode for current upper case char\cr
+	count1&mathcode for current lower case char\cr
+	count2&ASCII code of current upper case char\cr
+	count3&ASCII code of current lower case char\cr
+	count4&number of characters left to redefine\cr
+}}}$$
+ 	The grouping prevents this temporary use conflicting with \TeX's
+	use of these counters.
+	
+\codefile{pdcimth.tex}
+\code
+	\|\% pdcimth.tex \fileversion~\filedate~- maths letters in text italic
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~\filedate\}
+	|
+	|\begingroup
+\smallbreak
+	|    \count0="7400 \count1=\count0
+	|    \advance\count0 by`A \advance\count1 by`a
+	|    \count2=`A \count3=`a \count4=26
+\smallbreak
+	|    \loop\ifnum\count4>0
+	|        \advance\count4 by-1
+	|        \global\mathcode\count2=\count0 
+	|        \global\mathcode\count3=\count1
+	|        \advance\count0 by1 \advance\count1 by1
+	|        \advance\count2 by1 \advance\count3 by1
+	|    \repeat
+\smallbreak
+	|\endgroup
+\endcode
+\noindent
+	The value $\hbox{\H{}\tt 7400} + c$ used above means mathcode~7,
+	fam~4 (|\itfam|), character~$c$.
+
+	Once again, the code is short enough that I think I can get away
+	with putting the comments at the end:
+\code
+	|\endinput
+\smallskip
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcimth.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "A definition file for TeX, which redefines
+	|%%%                   mathcodes to use letters from the
+	|%%%                   text italic font instead of math italic.
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	|%%%                   plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	|%%%                   Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%% }
+\endcode
+\endcodefile
+%}}}  pdcimth
+%{{{  pdchyex
+
+\newfile
+\section{PDCHYEX: Hyphenation exceptions}
+
+	These hyphenation exceptions are ones I~use for must documents.
+
+\notepar
+	Of all the macro files in this package, this is the one you
+	should be most chary of using.  These are written for a \TeX\
+	system which uses American English hyphenation patterns, but are
+	intended to help it produce hyphenations suitable for British
+	English, and this peverse approach will probably lead to all
+	sorts of anomalies. Ideally separate hyphenation patterns will
+	be used for British English documents.
+\endnotepar
+
+\codefile{pdchyex.tex}
+
+\subsec{File identification}
+
+	The list of exceptions is expected to grow, so it seems best to
+	have the identification at the top of the file.
+
+\code
+	\|\% pdchyex.tex \fileversion~\filedate~-- some British hyphenations
+\smallskip
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdchyex.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "A non-exhaustive set of hyphenation exceptions
+	|%%%                   designed to make TeX with American hyphenation
+	|%%%                   tables produce some British hyphenations.
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	|%%%                   plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991, 1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	|%%%                   Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%%}
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\}
+	|
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Setting parameters}
+
+	These settings are from {\it Hart's Rules} p.\thinspace141.
+\code
+	|\lefthyphenmin=2 \righthyphenmin=3 \uchyph=0
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{And finally, the hyphenation exceptions}
+
+\code
+	|\hyphenation{
+\endcode
+	First, some words from {\it Hart's Rules}\/ pp.\thinspace14--15.
+	I've taken the list on p.\thinspace14 and included here those
+	which were given wrong hyphenation by \TeX's default tables.
+\code
+	|    le-gend le-gends re-adjust re-appear exact-ing
+\smallbreak
+
+	|    abs-cess abs-cess-es abs-cessed ana-lyse ana-lyses
+	|    ana-lysis ana-lyses appear-ance appear-ances bio-graphy
+	|    celeb-rate celeb-rates celeb-rations cor-respond-ence
+	|    depend-ent des-pise des-pises dis-pised dimin-ish
+	|    dimin-ish-es dimin-ish-ed dis-connect dis-connect-ed
+	|    dis-connects forget-ting gener-ally haemor-rhage
+	|    illus-trate immedi-ate immedi-ately immport-ance
+	|    inexplic-able inter-pret inter-est inter-ested
+	|    inter-est-ing minis-ter origin-ally philo-sophy
+	|    philo-sophic philo-sophic-ally prim-ary prob-ably
+	|    semb-lance
+\smallbreak
+	|    calm-est debt-ors fea-ther fea-thers post-humous lamb-like
+	|    poingn-ant tough-ish ach-ing archaeo-logy etymo-logy
+	|    philo-logist psycho-logist tauto-logy zoolo-gist
+\endcode
+	Now some random hyphenations I~encountered in my own documents
+	at some point.  I~haven't checked these in a spelling
+	dictionary, so don't use them in documents where your life
+	depends on correct hyphenation.
+\code	
+
+	|    art-iest cig-ar-ette bio-logy bio-chem-is-try boy-friend
+	|    brit-ain brit-ish com-ic com-ics cug-ley dogs-body
+	|    dor-mouse gai-man graph-ic immedie-ate immedi-ate
+	|    immedi-ately issue mckean mis-hap mis-haps news-letter
+	|    news-paper night-crawler origin-ally origin-ator phys-ique
+	|    phys-iques porn-o-graphy porn-o-graphic rec-om-mend-ation
+	|    Ser-geant ser-geant Sien-kie-wicz spon-tan-e-ous
+	|    spon-tan-e-ously stop-ped strip-ped teen-ager teen-agers
+	|    tem-per-men-tal Thatch-er-ism Thatch-er-ite under-ground
+	|    under-grounds var-i-able venge-ance warp-smith warp-smiths
+	|    whirl-pool
+
+	|}
+\endcode
+\endcodefile
+	
+%}}}  pdchyex
+%{{{  pdccmsub
+
+\newfile
+\codefile{pdccmsub.tex}
+\section{PDCCNSUB: Substitutions using Computer Modern glyphs}
+
+	The Malvern and PostScript repertoire includes some characters
+	not included in the \TeX\ Text fonts used by plain \TeX.  I~have
+	made macros for some of these that assemble symbols from
+	existing characters.  This way documents can be switched between
+	the different font encoding schemes mroe easily.  They won't
+	look very pretty though.
+
+\notepar
+	These work acceptably with ten-point Computer Modern but might
+	need adjustment with other fonts.
+\endnotepar
+	
+%{{{   indentification
+\subsec{File dientification}
+
+\code
+	\|\% \filename~\fileversion~\filedate~-- CM subs for PS glyphs
+\smallskip
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcmigr.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "Macros for simulating some PostScript characters
+	|%%%                   using glyphs form the Computer Modern family.
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	|%%%                   plain TeX on pdcmisc.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	|%%%                   Distribute pdcmisc.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%% }
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~\filedate\}
+	|
+\endcode
+
+%}}}   indentification
+
+
+\code
+	|\dimendef\dimena=0
+\endcode
+\dimendef\dimena=0
+
+%{{{   currency
+
+\subsec{Currency signs}
+
+\def\yen{{%
+    \ooalign{%
+        \hfil\raise0.25ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle=$}\hfil\crcr
+        \hfil Y\hfil
+    }%
+}} 
+\def\currency{{%
+    \ooalign{%
+	\dimena-0.10em
+	\hskip\dimena \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox202}\hskip\dimena\crcr
+	\hfil \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox20E}\hfil
+    }%
+}} 
+	
+ 	The Yen sign looks like `50\thinspace000\yen', the cents sign
+	like `37\rlap/c'.  The pounds-sterling sign is always italic.
+\code
+	|\def\pounds{{\it\char36 }}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\yen{{%
+	|    \ooalign{%
+	|        \hfil\raise0.25ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle=$}\hfil\crcr
+	|        \hfil Y\hfil
+	|    }%
+	|}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\cents{\leavevmode\hbox{\rm\rlap/c}}
+\endcode
+
+	The ISO~646 currency sign---originally created to replace the
+	dollar sign in the international reference version character
+	set---is supposed to be drawn as a circle with four `ears';
+	we'll have to fake it rather crudely: `\currency', as in
+	`\currency100' or possibly `100\currency'.
+\code
+	|\def\currency{{%
+	|    \ooalign{%
+	|        \hskip-0.1em
+	|            \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox202}\hskip-0.1em\crcr
+	|        \hfil \raise0.2ex \hbox{\mathhexbox20E}\hfil
+	|    }%
+	|}} 
+\endcode	
+
+	The florin sign `{\it f}' seems to have started life as a way of
+	getting an italic {\it f} on dot-matrix printers.  In an italic
+	context it still has to be in itaics---switching to a roman
+	letter does not seem appropriate.
+\code
+	|\def\florin{{\it f\/}}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}   currency
+%{{{   circled letters
+	
+
+\subsec{Things in circles}
+
+\def\circledletter#1#2{{%
+    \ooalign{%
+	\hfil\kern#1\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm #2$}\hfil\crcr
+        \mathhexbox20D%
+    }%
+}}
+\def\registered{\circledletter{0.02em}R}
+\def\copyright{\circledletter{-0.045em}C}
+	Here's a general macro for making letters in circles---like
+	the registered trade mark sign `\registered', or the signs
+	`\circledletter{0.04em}P' and `\circledletter{0.02em}S'
+	(I~don't use them so I~haven't given them names) or even `\circledletter{0.05em}1'.  A matching
+	copyright sing (using a small capital {\it c} instead of a
+	lower case {\it c}) looks like `\copyright'.  Parameter |#1|
+	to the macro is the amount to shift the small letter relative
+	to the circle to get it optically centred.
+\code
+	|\def\circledletter#1#2{{%
+	|    \ooalign{%
+	|        \hfil\kern#1\raise0.00ex \hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm #2$}\hfil\crcr
+	|        \mathhexbox20D%
+	|    }%
+	|}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\registered{\circledletter{0.02em}R}
+	|\def\copyright{\circledletter{-0.045em}C}
+\endcode
+%}}}   circled letters
+%{{{   guillemets
+	
+\subsec{Guillemets}
+
+\def\lguillemet{\leavevmode \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}}
+\def\rguillemet{\leavevmode \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rangle\!\rangle$}}
+
+	Ersatz guillemets look like \lguillemet this\rguillemet.
+\code
+	|\def\lguillemet{%
+	|    \leavevmode 
+	|    \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\langle\!\langle$}%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\rguillemet{%
+	|    \leavevmode 
+	|    \raise0.5ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rangle\!\rangle$}%
+	|}
+\endcode
+%}}}   guillemets
+%{{{   misc
+\subsec{Miscellaneous}
+
+\def\permille{{%
+    \setbox0 \hbox{/}%
+    \flushtop{$\scriptstyle0\!$}/%
+    \lower\dp0 \hbox{$\!\scriptstyle00$}%
+}}
+\def\orda{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b a}}
+\def\ordo{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b o}}
+
+	The per-mille sign `\permille' can't be made from `\%' sign because
+	matching the rings is impossible, so we use `0/00':
+\code
+	|\def\permille{{%
+	|    \setbox0 \hbox{/}%
+	|    \flushtop{$\scriptstyle0\!$}/%
+	|    \lower\dp0 \hbox{$\!\scriptstyle00$}%
+	|}}
+\endcode
+
+	The British decimal point is a raised dot: `3\mathhexbox201141'
+	instead of `3.141'.
+\code
+	|\def\gbdecimal{\mathhexbox201}
+\endcode
+	Unfortunately, this symbol has become a casualty of the `DTP
+	revolution', and the American use of a full stop as a decimal
+	point has become common.
+
+	The glyphs `\orda' and `\ordo' are used in to abbreviate Spanish
+	ordinal numbers: the feminine {\it primera} becomes 1\orda, and
+	the masculine {\it primero} 1\ordo.
+\code
+	|\def\orda{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b a}}
+	|\def\ordo{\flushtop{\the\scriptfont\ifnum\fam>0 \fam\else 0\fi \b o}}
+\endcode
+
+	
+%}}}   misc
+%{{{   sc and csc
+	
+\subsec{Substitutions for Malvern's alphabet-switching commands}
+	
+	The macros used to select small capitals etc.\ in Malvern fonts
+	cannot work with Computer Modern, but might appear in documents
+	anyway.  Instead they are all made equivalent to |\relax|.  
+
+\code
+	|\let\sc=\relax
+	|\let\csc=\relax
+	|\let\mc=\relax
+\endcode
+
+%}}}   sc and csc
+
+\endcodefile
+	
+%}}}  pdcmasub
+\enddocument	
+\bye
+%}}} pdcmisc.dtx
+%Local Variables:
+%fill-prefix: "	"
+%fold-folded-p: t
+%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5736cf2cbdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcmondo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+% Combined listing of the PDCMAC macros
+% hacked together pdc 1995-03-28
+
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+\input epsf
+\errorcontextlines10000
+\document
+
+\input pdcmacvn
+
+%  Redefine the PDCCODE macros
+
+%\def\codefile#1{}
+%\def\endcodefile{}
+%\begingroup\obeylines \toksa={\endgroup %
+%    \def\CODElinei#1^^M{%
+%        \indent\the\everycodeline #1\par %
+%        \endgroup % matches \CODEline
+%    }%
+%    \def\CODElinex#1^^M{%
+%        {\indent\the\everycodeline #1\par}%
+%    }%
+%} \the\toksa
+
+
+% abbreviated TOC macros taken from pdcsty
+
+\newwrite\TOCfile
+\openout\TOCfile=\jobname.toc
+\def\TOCwrite#1#2#3{%
+    \begingroup\def\n{\string\n}
+    \def\tmp{#3}%
+    \edef\tmp{\string#1{#2}{\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp}}
+    \write\TOCfile\expandafter{\tmp{\folio}}\endgroup
+}
+\def\TOCtrim#1:->{}
+\def\TOCentryfile#1#2#3{
+    \medbreak\noindent{\subsecfont #2}\smallskip
+}
+\def\TOCentrysection#1#2#3{
+    \indent \llap{\S#1\enspace}
+	\ignorespaces #2\quad#3\par
+}
+\def\TOCentrysubsec#1#2#3{}
+
+
+% Abbreviated fontmatter definitions from pdcsty:
+
+\def\frontmatter{
+    \write\TOCfile{\string\endinput}
+    \closeout\TOCfile
+    \vfill\supereject
+    \pageno=-1 \secnofalse \headline{\hfil}
+    \def\TOCwrite##1##2##3{}
+}
+\def\endfrontmatter{
+    \section{Contents}
+    \input\jobname.toc
+    \vfill\supereject
+}
+\newif\ifsecno \secnotrue
+
+
+% sectioning taken from pdccode -- adapted to include TOC entries.
+
+\def\section#1{%
+    \advance\seccount1 \subseccount=0
+    \bigbreak
+    \begingroup
+        \secfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
+        \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
+        \ifsecno \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.\enspace}\fi #1
+	\TOCwrite\TOCentrysection{\number\seccount}{#1}
+        \nobreak\medskip
+    \endgroup
+    \noindenttrue
+}
+\def\subsec#1{%
+    \advance\subseccount1
+    \medbreak
+    \begingroup
+        \subsecfont \hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=1000
+        \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt \rightskip=0pt plus 2em
+        \ifsecno \noindent\llap{\number\seccount.%
+		\number\subseccount.\enspace}\fi #1
+	\TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsec{\number\seccount.\number\subseccount}{#1}
+        \nobreak\smallskip
+    \endgroup
+    \noindenttrue
+}
+\def\title#1{
+    \vglue2\baselineskip
+    \begingroup \titlefont \parindent-\leftmargin \hyphenpenalty10000
+	 #1\smallskip
+    \endgroup
+    \leftline{Version \fileversion,
+        last changed \fileauthor\space \mungedate\filedate}
+    \ifx\filelocker\empty\else
+        \leftline{Edited by \filelocker\unskip\ \today}
+    \fi
+    \medskip
+    \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule \vskip1pt \hrule
+    \medskip
+    \rightline{\theauthor}
+    \bigskip
+    \headline{\hfil\global\headline{%
+        \hskip-\leftmargin \sevenbf \themarks \hfil #1
+        \fileversion
+        \ifx\filelocker\empty
+            \space\mungedate\filedate
+        \else
+            e\space\today
+        \fi
+    }}
+    \TOCwrite\TOCentryfile{}{#1}
+}
+
+% A command to include another complete document in this one.
+
+\def\includedocument#1{
+    \begingroup
+	\let\RELAX\relax
+	\def\relax{\let\relax\RELAX \iffalse}
+	\let\document=\fi
+	\let\enddocument\endinput
+	\lineno=0
+	\input #1
+	\vfil\eject \mark{}
+    \endgroup
+}
+
+\includedocument{maamac.dtx}
+\includedocument{magrmac.dtx}
+\includedocument{pdcadobe.dtx}
+\includedocument{pdccode.dtx}
+\includedocument{pdcfsel.dtx}
+\includedocument{pdcfmt2.dtx}
+\includedocument{pdcl1maa.dtx}
+\includedocument{pdcmisc.dtx}
+\includedocument{pdcoput5.dtx}
+
+\headline{\hfil}
+\null		
+% need a blank page (unfortunate kludge)
+% This is because each embedded document is followed by a page break
+%  but we need the a page break before the TOC to finish writing out
+%  the TOC file.  Argh.
+\frontmatter
+\vfill
+\leftline{\titlefont PDCMAC Mondo Combined Listing}
+\leftline{\titlefont For release 1\kern-0.07em \raise0.5ex\hbox{.}0}
+
+\section{Preface}
+
+	PDCMAC is a package of plain \TeX\ macro files.  The macro files
+	are generated by running plain \TeX\ on |dtx| files, which
+	produces both a copy of the macros and printed documentation
+	(see the {\it PDCMAC User Guide}\/ for more information).  This
+	`combined listing' is a compilation of most of the |dtx| files
+	in the PDCMAC distribution (|pdcsty.dtx|, which generates the
+	sample style files, is not included).
+
+	This compilation document works as follows.  First it reads
+	|pdcmac.tex| and then redefines some macros to write entries for
+	a table of contents, and then reads the |dtx| files one after
+	another.  The results should be same as running \TeX\ on each of
+	the |dtx| files separately, except that the pages are numbered
+	continuously and there is a contents list.
+
+	This is useful for two different purposes: (1)~to make a printed
+	copy of the macros for reference while using them, and (2)~to
+	generate all the macro files in one \TeX\ command instead of
+	several.  This is useful when you cannot use the makefile
+	supplied with the package.  If you do have the makefile, it will
+	probably be the more convenient way to keep the macro files
+	up-to-date.
+
+	The files are included in alphabetical order.  See the PDCCODE
+	chapter below for information on the PDCCODE system.
+
+\endfrontmatter
+\enddocument
+\bye
+
+%Local Variables:
+%fill-prefix: "	"
+%tex-has-children: t
+%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..59930102a17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,986 @@
+% pdcoput5.dtx -- documentation & source for outpout routine -*-tex-*-
+        
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "PDCOPUT5 -- An output routine for zines",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 5.3 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/04/06 11:51:03 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and is the source code for 
+%%%                the TeX definitions file pdcoput5.tex.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
+%%%                definitions file and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode.tex"
+%%%}
+
+%{{{ pdcoput5.tex
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\relax
+\input pdccode
+\input epsf
+
+\document
+\rcs$Id: pdcoput5.dtx,v 5.3 1995/04/06 11:51:03 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+
+\codefile{pdcoput5.tex}
+
+\countdef\counta=255 \newcount\countb
+\counta=`a \countb="7461
+\loop \ifnum\counta<"7B
+    \mathcode\counta\countb
+    \advance\counta1 \advance\countb1
+\repeat
+\counta=`A \countb="7441
+\loop \ifnum\counta<"5B
+    \mathcode\counta\countb
+    \advance\counta1 \advance\countb1
+\repeat
+
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  introduction
+
+\title{PDCOPUT5---an output routine for zines}
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+	This document describes |pdcoput5.tex|, a \TeX\ definition file
+	that defines an output routine for \TeX\ documents.  The
+	complete text of the macros is reproduced, with brief
+	descriptions of how to exploit them.
+
+	In fact, running plain \TeX\ on the file |pdcoput5.dtx|
+	generates a copy of the macros in a file called |pdcoput5.tex|
+	in the current directory, as well as the printed
+	documentation.\footnote*{The \LaTeX~2e distribution uses files
+	with the suffix |dtx| for similar purposes.}  This should help
+	ensure that the printed documentation matches the file it
+	describes.
+
+	The name ends with `-|5|' to distinguish this file from its
+	predecessor (version 4.1.7), so that documents based on the old
+	macros can still be printed.
+
+%{{{   output routines
+\subsec{Output routines}
+
+	In a \TeX\ document, there is a special sequence of \TeX\
+	commands called the {\it output routine} which controls the
+	assembly of pages for output to the |dvi| file.  
+	Plain \TeX\ comes with an output routine that handles simple
+	documents (with footnotes and topinserts); \LaTeX\ has a more
+	complex output routine that has many extra features (margin
+	paragraphs, \LaTeX's floats).
+%}}}   output routines
+%{{{   backgorund
+	
+\subsec{Background to this output routine}
+
+	I have been using \TeX\ to typeset fanzines\footnote\dag{The
+	word {\it fanzine} comes from science fiction fans' jargon: {\it
+	fan} for amateur (in the sense of unpaid, not necessarily
+	amateurish) + {\it magazine}.  (They call professional magazines
+	{\it prozines}.)  Thus a fanzine (or zine for short) is a small
+	magazine, often produced by photocopying or cheap printing by
+	its editor.  The word {\it zine} rhymes with {\it scene} not
+	{\it sign}, and isn't spelled with an apostrophe (unless you are
+	the sort of person who spells {\it phone}, {\it cello} and {\it
+	bus} with an apostrophe).}  for some years.  Unfortunately, for
+	magazine layouts, the `floating' insertions provided by plain
+	\TeX\ and \LaTeX\ do exactly the wrong thing---in a magazine,
+	the designer wants to lay out the components of the page
+	(illustrations, text, headings) exactly where he or she wants
+	them, whereas the standard \TeX\ formats are designed to let the
+	formatter place components according to its own complex rules.
+	
+	Originally I~tried browbeating \LaTeX\ into doing the zine
+	layouts I~wanted.  I realized eventually that by the time I~had
+	redefined enough of \LaTeX's kernel to get the effects I~wanted
+	I~would more or less have written everything from scratch.  The
+	sort of typesetting I~wanted is so unlike what \LaTeX\ is
+	designed for that \LaTeX\ was getting in the way.
+	
+	Thus I~developed a set of \TeX\ definition files,\footnote\ddag{We
+	can ignore the intermediate stage, which involved writing a
+	`user-friendly' format in the style of \LaTeX\ and Texinfo, with
+	structures very different from plain \TeX's syntax.  In the end
+	I realized that a format that requires disguising or renaming
+	plain \TeX\ constructs makes using and modifying the macros
+	harder, not easier, because the user has to understand the new
+	conventions in addition to plain \TeX\ syntax.} with an output
+	routine that allowed a page to be peppered with inserts with the
+	text flowing in between them (with a more restricted class of
+	inserts than, say, a DTP program, but still flexible enough to
+	be useful).  The output routine also does multi-column text---in
+	this respect it is very similar to the |multicol| package in
+	\LaTeX~2e.  The routine presented here has been rewritten from
+	scratch a few times, each time shedding some cruft as I~have a
+	better understanding of \TeX.
+%}}}   backgorund
+%{{{   layout model
+	
+\subsec{The layout model}
+
+\topinsert
+    \line{\vbox{\advance\hsize-1pc \hsize=0.333\hsize
+		\noindent{\bf Figure 1}\quad Page layout.  This shows a
+		page without the optional extra boxes.  In this example,
+		text columns each span two grid cells.  The left-hand
+		column has an illo (space for an illustration) with caption.
+	}%
+	\epsfxsize=\hsize \advance\epsfxsize-1pc
+	\epsfxsize=0.667\epsfxsize \epsffile{oput01.eps}\hfil
+}
+\medskip\hrule\medskip
+\endinsert
+
+\topinsert
+    \line{\epsfxsize=\hsize \advance\epsfxsize-1pc
+	\epsfxsize=0.667\epsfxsize \epsffile{oput02.eps}\hfil
+	\vbox{\advance\hsize-1pc \hsize=0.333\hsize
+		\noindent{\bf Figure 2}\quad Page layout parameters.  
+		This page has with
+		all the optional boxes (shown with dashed lines).  One text
+		column has a space left for artwork.  Text columns are the same
+		width as grid cells.
+	}}
+\medskip\hrule\medskip
+\endinsert
+
+	The main part of the page (everything except the headline and
+	footline) is called the {\it body}.  The body is divided into a
+	grid of cells.  The cells are conceptually the framework on
+	which page components like text columns and illustrations are
+	hung.  For example, text columns may span two cells.  Figure~1
+	shows a simple layout.  Fitting on the grid usually means the
+	width of the object is $N\times gridwd + (N-1)\times colsep$ and
+	its left edge is $K\times(gridwd + colsep)$ from the left edge
+	of the page body.  
+
+	The aim of using a grid layout is to combine flexibility with
+	enough structure that the result is not a chaotic mess.  The
+	example grid is 5~cells wide, so that text columns can probably
+	be 2 or 3 cells wide without being too narrow or too wide.
+	Illustrations may be anything from 1 to 5 cells wide, or may
+	bleed off the page.
+
+	
+
+	
+%}}}   layout model
+%}}}  introduction
+%{{{  identification
+\section{File identification}
+
+	Macro files nowadays tend to start with a whole slew of header
+	comments designed to be useful to people comign across the file
+	in some archive and unaware of what it is for.
+
+\code
+	\|\% \filename~\fileversion~\filedate~-- output routine for zines
+	|
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	|%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+	|%%% abstract       = "TeX output routine for magazine-style layout.
+	|%%%                   This file was generated by running
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~plain TeX on \jobname.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+	|%%% dependencies   = "",
+	|%%% }
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~<pdc \filedate>\}
+	|
+\endcode
+%}}}  identification
+%{{{  internals
+\section{Miscellaneous internal definitions}
+\subsec{Scratch registers}
+	
+	These are one-token names for some handy non-global temporary
+	registers (in plain \TeX\ these are given names with |@| in
+	them; these definitions give them names I can use).
+\code
+	|\countdef\counta=255
+	|\dimendef\dimena=0 \dimendef\dimenb=2
+	|\toksdef\toksa=0 \toksdef\toksb=2
+\endcode
+	I~don't use |\dimen1| and |\toks1| because they are supposed to
+	be used only globally (as discussed in {\it\TeX book}
+	Appendix~B).
+
+\subsec{Queues}
+
+	These macros manipulate queues of instructions for the ouytput
+	routine, represented as list macros of a form similar to those
+	described in {\it\TeX book} Appendix~D Section~2 (the parameters
+	in different order).
+
+\notepar
+	All of these work by making assignments and so will not work in
+	\TeX's mouth.
+\endnotepar
+
+	We can describe these briefly using letters like $x$ to stand
+	for elements (enclosed in braces) and $xs$ to stand for a list
+	macro of $x$s.  Each macr has a duplicate starting with `|g|-'
+	which does the same operation globally.
+
+%	|\prepend| $xs$ $x$ --- $xs:=\langle x\rangle + xs$
+%\code
+%	|\long\def\prepend#1#2{%
+%	|    \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}%
+%	|    \edef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}%
+%	|}
+%\smallbreak
+%	|\long\def\gprepend#1#2{%
+%	|    \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}%
+%	|    \xdef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}%
+%	|}
+%\endcode
+	|\qappend| $xs$ $x$ --- $xs:= xs + \langle x\rangle $
+\code
+	|\long\def\qappend#1#2{%
+	|    \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}%
+	|    \xdef#1{\the\toksb\the\toksa}%
+	|}
+\endcode
+%	|\catenate| $xs$ $ys$ $zs$ --- $xs:=ys + zs$
+%\code
+%	|\def\catenate#1#2#3{%
+%	|    \toksa=\expandafter{#2}\toksb=\expandafter{#3}%
+%	|    \edef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}%
+%	|}
+%\smallbreak
+%	|\def\gcatenate#1#2#3{%
+%	|    \toksa=\expandafter{#2}\toksb=\expandafter{#3}%
+%	|    \xdef#1{\the\toksa\the\toksb}%
+%	|}
+%\endcode
+	|\qremove| $x$ $xs$ --- $x, xs := hd(xs), tl(xs)$
+	(where $xs = \langle hd(xs)\rangle + tl(xs)$)
+\code
+	|\def\qremove#1#2{%
+	|    \expandafter\glopoff#2\glopoff#1#2%
+	|}
+	|\long\def\glopoff\\#1#2\glopoff#3#4{%
+	|    \gdef#3{#1}\gdef#4{#2}%
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  internals
+%{{{  parameters
+\section{Parameters}
+
+	We collect here definitions for parameters that customizate the
+	layout.  In documents, many of these are set in using
+	higher-level macros.
+
+	The abbreviations |mg| (margin), |wd| (width) and |ht| (height)
+	are used a lot in dimen names.
+
+\subsec{Heights and depths}
+	The physical size of the paper is $paperwd\times paperwd$.  The
+	area which will be filled with text columns is $bodywd\times
+	bodyht$.  This area is divided in to a grid of cells each
+	$gridwd\times gridht$, with cells separated by $colsep$
+	horizontally but butting vertically (there are $n$ cells, so
+	$n\times gridwd + (n-1)\times colsep = bodywd$).  Finally,
+	$colwd$ is the width of text columns ($colwd = k\times gridwd +
+	(k-1)\times colsep$) and $colht$ is the height of text columns
+	on the current page (it is equal to $bodyht$ iff therte is no
+	topbox or botbox).
+\code
+	|\newdimen\paperwd \newdimen\paperht
+	|\newdimen\bodywd \newdimen\bodyht
+	|\newdimen\gridwd \newdimen\gridht
+	|\newdimen\colwd \newdimen\colht
+\endcode
+
+
+\subsec{Margins and separators}
+	These margins measure from the edge of the paper as defined by
+	|\paperwd| and |\paperht|.  The inner margin (|\innermg|) is on
+	the left on odd pages and on the right for even pages.
+
+	The bottom margin will be increased slightly later on to make
+	$$vsize=N\times baselineskip + topskip\quad.$$
+	
+\code
+	|\newdimen\topmg    \topmg=20mm
+	|\newdimen\outermg  \outermg=20mm
+	|\newdimen\innermg  \innermg=20mm
+	|\newdimen\botmg    \botmg=27mm
+\endcode
+
+	Parameters for the distance between the baselines of the
+	headline and the first line of text the corresponding distance
+	for footlines.
+\code
+	|\newskip\headlineskip  \headlineskip=10mm 
+	|\newskip\footlineskip  \footlineskip=10mm
+\endcode
+
+
+	The parameters |\caprule| and |\capsep| specify the separation
+	between captions and the adjacent text column.  The vertical
+	displacement is $capsep$, with a horizontal rule of thickness
+	$caprule$ is drawn in the middle (set this to $0\pt$ to have no
+	rule).
+
+\code
+	|\newdimen\caprule  \caprule=0.4pt
+	|\newskip\capsep    \capsep=5mm
+\endcode
+
+	The corresponding parameters for column separators---this time
+	it is a vertical rule.
+\code
+	|\newdimen\colrule  \colrule=0.4pt
+	|\newdimen\colsep   \colsep=5mm
+\endcode
+
+	The number of text columns on a page.  
+\code
+	|\newcount\ncols \ncols=1
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Boxes}
+	To switch the number of columns in mid page, the first text is
+	run through the output routine and the resultant partial page is
+	stored in |\partialpage| to be placed at the top of the next
+	output.
+
+\code
+	|\newbox\partialpage  
+\endcode
+
+	The special boxes |\topbox| and |\botbox|, if non-void, are
+	placed at the top and bottom of the page, going inside the
+	headline and footline but outside the body text area (which is
+	reduced correspondingly).  These are often useful in
+	multi-column text to put titles that span the page.
+\code
+	|\newbox\topbox \newbox\botbox
+\endcode
+
+	These boxes, if not void, go at the left and right of the body
+	text.  The amount of space for columns of text is reduced by the
+	width of the boxes.
+\code
+	|\newbox\leftbox \newbox\rightbox
+\endcode
+
+	The output routine is passed the current page contents in
+	box~255.
+\code
+	|\chardef\pagebox=255
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Hooks}
+
+	These two list macros are used to override the output routine
+	with customized layouts.
+
+	One item is removed from |\pagelist| to generate each page body
+	(the page body is everything except the headline, footline,
+	topbox, botbox amd partial page).  If the list is empty, then
+	the default action is `|\makebody\pagebox|'.  The commands
+	should make a box with width |\bodywd|m and heght |\colht|.
+\code
+	|\let\pagelist\empty
+\endcode
+	An item is removed from |\collist| each time a column is to be
+	created by |\makebody|.  Each item should be \TeX\ commands that
+	generate a box with width |\colwd| and height |\colht|.
+\code
+	|\let\collist\empty
+\endcode
+
+	Finally, token registers that may be used to customize pages and
+	captions.  For example, |\everypage| is used in |pdccmdoc.tex|
+	to create an empty |\leftbox| on each page.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\everypage
+	|\newtoks\everycaption
+\endcode
+%}}}  parameters
+%{{{  make a column (vbox)
+\section{How to make one column}
+
+	This is the default way to generate a column of text---this will
+	normally be invoked $k$ times if there are $k$ columns.
+
+	A column is a vbox of height $colht$ and width $colwd$.  It
+	contains, in order from top to bottom, an illustration (vertical
+	mode material, normally white space for artwork to be pasted
+	into), caption separator, text (from the page), caption
+	separator, and bottom illustration.  The illustrations are
+	usually omitted.  When there is no illustration, the caption
+	separators are omitted too.
+ 	The macro takes the following parameters:
+$$\halign{\indent\tt\##\hfil&\quad#\hfil&\quad#\hfil\cr
+	1&  vertical mode material& illustration at top of column\cr
+	2&  \<8-bit number>&	box to make middle out of\cr
+	3&  vertical mode material& illustration for bottom of column\cr
+}$$ 
+ 	To make baselines line up, $capsep=baselineskip$ and the height
+	of a top illustration must be $N\times baselineskip + topskip$
+	and of a bottom illustration must be $N\times baselineskip$
+	(|\prevdepth| is set to $0\pt$ at the start of the bottom
+	illustration, so if it starts with a box, baselineskip glue will
+	be inserted to make the baseline of the box align correctly.)
+\code
+	|\newdimen\toptotal \newdimen\bottotal
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\xxxmakecolumn#1#2#3#4#5{\xmakecolumn
+	|    {\ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi
+	|     \def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi}
+	|    {#3}
+	|    {\def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi
+	|     \ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi}%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\xmakecolumn#1#2#3{%
+	|    \vbox to \colht{
+\endcode
+	Calculate in |\dimena| how much of the text box will be needed
+	once we have allowed for any illustrations, footnotes or
+	topinserts:
+\code
+	|        \dimena\colht 
+	|        \setbox0=\vbox{#1}\advance\dimena-\ht0
+	|        \ifdim\ht0>0pt 
+	|            \advance\dimena-\capsep 
+	|            \advance\dimena\topskip \advance\dimena-\baselineskip
+	|        \fi
+	|        \setbox4=\vbox{\prevdepth=0pt #3}%
+	|        \advance\dimena-\ht4
+	|        \ifdim\ht4>0pt \advance\dimena-\capsep \fi
+	|        \ifvoid\footins\else
+	|            \advance\dimena-\ht\footins
+	|            \advance\dimena-\skip\footins
+	|        \fi
+	|        \ifvoid\topins\else
+	|            \advance\dimena-\ht\topins
+	|            \advance\dimena-\skip\topins
+	|        \fi
+\endcode
+	Split that much text off the top of the box:
+\code
+	|        \splittopskip\topskip \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth
+	|        \setbox2=\vsplit#2to\dimena
+\endcode
+	Now to sandwich it all together.  
+\code
+	|        \dimena=\ht0 \dimenb=\dp0 \unvbox0
+	|        \ifdim\dimena>0pt  
+	|            \prevdepth=\dimenb
+	|            \capseparator 
+	|            \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
+	|            \kern\dimena
+	|            \nointerlineskip
+	|        \fi
+	|        \ifvoid\topins\else \unvbox\topins \vskip\skip\topins \fi
+	|        \dimena\dp2	
+	|        \ifvoid2 \vfil \else \unvbox2 \fi
+	|        \ifvoid\footins \else
+	|            \vskip\skip\footins \footnoterule
+	|            \dimena=\dp\footins \unvbox\footins
+	|        \fi
+	|        \ifdim\ht4>0pt 
+	|            \prevdepth=\dimena
+	|            \capseparator \kern-\prevdepth \prevdepth0pt
+	|        \fi
+	|        \unvbox4
+	|    }%
+	|}
+\endcode
+	The caption separator is in an hbox so that 
+	baselineskip glue will be added appropriately.
+\code
+	|\def\capseparator{%
+	|    \hbox to \colwd{%
+	|        \dimena=0.5ex \advance\dimena-0.5\caprule
+	|        \dimenb=\dimena \advance\dimenb\caprule
+	|        \vrule height \dimenb depth-\dimena width\colwd
+	|    }%
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	Here's a macro for making an illustration (blank space) with
+	caption, suitable for top of page.  |#1| is the cation, |#2| is
+	vertical mode material commands to make the illustration (often
+	this will be something like `|\kern|$n$|\baselineskip|' to leave
+	$n$ lines of blank space).  The whitespace between illustration
+	and caption is adjusted to make the whole shebang line up.
+\code
+	|\def\topillustration#1#2{%
+	|    \setbox0=\vbox{#2}%
+	|    \dimena\ht0 \dimenb\dp0 \unvbox0
+	|    \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip
+	|    \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
+	|    \kern-\dimena \prevdepth\dimenb
+	|    \hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \noindent#1\par
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	Similar for bottom of column.
+\code
+	|\def\botillustration#1#2{%
+	|    \setbox0\vbox{\hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \prevdepth=0pt #1}
+	|    \setbox2=\vbox{\prevdepth=\dp0 #2}%
+	|    \dimena=\ht0 \advance\dimena\dp0 \advance\dimena\ht2
+	|    \unvbox0
+	|    \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip 
+	|    \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip 
+	|    \advance\dimena-\baselineskip
+	|    \kern-\dimena
+	|    \unvbox2
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  make a column
+%{{{  make body part of page (hbox)
+\section{Making the page body hbox}
+
+	The page body is everything except the footline, headline,
+	topbox and botbox.  It should be a box of height |\bodywd|
+	(which is normally fixed) and height |\colht| (which is
+	|\bodyht| minus the top and bot boxes).
+
+	The default macro for making the body is |\makebody| which takes
+	as its parameter the box number (usually |\pagebox|).  (This may
+	be replaced by adding items to the list macro |\pagelist|.)
+\code
+	|\def\makebody#1{%
+	|    \hbox to \bodywd{%
+	|        \ifvoid\leftbox\else 
+	|            \box\leftbox 
+	|            \colseparator
+	|        \fi
+	|        \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}%
+	|        \counta\ncols
+	|        \loop \ifnum\counta>1
+	|            \colseparator
+	|            \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}%
+	|            \advance\counta -1
+	|        \repeat
+	|        \ifvoid\rightbox\else 
+	|            \colseparator
+	|            \box\rightbox 
+	|        \fi
+	|    }%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\colseparator{%
+	|    \hfil \vrule width\colrule depth0pt \hfil 
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	The macro |\makecolumnfromcollist| is used to generate columns
+	(which must be boxes of height |\colht| and width |\colwd|).  It
+	uses the next item on |\collist| if there is one, otherwise it
+	just uses |\xmakecolumn|.
+\code
+	|\def\makecolumnfromcollist#1{%
+	|    \ifx\collist\empty
+	|        \xmakecolumn{}{#1}{}%
+	|    \else
+	|        \qremove\temp\collist
+	|        \temp
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+	|
+\endcode
+%}}}  make insides of page (hbox)
+%{{{  make a page (vbox)
+\section{Making a page vbox}
+
+	The macro generates a new page---a vbox to be `shipped out'.
+	The first page includes a |papersize| special; this is because
+	if the macros used to change the paper size also generated the
+	|\special| then there might be conflicting |\special|s which
+	would confuse the printer driver.  This way the paper size may
+	be changed a few times before the first page.
+
+	The |\colht| register is set to the height of text columns on
+	this page (which is $bodyht$ minus the height of any partial
+	page, top or bottom boxes).
+\code
+	|\def\makepage{%
+	|    \vbox{
+	|        \papersizespecial
+	|        \colht\bodyht \advance\colht-\ht\partialpage
+	|        \advance\colht-\ht\topbox \advance\colht-\ht\botbox
+	|        \advance\colht-\dp\partialpage
+	|        \advance\colht-\dp\topbox
+	|        \the\everypage
+	|        \makeheadline \nointerlineskip
+	|        \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip
+	|        \box\topbox \nointerlineskip
+	|        \ifx\pagelist\empty
+	|            \makebody\pagebox
+	|        \else
+	|            \qremove\temp\pagelist 
+	|            \temp
+	|        \fi
+	|        \unvbox\botbox
+	|        \makefootline
+	|    }%
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	The |\makeheadline| macro generates the headline in the form of
+	vertical mode material with zero height.  It is expanded after
+	|\everypage| has been expanded, at the very top of the page's
+	vbox.
+\code
+	|\def\makeheadline{
+	|    \vbox to 0pt {
+	|        \skip0=\topskip \advance\skip0-2\ht\strutbox 
+	|        \advance\skip0-\headlineskip
+	|        \vskip\skip0
+	|        \hbox to \bodywd{\the\headline}
+	|        \vss
+	|    }
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	The footline is, naturally, generated with |\makefootline|.
+	This time there is no requirement for it to be zero height.  It
+	is the last thing in the box being shipped out.
+\code
+	|\def\makefootline{{
+	|    \baselineskip=\footlineskip
+	|    \hbox to \bodywd{\the\footline}
+	|}}
+\endcode
+
+	The |papersize| special is specified in the manual for DVIPS.
+	It specifies the physical size of the medium---and so must be
+	multiplied by the current magnification.
+\code
+	|\def\papersizespecial{{%
+	|    \dimena=0.001\paperwd \multiply\dimena\mag
+	|    \dimenb=0.001\paperht \multiply\dimenb\mag
+	|    \special{papersize=\the\dimena,\the\dimenb}%
+	|    \global\let\papersizespecial=\relax
+	|}}
+	|
+\endcode
+%}}}  make a page (vbox)
+%{{{  output
+\section{The output routine}
+
+	The output routine sets |\hoffset| appropiately (subtracting
+	$1{\scriptstyle''}$ to allow for \TeX's peculiar origin point
+	one inch from the top left of the page.
+\code
+	|\def\pdcoutput{%
+	|    \ifodd\pageno \hoffset=\innermg \else \hoffset=\outermg \fi
+	|    \advance\hoffset-1 true in
+	|    \voffset=\topmg
+	|    \advance\voffset-1truein
+	|    \shipout\makepage \advancepageno 
+	|    \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else \dosupereject \fi
+	|    \unvbox\pagebox
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\output={\pdcoutput}
+\endcode
+%}}}  output
+%{{{  automated column setting
+\section{Specifying a grid}
+
+	These macros for setting the paper size ought to be invoked
+	after the base font and baseline skip have been set but before
+	the numebr of columns is chosen.
+
+\subsec{Specifiying the paper size}
+
+	This is a macro that might be used in documents.  It takes two
+	parameters, \<dimen>s for the width and height of the paper.
+\code
+	|\def\setpaper#1#2{%
+	|    \paperwd=#1\relax
+	|    \paperht=#2\relax
+	|    \OPUTcalcbodywdht
+	|    \OPUTcalctopskip
+	|}
+\endcode
+	Calculate the page body width |\bodywd| from the paper size and
+	the size of the margins:
+\code
+	|\def\OPUTcalcbodywdht{
+	|    \bodywd=\paperwd \advance\bodywd-\outermg \advance\bodywd-\innermg
+	|    \bodyht=\paperht \advance\bodyht-\topmg \advance\bodyht-\botmg
+	|    \OPUTcalctopskip
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	To avoid having to write `Aiv' or `afour' for specifying
+	international standard A4 paper, I~use an
+	|\ifcase|.\footnote*{Note for Americans: A4 corresponds to
+	American Letter size, and A3 to Ledger size.}  This macro
+	handles A0 to A5.
+\code
+	|\def\setpaperA#1{
+	|    \ifcase#1
+	|        \setpaper{841mm}{1189mm}\or
+	|        \setpaper{594mm}{841mm}\or	
+	|        \setpaper{420mm}{594mm}\or	
+	|        \setpaper{297mm}{420mm}\or	
+	|        \setpaper{210mm}{297mm}\or	
+	|        \setpaper{148mm}{210mm}	
+	|    \else
+	|        \errmessage{Dunno how big DIN A#1 paper is, sorry.}
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Adjusting the body height and top skip}
+
+	Plain \TeX\ sets |\topskip| to $10\pt$, which means there is a
+	gap between the top of the letters of the top line of text and
+	the top of the pages's vbox (i.e., $vsize$ is measured from the
+	baseline of the last line to a line $topskip$ above the baseline
+	of the first line).  For magazine-style setting, it is more
+	usual to have $topskip$ set to the cap-height of the font
+	(assuming there are no strange tall characters in use).  
+
+	To have an exactly $N$ lines to a page,
+    $$
+	bodyht = (N-1)\times baselineskip + topskip	\quad.
+    $$  
+ 	This macro increases the bottom margin in order to set $bodyht$
+	to such a value.
+\code
+	|\def\OPUTcalctopskip{
+	|    \setbox0=\hbox{AXbl()!gyJQ,}
+	|    \topskip=\ht0 \maxdepth=\dp0
+	|    \advance\bodyht-\topskip \divide\bodyht\baselineskip
+	|    \multiply\bodyht\baselineskip \advance\bodyht\topskip
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	Give this value for $bodyht$, we can set $hsize$ and $vsize$
+	according to the number of columns to a page.  For $N$ lines to
+	a column, we need $N\times ncols$ lines to make a whole page, so
+    $$
+	\eqalign{vsize 
+		&= (ncols \times N - 1) \times baselineskip + topskip\cr
+		&= (bodyht + \delta) \times ncols - \delta\cr
+	}
+    $$
+ 	where $\delta=baselineskip-topskip$.
+\code
+	|\def\OPUTcalchsizevsize{
+	|    \hsize=\colwd
+	|    \vsize=\bodyht 
+	|    \advance\vsize-\topskip \advance\vsize\baselineskip 
+	|    \multiply\vsize\ncols 
+	|    \advance\vsize-\baselineskip \advance\vsize\topskip
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+
+\subsec{Setting the number of columns}
+
+	Now some macros used in documents for setting the number of
+	coumns.  In the general case we have a grid of $n$ cells with
+	text columnns spanning $k$ cells.  This macro takes two number
+	parameters, $n$ and $k$.  It sets |\ncols| to as many columns
+	fit on the page.
+    $$
+	\eqalign{colwd &= k \times gridwd + (k - 1) \times colsep\cr
+	ncols &= \lfloor n \mathbin/ k \rfloor\cr}
+    $$ 
+ 	Often $n$ is not a multiple of $k$, which leaves some grid cells
+	`spare' for illustrations or extra margins and so on.
+\code
+	|\def\setnkgrid#1#2{%
+	|    \gridwd=\bodywd 
+	|    \advance\gridwd-#1\colsep \advance\gridwd\colsep \divide\gridwd#1
+	|    \colwd#2\gridwd \advance\colwd#2\colsep \advance\colwd-\colsep
+	|    \ncols#1 \divide\ncols#2
+	|    \gridht=\baselineskip
+	|    \capsep=\gridht
+	|    \OPUTcalchsizevsize
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	For simpler layouts, we just set the number of columns and set
+	the grid and column widths to be the same.
+\code
+	|\def\setncolumns#1{%
+	|    \colwd=\bodywd
+	|    \advance\colwd-#1\colsep \advance\colwd\colsep \divide\colwd #1
+	|    \gridwd=\colwd
+	|    \ncols=#1
+	|    \OPUTcalchsizevsize
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Setting default values}
+
+	We give all the parameters default values by assuming A4 paper
+	and a single-column layout in \TeX's default fonts.
+\code
+	|\setpaperA4
+	|\setncolumns1
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  automated column setting
+%{{{  balancing columns
+\section{Routines for balanced columns}
+
+\subsec{Balanced columns from a rigid vbox}
+
+	This is the routine discussed in {\it\TeX book}, Appendix~D,
+	Section~7 (pp.\thinspace396--397).  It takes a rigid, regular
+	vbox (rigid meaning there is no stretchable glue between lines,
+	and regular meaning that baselines are all the same distance
+	apart).  Its parameters are
+    $$\centerline{\vbox{\halign{\tt\char`\##\hfil&&\quad#\hfil\cr
+	1&\<8-bit number>&	box to chop\cr
+	2&\<number>&		how many columns to make (${}>0$)\cr
+	3&\<dimen>&		the value of \cs{topskip} for the box\cr
+	4&tokens&		what to put between columns\cr
+    }}}$$
+ 	the last parameter will usually be |\hfil| or |\colseparator|.
+	Usually this command will be used like
+$$\hbox{|\hbox to \bodywd{\rigidbalance...}|}$$
+	
+
+\code
+	|\newcount\RGDncols
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\rigidbalance#1#2#3#4{%
+	|    \setbox0=\box#1\relax \RGDncols=#2\relax \toksa={#4}%
+	|    \begingroup\splittopskip#3\relax \vbadness=10000 
+	|        \valign{##\vfil\cr \RGDdosplits}%
+	|    \endgroup
+	|}
+\endcode
+	The helper function that produces the insides of the valign is
+	recursive.
+\code
+	|\def\RGDdosplits{
+	|    \dimena\ht0 \divide\dimena\RGDncols 
+	|    \advance\dimena\splittopskip
+	|    \setbox1=\vsplit0 to\dimena
+	|    \unvbox1
+	|    \global\advance\RGDncols-1
+	|    \cr
+	|    \ifnum\RGDncols>0 
+	|        \noalign{\the\toksa}
+	|        \RGDdosplits
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Balance partial page}
+
+	Occasionally it is useful to switch between different grids or
+	numbers of columns within one page.  This macro does this,
+	creating a shorter-than-usual page body (including topbox and
+	botbox) and then putting the result in |\partialpage| Its
+	parameters are |#1| the \TeX\ code used to generate the text
+	columns and |#2| what to put between the partial page and the
+	rest of the page.
+
+\code
+	|\def\makepartialpage#1#2{
+	|    \maybepagebreak
+	|    \begingroup
+	|        \output{%
+	|            \message{[partial}
+	|            \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox\pagebox}%
+	|            \global\setbox\partialpage\vbox{
+	|                \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip
+	|                \the\everypage
+	|                \box\topbox \nointerlineskip
+	|                \hbox to \bodywd{%
+	|                    \ifvoid\leftbox\else 
+	|                        \box\leftbox \colseparator 
+	|                    \fi
+	|                    #1%
+	|                    \ifvoid\rightbox\else 
+	|                        \colseparator \box\rightbox 
+	|                    \fi
+	|                }% \nointerlineskip
+	|                \box\botbox
+	|                #2
+	|                \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
+	|                \kern\dimena
+	|            }%
+	|            \message{page]}
+	|        }
+	|        \eject
+	|    \endgroup
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\rigidbalancepartialpage{
+	|    \makepartialpage{\rigidbalance0\ncols\topskip\colseparator}
+	|}
+\endcode
+	Occasionally \TeX\ might have just over a pageful of text when
+	this command is used (since the page break calculations do not
+	take into account the space subtracted by
+	illustrations\footnote*{This is probably a bug.}). In this case
+	we have to force out a complete page.
+\code
+	|\def\maybepagebreak{%
+	|    \vskip0pt plus\baselineskip \penalty-100
+	|    \loop 
+	|        \dimena\vsize \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\partialpage
+	|        \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\topbox
+	|        \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\botbox
+	|    \ifdim\pagetotal>\dimena
+	|        \eject\null
+	|    \repeat
+	|}
+\endcode
+%}}}  balancing columns
+\endcodefile 
+\enddocument 
+\bye
+%}}} pdcoput5.tex
+
+%Local variables:
+%fold-folded-p: t
+%fill-prefix: "	"
+%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..30828ac9358
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,336 @@
+% pdcoput5.dtx 5.3 1995/04/06 -- output routine for zines
+
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "$texmf/tex/plain/pdcmac/pdcoput5.tex",
+%%% version        = "5.3",
+%%% date           = "1995/04/06",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, macros",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%% abstract       = "TeX output routine for magazine-style layout.
+%%%                   This file was generated by running
+%%%                   plain TeX on pdcoput5.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcoput5.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "",
+%%% }
+
+\message{5.3 <pdc 1995/04/06>}
+
+\countdef\counta=255
+\dimendef\dimena=0 \dimendef\dimenb=2
+\toksdef\toksa=0 \toksdef\toksb=2
+\long\def\qappend#1#2{%
+    \toksa={\\{#2}}\toksb=\expandafter{#1}%
+    \xdef#1{\the\toksb\the\toksa}%
+}
+\def\qremove#1#2{%
+    \expandafter\glopoff#2\glopoff#1#2%
+}
+\long\def\glopoff\\#1#2\glopoff#3#4{%
+    \gdef#3{#1}\gdef#4{#2}%
+}
+\newdimen\paperwd \newdimen\paperht
+\newdimen\bodywd \newdimen\bodyht
+\newdimen\gridwd \newdimen\gridht
+\newdimen\colwd \newdimen\colht
+\newdimen\topmg    \topmg=20mm
+\newdimen\outermg  \outermg=20mm
+\newdimen\innermg  \innermg=20mm
+\newdimen\botmg    \botmg=27mm
+\newskip\headlineskip  \headlineskip=10mm
+\newskip\footlineskip  \footlineskip=10mm
+\newdimen\caprule  \caprule=0.4pt
+\newskip\capsep    \capsep=5mm
+\newdimen\colrule  \colrule=0.4pt
+\newdimen\colsep   \colsep=5mm
+\newcount\ncols \ncols=1
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newbox\topbox \newbox\botbox
+\newbox\leftbox \newbox\rightbox
+\chardef\pagebox=255
+\let\pagelist\empty
+\let\collist\empty
+\newtoks\everypage
+\newtoks\everycaption
+\newdimen\toptotal \newdimen\bottotal
+\def\xxxmakecolumn#1#2#3#4#5{\xmakecolumn
+    {\ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi
+     \def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi}
+    {#3}
+    {\def\tmp{#2}\ifx\tmp\empty\else #2 \fi
+     \ifdim#1=0pt\else \kern#1 \fi}%
+}
+\def\xmakecolumn#1#2#3{%
+    \vbox to \colht{
+        \dimena\colht
+        \setbox0=\vbox{#1}\advance\dimena-\ht0
+        \ifdim\ht0>0pt
+            \advance\dimena-\capsep
+            \advance\dimena\topskip \advance\dimena-\baselineskip
+        \fi
+        \setbox4=\vbox{\prevdepth=0pt #3}%
+        \advance\dimena-\ht4
+        \ifdim\ht4>0pt \advance\dimena-\capsep \fi
+        \ifvoid\footins\else
+            \advance\dimena-\ht\footins
+            \advance\dimena-\skip\footins
+        \fi
+        \ifvoid\topins\else
+            \advance\dimena-\ht\topins
+            \advance\dimena-\skip\topins
+        \fi
+        \splittopskip\topskip \splitmaxdepth\maxdepth
+        \setbox2=\vsplit#2to\dimena
+        \dimena=\ht0 \dimenb=\dp0 \unvbox0
+        \ifdim\dimena>0pt
+            \prevdepth=\dimenb
+            \capseparator
+            \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
+            \kern\dimena
+            \nointerlineskip
+        \fi
+        \ifvoid\topins\else \unvbox\topins \vskip\skip\topins \fi
+        \dimena\dp2
+        \ifvoid2 \vfil \else \unvbox2 \fi
+        \ifvoid\footins \else
+            \vskip\skip\footins \footnoterule
+            \dimena=\dp\footins \unvbox\footins
+        \fi
+        \ifdim\ht4>0pt
+            \prevdepth=\dimena
+            \capseparator \kern-\prevdepth \prevdepth0pt
+        \fi
+        \unvbox4
+    }%
+}
+\def\capseparator{%
+    \hbox to \colwd{%
+        \dimena=0.5ex \advance\dimena-0.5\caprule
+        \dimenb=\dimena \advance\dimenb\caprule
+        \vrule height \dimenb depth-\dimena width\colwd
+    }%
+}
+\def\topillustration#1#2{%
+    \setbox0=\vbox{#2}%
+    \dimena\ht0 \dimenb\dp0 \unvbox0
+    \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip
+    \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
+    \kern-\dimena \prevdepth\dimenb
+    \hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \noindent#1\par
+}
+\def\botillustration#1#2{%
+    \setbox0\vbox{\hsize=\colwd \vskip-\parskip \prevdepth=0pt #1}
+    \setbox2=\vbox{\prevdepth=\dp0 #2}%
+    \dimena=\ht0 \advance\dimena\dp0 \advance\dimena\ht2
+    \unvbox0
+    \counta\dimena \divide\counta\baselineskip
+    \advance\dimena-\counta\baselineskip
+    \advance\dimena-\baselineskip
+    \kern-\dimena
+    \unvbox2
+}
+\def\makebody#1{%
+    \hbox to \bodywd{%
+        \ifvoid\leftbox\else
+            \box\leftbox
+            \colseparator
+        \fi
+        \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}%
+        \counta\ncols
+        \loop \ifnum\counta>1
+            \colseparator
+            \makecolumnfromcollist{#1}%
+            \advance\counta -1
+        \repeat
+        \ifvoid\rightbox\else
+            \colseparator
+            \box\rightbox
+        \fi
+    }%
+}
+\def\colseparator{%
+    \hfil \vrule width\colrule depth0pt \hfil
+}
+\def\makecolumnfromcollist#1{%
+    \ifx\collist\empty
+        \xmakecolumn{}{#1}{}%
+    \else
+        \qremove\temp\collist
+        \temp
+    \fi
+}
+
+\def\makepage{%
+    \vbox{
+        \papersizespecial
+        \colht\bodyht \advance\colht-\ht\partialpage
+        \advance\colht-\ht\topbox \advance\colht-\ht\botbox
+        \advance\colht-\dp\partialpage
+        \advance\colht-\dp\topbox
+        \the\everypage
+        \makeheadline \nointerlineskip
+        \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip
+        \box\topbox \nointerlineskip
+        \ifx\pagelist\empty
+            \makebody\pagebox
+        \else
+            \qremove\temp\pagelist
+            \temp
+        \fi
+        \unvbox\botbox
+        \makefootline
+    }%
+}
+\def\makeheadline{
+    \vbox to 0pt {
+        \skip0=\topskip \advance\skip0-2\ht\strutbox
+        \advance\skip0-\headlineskip
+        \vskip\skip0
+        \hbox to \bodywd{\the\headline}
+        \vss
+    }
+}
+\def\makefootline{{
+    \baselineskip=\footlineskip
+    \hbox to \bodywd{\the\footline}
+}}
+\def\papersizespecial{{%
+    \dimena=0.001\paperwd \multiply\dimena\mag
+    \dimenb=0.001\paperht \multiply\dimenb\mag
+    \special{papersize=\the\dimena,\the\dimenb}%
+    \global\let\papersizespecial=\relax
+}}
+
+\def\pdcoutput{%
+    \ifodd\pageno \hoffset=\innermg \else \hoffset=\outermg \fi
+    \advance\hoffset-1 true in
+    \voffset=\topmg
+    \advance\voffset-1truein
+    \shipout\makepage \advancepageno
+    \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else \dosupereject \fi
+    \unvbox\pagebox
+}
+\output={\pdcoutput}
+\def\setpaper#1#2{%
+    \paperwd=#1\relax
+    \paperht=#2\relax
+    \OPUTcalcbodywdht
+    \OPUTcalctopskip
+}
+\def\OPUTcalcbodywdht{
+    \bodywd=\paperwd \advance\bodywd-\outermg \advance\bodywd-\innermg
+    \bodyht=\paperht \advance\bodyht-\topmg \advance\bodyht-\botmg
+    \OPUTcalctopskip
+}
+\def\setpaperA#1{
+    \ifcase#1
+        \setpaper{841mm}{1189mm}\or
+        \setpaper{594mm}{841mm}\or
+        \setpaper{420mm}{594mm}\or
+        \setpaper{297mm}{420mm}\or
+        \setpaper{210mm}{297mm}\or
+        \setpaper{148mm}{210mm}
+    \else
+        \errmessage{Dunno how big DIN A#1 paper is, sorry.}
+    \fi
+}
+\def\OPUTcalctopskip{
+    \setbox0=\hbox{AXbl()!gyJQ,}
+    \topskip=\ht0 \maxdepth=\dp0
+    \advance\bodyht-\topskip \divide\bodyht\baselineskip
+    \multiply\bodyht\baselineskip \advance\bodyht\topskip
+}
+\def\OPUTcalchsizevsize{
+    \hsize=\colwd
+    \vsize=\bodyht
+    \advance\vsize-\topskip \advance\vsize\baselineskip
+    \multiply\vsize\ncols
+    \advance\vsize-\baselineskip \advance\vsize\topskip
+}
+\def\setnkgrid#1#2{%
+    \gridwd=\bodywd
+    \advance\gridwd-#1\colsep \advance\gridwd\colsep \divide\gridwd#1
+    \colwd#2\gridwd \advance\colwd#2\colsep \advance\colwd-\colsep
+    \ncols#1 \divide\ncols#2
+    \gridht=\baselineskip
+    \capsep=\gridht
+    \OPUTcalchsizevsize
+}
+\def\setncolumns#1{%
+    \colwd=\bodywd
+    \advance\colwd-#1\colsep \advance\colwd\colsep \divide\colwd #1
+    \gridwd=\colwd
+    \ncols=#1
+    \OPUTcalchsizevsize
+}
+\setpaperA4
+\setncolumns1
+\newcount\RGDncols
+\def\rigidbalance#1#2#3#4{%
+    \setbox0=\box#1\relax \RGDncols=#2\relax \toksa={#4}%
+    \begingroup\splittopskip#3\relax \vbadness=10000
+        \valign{##\vfil\cr \RGDdosplits}%
+    \endgroup
+}
+\def\RGDdosplits{
+    \dimena\ht0 \divide\dimena\RGDncols
+    \advance\dimena\splittopskip
+    \setbox1=\vsplit0 to\dimena
+    \unvbox1
+    \global\advance\RGDncols-1
+    \cr
+    \ifnum\RGDncols>0
+        \noalign{\the\toksa}
+        \RGDdosplits
+    \fi
+}
+\def\makepartialpage#1#2{
+    \maybepagebreak
+    \begingroup
+        \output{%
+            \message{[partial}
+            \setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox\pagebox}%
+            \global\setbox\partialpage\vbox{
+                \box\partialpage \nointerlineskip
+                \the\everypage
+                \box\topbox \nointerlineskip
+                \hbox to \bodywd{%
+                    \ifvoid\leftbox\else
+                        \box\leftbox \colseparator
+                    \fi
+                    #1%
+                    \ifvoid\rightbox\else
+                        \colseparator \box\rightbox
+                    \fi
+                }% \nointerlineskip
+                \box\botbox
+                #2
+                \dimena\baselineskip \advance\dimena-\topskip
+                \kern\dimena
+            }%
+            \message{page]}
+        }
+        \eject
+    \endgroup
+}
+\def\rigidbalancepartialpage{
+    \makepartialpage{\rigidbalance0\ncols\topskip\colseparator}
+}
+\def\maybepagebreak{%
+    \vskip0pt plus\baselineskip \penalty-100
+    \loop
+        \dimena\vsize \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\partialpage
+        \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\topbox
+        \advance\dimena-\ncols\ht\botbox
+    \ifdim\pagetotal>\dimena
+        \eject\null
+    \repeat
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..59d64508a5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpsdoc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+% pdcpsdoc.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "pdcpsdoc.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.2",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%%                   This macro file was generated by running plain
+%%%                   TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "pdcadobe.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
+%%%                   pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
+%%%                   pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def",
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\input pdcimth
+\input pdcmigr
+\input pdcfmt2
+\input pdchyex
+\input pdcoput5
+\input pdcfsel
+\input pdcadobe
+\autoloadfonts
+\def\KBcanonical#1{%
+    \expcs\ifx{KB#1}\relax #1\else\csname KB#1\endcsname \fi
+}
+\ifx\KBadobe\UNDEFINED \def\KBadobe#1{\KBcanonical{#10}} \fi
+\def\KBit#1{\KBcanonical{#1i}}
+\def\KBbi#1{\KBbf{#1i}}
+\def\KBbf#1{\expandafter\KBbfx#1.}
+\def\KBbfx#1#2#3#4#5.{\KBcanonical{#1#2#3b#5}}
+\def\KBpagbr{pagdr}        \def\KBpagbri{pagdro}
+\def\KBpbkbr{pbkdr}        \def\KBpbkbri{pbkdri}
+\def\KBpagri{pagro}        \def\KBpagbi{pagbo}
+\def\KBphvri{phvro}        \def\KBphvbi{phvbo}
+\def\KBpcrri{pcrro}        \def\KBpcrbi{pcrbo}
+\def\KBphvrrni{phvron}     \def\KBphvbrni{phvbon}
+\def\KBphvrrn0{phvr0n}     \def\KBphvbrn0{phvb0n}
+\def\KBphvrrni0{phvro0n}   \def\KBphvbrni0{phvbo0n}
+\ifx\headingfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingfontname{phvr} \fi
+\ifx\headingttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingttfontname{pcrb} \fi
+\def\STYheadingT{%
+    \@\f{rm}{\headingfontname}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
+    \@\f{asy}{psyr}%
+    \@\f{it}{\KBit\headingfontname}%
+    \@\f{tt}{\headingttfontname}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+}
+\loadfont\bodysy{cmsy10 at 12pt}
+\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\ifx\bodyfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyfontname{ptmr} \fi
+\ifx\bodyttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyttfontname{pcrr} \fi
+\def\STYbodyT{%
+    \@\m{rm}{\bodyfontname}\@\m{it}{\KBit\bodyfontname}%
+    \@\m{bf}{\KBbf\bodyfontname}\@\f{bi}{\KBbi\bodyfontname}%
+    \@\m{asy}{psyr}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+    \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+    \@\f{tt}{\bodyttfontname}\@\f{tb}{\KBit\bodyttfontname}%
+}
+\let\sc=\relax  \let\mc=\relax  \let\csc=\relax
+\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
+\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
+\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
+\bodyfonts
+{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
+\input pdcdoc.def
+\inputifexists{pdcpsdoc.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9912b2544fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcpslft.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+% pdcpslft.tex 1.2 1995/03/30 -- macros for short documents
+%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+%%% filename       = "pdcpslft.tex",
+%%% version        = "1.2",
+%%% date           = "1995/03/30",
+%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
+%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+%%%                   This macro file was generated by running plain
+%%%                   TeX on pdcsty.dtx",
+%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+%%%                   Distribute pdcsty.dtx only as part of the
+%%%                   package it came in.",
+%%% dependencies   = "pdcadobe.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
+%%%                   pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
+%%%                   pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def",
+%%%}
+
+\message{1.2 <pdc 1995/03/30>}
+
+\input pdcimth
+\input pdcmigr
+\input pdcfmt2
+\input pdchyex
+\input pdcoput5
+\input pdcfsel
+\input pdcadobe
+\autoloadfonts
+\def\KBcanonical#1{%
+    \expcs\ifx{KB#1}\relax #1\else\csname KB#1\endcsname \fi
+}
+\ifx\KBadobe\UNDEFINED \def\KBadobe#1{\KBcanonical{#10}} \fi
+\def\KBit#1{\KBcanonical{#1i}}
+\def\KBbi#1{\KBbf{#1i}}
+\def\KBbf#1{\expandafter\KBbfx#1.}
+\def\KBbfx#1#2#3#4#5.{\KBcanonical{#1#2#3b#5}}
+\def\KBpagbr{pagdr}        \def\KBpagbri{pagdro}
+\def\KBpbkbr{pbkdr}        \def\KBpbkbri{pbkdri}
+\def\KBpagri{pagro}        \def\KBpagbi{pagbo}
+\def\KBphvri{phvro}        \def\KBphvbi{phvbo}
+\def\KBpcrri{pcrro}        \def\KBpcrbi{pcrbo}
+\def\KBphvrrni{phvron}     \def\KBphvbrni{phvbon}
+\def\KBphvrrn0{phvr0n}     \def\KBphvbrn0{phvb0n}
+\def\KBphvrrni0{phvro0n}   \def\KBphvbrni0{phvbo0n}
+\ifx\headingfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingfontname{phvr} \fi
+\ifx\headingttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingttfontname{pcrb} \fi
+\def\STYheadingT{%
+    \@\f{rm}{\headingfontname}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
+    \@\f{asy}{psyr}%
+    \@\f{it}{\KBit\headingfontname}%
+    \@\f{tt}{\headingttfontname}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+}
+\loadfont\bodysy{cmsy10 at 12pt}
+\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\ifx\bodyfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyfontname{ptmr} \fi
+\ifx\bodyttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyttfontname{pcrr} \fi
+\def\STYbodyT{%
+    \@\m{rm}{\bodyfontname}\@\m{it}{\KBit\bodyfontname}%
+    \@\m{bf}{\KBbf\bodyfontname}\@\f{bi}{\KBbi\bodyfontname}%
+    \@\m{asy}{psyr}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+    \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+    \@\f{tt}{\bodyttfontname}\@\f{tb}{\KBit\bodyttfontname}%
+}
+\let\sc=\relax  \let\mc=\relax  \let\csc=\relax
+\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
+\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
+\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
+\bodyfonts
+{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
+\input pdclft.def
+\inputifexists{pdcpslft.cfg}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..58c5ac76808
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1153 @@
+% pdcsty -- documentation and source code for several style files -*-tex-*-
+
+%%%@TeX-document-file {
+%%% title 	= "Damian's random style files",
+%%% filename 	= "$texmf/doc/plain/pdcmac/pdcsty.dtx",
+%%% version 	= "$Revision: 1.2 $",
+%%% package 	= "pdcmac 1.0",
+%%% date 	= "$Date: 1995/03/30 16:12:17 $",
+%%% author	= "P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% email	= "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+%%% address	= "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,"
+%%%                Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+%%% abstract	= "This document describes and is the source code for 
+%%%                the TeX style files pdccmdoc.tex, ma55doc.tex,
+%%%                etc. and definitioon files pdcdoc1.tex and pdclft1.tex.
+%%%                Running plain TeX on this file produces both the
+%%%                definitions files and the printed documentation.",
+%%% copyright	= "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+%%% copying	= "This program is free software; you can redistribute
+%%%		   it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU
+%%%		   General Public License as published by the Free
+%%%		   Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License,
+%%%		   or (at your option) any later version.",
+%%% notice	= "This program is distributed in the hope that it will
+%%%		   be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the
+%%%		   implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+%%%		   PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public
+%%%		   License for more details.",
+%%% notice	= "You should have received a copy of the GNU General
+%%%		   Public License along with this program; if not, write
+%%%		   to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
+%%%		   Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.",
+%%% codetable	= "USASCII",
+%%% dependencies = "pdccode2.tex"
+%%%}
+	
+
+%{{{ pdcsty.dtx
+%{{{  preamble
+
+\input pdccode2
+\rcs$Id: pdcsty.dtx,v 1.2 1995/03/30 16:12:17 pdc Exp $\endrcs
+
+\everycode{\tt \baselineskip=0.8\baselineskip \lineskiplimit=0pt }
+\newcount\lineno
+\everycodeline{\llap{$ \global\advance\lineno1 
+	\scriptstyle\the\lineno $\enspace}}
+
+
+\codefile{cmX}{pdccmlft.tex} \codefile{cmT}{pdccmdoc.tex} 
+\codefile{maX}{ma55lft.tex} \codefile{maT}{ma55doc.tex}
+\codefile{psX}{pdcpslft.tex} \codefile{psT}{pdcpsdoc.tex}
+\codefile{X}{pdclft.def} \codefile{T}{pdcdoc.def}
+	
+\def\maonly{\global\maXtrue \global\maTtrue 
+    \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse
+    \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse
+    \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse 
+    \banner{Malvern}}
+\def\cmonly{\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse
+    \global\cmXtrue  \global\cmTtrue
+    \global\psXfalse  \global\psTfalse
+    \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
+    \banner{Computer Modern}}
+\def\psonly{\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse
+    \global\cmXfalse  \global\cmTfalse
+    \global\psXtrue  \global\psTtrue
+    \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
+    \banner{PostScript fonts}}
+
+\def\styonly {\global\maXtrue \global\maTtrue
+    \global\cmXtrue \global\cmTtrue
+    \global\psXtrue \global\psTtrue
+    \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
+    \banner{Style files}}
+\def\Tstyonly{\global\maXfalse \global\maTtrue
+    \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTtrue
+    \global\psXfalse \global\psTtrue
+    \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
+    \banner{Doc style files}}
+\def\Xstyonly{\global\maXtrue \global\maTfalse
+    \global\cmXtrue \global\cmTfalse
+    \global\psXtrue \global\psTfalse
+    \global\Xfalse \global\Tfalse
+    \banner{Lft style files}}
+
+\def\Tonly {\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse
+    \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse
+    \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse
+    \global\Xfalse \global\Ttrue
+    \banner{Sectioning macros for Docs}}
+\def\Xonly {\global\maXfalse \global\maTfalse
+    \global\cmXfalse \global\cmTfalse
+    \global\psXfalse \global\psTfalse
+    \global\Xtrue \global\Tfalse
+    \banner{Sectioning macros for Lfts}}
+
+\def\banner#1{
+    \par
+    \line{%
+	\vrule height 1ex width 0.2ex
+	\leaders\vrule height 1ex depth -0.8ex \hskip2em
+	\enspace{\it \strut #1\/}\enspace
+	\leaders\vrule height 1ex depth -0.8ex \hfil
+    }
+}
+
+\def\onlyone#1{
+    \allfilesfalse \global\csname#1true\endcsname
+    \banner{{\tt\csname filename#1\endcsname}}
+}
+\def\onlytwo#1#2{
+    \allfilesfalse \global\csname#1true\endcsname 
+	\global\csname#2true\endcsname
+    \banner{{\tt\csname filename#1\endcsname}, 
+	{\tt\csname filename#2\endcsname}}
+}
+
+\def\common{
+    \par
+    \allfilesfalse \global\Xtrue \global\Ttrue
+    \closebanner
+}
+
+\def\closebanner{
+    \line{%
+	\vrule height 1.8ex depth -0.5ex width 0.2ex
+	\leaders\vrule height 0.7ex depth -0.5ex \hfil
+    }
+}
+
+
+
+%}}}  preamble
+%{{{  introduction
+
+\null\vskip2\baselineskip\hrule\bigskip
+\leftline{Style files for the pdc- macros \fileversion\space(\filedate)}
+\bigskip\hrule\bigskip
+\headline{\hfil\global\headline={\hfil
+	\sevenbf Style files for the pdc- macros 
+	\fileversion\space(\filedate)}} 
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+\subsec{About the style files}
+
+	This document describes a family of plain \TeX\ style files for
+	typesetting documents which are short enough not to need any
+	fancy indexing or cross-references, but long enough to want
+	numbered section headings and a table of contents.
+
+	A {\it style file} in this context means a definitions file that
+	specifies the formatting of for a document: layout, choice of
+	fonts, instructions for how to format lists, and so on.  The
+	style files use the macros defined in other definition files to
+	supply most of the features they need.  The document only needs
+	one `|\input|' command to set up most of the commands it needs.
+
+\subsec{No cross-references}
+
+	Omitting cross-references is important because it means we can
+	avoid having documents that have to be run through \TeX\ more
+	than once (the first time to generate a raw index or
+	cross-reference file, the second to incorporate the references
+	into the document).  This greatly simplifies the macros.
+
+	So that the table of contents may be generated automatically
+	without requiring a second pass, it is printed {\it last\/} in
+	the file.  It follows that the table of contents belongs at the
+	end of the front matter of the document (on pages numbered in
+	roman numerals), immediately before page~1.  It is easiest if
+	all the front matter is printed last.  After the end of the
+	document proper, put the front matter enclosed in |\frontmatter|
+	\dots |\endfrontmatter|; this automatically switches to page
+	numbering in roman numerals, and puts the table of contents at
+	the end.
+
+	The file |pdccmdoc.tex| does documents using the Computer Modern
+	fonts.  There is a variant called |pdccmlft.tex| intended for
+	`leaflets' that are even shorter than the `docs' produced with
+	|pdccmdoc.tex|.  Leaflets have no front matter section, no table
+	of contents, and section headings are much less prominent---they
+	should only be a few pages long at most.  The Malvern versions
+	are called |ma55doc.tex| and |ma55lft.tex|.
+
+\subsec{About this document}
+
+	The file that generates this printed documentation, |pdcsty.dtx|
+	is a `documented \TeX' file.  As well as briefly describing what
+	the macros are for and how they work, it includes a complete
+	listing of their definitions.  The text of the definitions is
+	also written to files in the current directory, generating fresh
+	copies of the style files.  This way this documentation and the
+	files it describes are guaranteed to match.
+
+	The lines of all definitions are numbered continuously, even
+	though only a subset of all the definition lines will go in each
+	file.
+	
+%}}}  introduction
+%{{{  starting up
+
+\section{Starting up}
+
+\subsec{File identification}
+	
+	Nowadays, macro files start with some comments identifying the
+	file, for the benefit of people wondering what the file is for.
+	The macro file otherwise has no other comments, in the hope that
+	this will let \TeX\ read it in faster.  (It should be possible
+	for the identification comments to go {\it after} an |\endinput|
+	at the close of the file, but the convention is to have them at
+	the start.)
+
+	The following segment is common to the style files and the
+	definiton files.
+
+\code
+	\|\% \filename~\fileversion~\filedate~-- macros for short documents
+\smallbreak
+	|%%%@TeX-definition-file {
+	\|\%\%\% filename~~~~~~~= "\filename",
+	\|\%\%\% version~~~~~~~~= "\fileversion",
+	\|\%\%\% date~~~~~~~~~~~= "\filedate",
+	|%%% package        = "pdcmac 1.0",
+	|%%% author         = "P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% email          = "damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk",
+	|%%% address        = "Oxford University Computing Laboratory,
+	|%%%                   Parks Road, Oxford  OX1 3QD, UK",
+	|%%% codetable      = "USASCII",
+	|%%% keywords       = "TeX, plain TeX, style file",
+	|%%% supported      = "Maybe",
+\cmonly	|%%% abstract       = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
+	|%%%                   Computer Modern fonts.  
+\maonly	|%%% abstract       = "Top-level macro file for documents set in
+	|%%%                   Malvern 55, 56 and 75 fonts.  
+\onlytwo{X}{T}
+	|%%% abstract       = "Sectioning macros for style files.
+\allfilestrue\closebanner
+	|%%%                   This macro file was generated by running plain
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~TeX on \jobname.dtx",
+	|%%% copyright      = "Copyright (c) 1991-1995 P. Damian Cugley",
+	|%%% copying        = "DO NOT DISTRIBUTE THIS FILE.
+	\|\%\%\%~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Distribute \jobname.dtx only as part of the
+	|%%%                   package it came in.",
+\onlytwo{X}{T}
+	|%%% dependencies   = ""
+\cmonly	|%%% dependencies   = "pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex, pdchyex.tex,
+	|%%%                   pdcimth.tex, pdccmsub.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
+\maonly	|%%% dependencies   = "maamac.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
+	|%%%                   pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
+\psonly	|%%% dependencies   = "pdcadobe.tex, pdcfmt2.tex, pdcfsel.tex,
+	|%%%                   pdchyex.tex, pdcimth.tex, pdcmigr.tex,
+\Tstyonly
+	|%%%                   pdcoput5.tex, pdcdoc.def",
+\Xstyonly
+	|%%%                   pdcoput5.tex, pdclft.def",
+\allfilestrue\closebanner
+	|%%%}
+	|
+	\|\\message\{\fileversion~<\fileauthor~\filedate>\}
+	|
+\endcode
+
+	This is followed immediately by a list of the macro files
+	included by this format:
+\code
+\styonly
+	|\input pdcimth
+	|\input pdcmigr
+	|\input pdcfmt2
+	|\input pdchyex
+	|\input pdcoput5
+	|\input pdcfsel
+\cmonly
+	|\input pdccmsub
+\maonly
+	|\input maamac
+\psonly
+	|\input pdcadobe
+\common
+\endcode
+
+
+%}}}  starting up
+%{{{  layout
+	
+\section{Layout}
+
+\subsec{Paper sizes}
+
+	The section defining the paper size is at the very top of the
+	file to make it easy for someone adapting the macros to American
+	Letter size paper to find them.
+
+	Nevertheless, we set the top and bottom margins to be large
+	enough that even if it is printed on American paper, nothing
+	important will be cut off.  This requires decent-sized margins
+	at the top and bottom of pages (since the end of the page that
+	will be lost depends on whether the printer driver has its real
+	origin at top-left or bottom-left).  The edge of the printing
+	area is guessed at as being $7\,{\rm mm}$ from the edge of the
+	paper.
+\code
+	|\topmg=297mm \advance\topmg-11in \advance\topmg7mm
+	|\botmg=\topmg
+	|\advance\topmg\ht\strutbox \advance\topmg\headlineskip
+	|\ifdim \topmg<20mm \topmg=20mm \fi
+	|\ifdim \botmg<27mm \botmg=27mm \fi
+\smallbreak
+	|\setpaper{210mm}{297mm}
+\endcode
+
+	The document has `tab-index' headings, that is, headings go in a
+	wide left margin to the left of the body text.  The underlying
+	structure is a grid is 4~cells wide, with the text spanning
+	across the rightmost 3~cells.  Definitions in the fonts section
+	below specify that the text will be set ragged-right.
+\code
+	|\setnkgrid{4}{3}
+	|\colrule=0pt
+ 	|\leftmargin=\gridwd \advance\leftmargin\colsep
+\endcode
+	The output routine's |\leftbox| is set at the start of each page
+	to make space for the left margin.
+\code
+	|\everypage={\ifdim\leftmargin>0pt 
+	|    \setbox\leftbox=\hbox to \gridwd{}\fi}
+\endcode
+
+	While we're here, we customize some of the environments supplied
+	by pdcFMT2:
+\code
+	|\everyfootnote={\notefonts}
+	|\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
+\maonly
+	|\def\footnotetextmark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
+	|\def\footnotenotemark#1{{\rmsy#1}}
+\common
+	|\everylinenum={\smallfonts}
+	|\everytag={\bf}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  layout
+%{{{  fonts
+\section{Fonts}
+
+	This section describes the fonts available in the document.
+
+	We introduce extra nicknames |\bi| for bold italic (used for the
+	first mention of new techical terms), |\mf| for the METAFONT
+	logo, |\mfi| for the METAFONT logo in italic (Something of an
+	affectation) and |\ttb| for an `emphasized' typewriter (usually
+	it is best if this is slanted, not bold).
+\code
+\styonly
+	|\autoloadfonts
+\endcode
+
+	The style files differ because of encoding schemes more than
+	because of the particular fonts.  For example, a style for Times
+	Roman will work for Palatino too,if we change the names of the
+	fonts used.  To do this, a macro |\basefontname| may be defined
+	before the style file is read in; if it isn't defined it is
+	given a default value.
+
+%{{{   cmr
+
+\subsec{Fonts for Computer Modern documents}
+\cmonly
+	We use Computer Modern Sans Serif for the headings in CM
+	documents.  I have not put much effort into making formulas
+	work in headings.  
+\code
+	|\def\STYheadingT{%
+	|    \m{rm}{cmss}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+	|    \f{it}{cmssi}\f{tt}{cmtt}\f{mf}{logo}\f{mfi}{logosl}%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\font\headingrm=cmss17 \font\headingit=cmssi17
+	|\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1200}{14pt}
+	|    {small}{tiny}
+	|\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{10 scaled 1728}{20pt}
+	|    {subheading}{small}
+\endcode
+
+	We use Computer Modern for body text.
+\code
+	|\def\STYbodyT{\m{rm}{cmr}\m{it}{cmti}%
+	|    \m{bf}{cmbx}\@\f{bi}{cmbxti10}%
+	|    \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+	|    \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+	|    \f{tt}{cmtt}\@\f{ttb}{cmsltt10}%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\font\tinytt=cmtt8 at 7pt
+	|\font\bodysy=cmsy10 at 12pt
+\endcode
+	
+%}}}   cmr
+%{{{   malvern
+	
+\subsec{Fonts for Malvern documents}
+\maonly
+
+	Headings are in Malvern~75.  The maths fonts are scaled for
+	expediency; I~do not make much effort to make formulas work in
+	headings.
+\code
+	|\def\STYheadingT{%
+	|    \m{rm}{ma75a}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
+	|    \f{it}{ma76a}\@\f{tt}{cmtt10}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+	|\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\endcode
+
+
+	We use Malvern~55 for body text.  The supplementary font with
+	encoding~B is added, with font nickname |\rmsy|.
+\code
+	|\newfam\rmsyfam
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\STYbodyT{%
+	|    \m{rm}{ma55a}\f{rmsy}{ma55b}\m{it}{ma56a}%
+	|    \m{bf}{ma75a}\f{bi}{ma76a}%
+	|    \m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+	|    \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+	|    \f{tt}{cmtt}\f{tb}{cmsltt}%
+	|}
+\endcode
+%	The main problem with defining the body fonts is that the
+%	$x$-height of Malvern is larger then Computer Modern. This makes
+%	in necessary to load the maths fonts at a larger size to match.
+%	(A better solution might be to make a parameter file for
+%	Computer Modern so that maths fonts may be generated with
+%	compatible proportions.)
+%\code
+%	|\loadfont\bodytt{cmtt10 scaled \magstep2}
+%	|\loadfont\notett{cmtt10 scaled \magstep1}
+%	|\loadfont\smalltt{cmtt10 scaled \magstephalf}
+%	|\loadfont\bodytb{cmsltt10 scaled \magstep2}
+%	|\loadfont\smalltb{cmsltt10 scaled \magstep1}
+%	|\loadfont\notetb{cmsltt10 scaled \magstephalf}
+%\endcode
+	There is no point using |\loadfont| on the maths symbol fonts,
+	since they have to be loaded anyway the first time |\bodyfonts|
+	is called.
+\code
+	|\font\bodymi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep2
+	|\font\bodysy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+	|\font\notemi=cmmi10 scaled \magstep1
+	|\font\notesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
+	|\font\smallmi=cmmi10 scaled \magstephalf
+	|\font\smallsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstephalf
+\endcode
+%}}}   malvern
+%{{{   PostScript
+	
+\subsec{Fonts for Times documents}
+\psonly
+	The big problem with PostScript fonts is what they are called;
+	I~shall be assuming that Fontname~$1.6$\footnote*{Karl Berry,
+	{\it File Names for \TeX\ Fonts} $1.6$ ({\tt
+	ftp:\penalty\exhyphenpenalty //ftp.umb.edu\slash pub\slash
+	tex\slash fontname/}).} applies: fonts with |afm2tfm|'s
+	variation on the \TeX\ Text encoding are called |ptmr| and fonts
+	with Adobe's StandardRoman encoding are called |ptmr0| (rather
+	than |rptmr|).
+
+	This macro attempts to make it possible to guess the standard
+	name for the italic variant of a given font.
+	|\KBcanonical{|\<tentative font name>|}| takes a font name which
+	is formed from an upright name optionally followed by `|i|'
+	representing an italic variation.  It returns the corresponding
+	standard name.  For example, |ptmri| is left unchanged, but
+	|phvri| is changed to |phvro| and |phvrrni| is changed to
+	|phvron|.
+\code
+	|\def\KBcanonical#1{%
+	|    \expcs\ifx{KB#1}\relax #1\else\csname KB#1\endcsname \fi
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\ifx\KBadobe\UNDEFINED \def\KBadobe#1{\KBcanonical{#10}} \fi
+	|\def\KBit#1{\KBcanonical{#1i}}
+	|\def\KBbi#1{\KBbf{#1i}}
+	|\def\KBbf#1{\expandafter\KBbfx#1.}
+	|\def\KBbfx#1#2#3#4#5.{\KBcanonical{#1#2#3b#5}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\KBpagbr{pagdr}        \def\KBpagbri{pagdro}
+	|\def\KBpbkbr{pbkdr}        \def\KBpbkbri{pbkdri}
+	|\def\KBpagri{pagro}        \def\KBpagbi{pagbo}
+	|\def\KBphvri{phvro}        \def\KBphvbi{phvbo}
+	|\def\KBpcrri{pcrro}        \def\KBpcrbi{pcrbo}
+	|\def\KBphvrrni{phvron}     \def\KBphvbrni{phvbon}
+	|\def\KBphvrrn0{phvr0n}     \def\KBphvbrn0{phvb0n}
+	|\def\KBphvrrni0{phvro0n}   \def\KBphvbrni0{phvbo0n}
+\endcode
+
+	Headings are in Helvetica.  The maths fonts are scaled for
+	expediency; I~do not make much effort to make formulas work in
+	headings.
+\code
+
+	|\ifx\headingfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingfontname{phvr} \fi
+	|\ifx\headingttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\headingttfontname{pcrb} \fi
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\STYheadingT{%
+	|    \@\f{rm}{\headingfontname}\@\m{mi}{cmmi10}\@\m{sy}{cmsy10}%
+	|    \@\f{asy}{psyr}%
+	|    \@\f{it}{\KBit\headingfontname}%
+	|    \@\f{tt}{\headingttfontname}\@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\loadfont\bodysy{cmsy10 at 12pt}
+\smallbreak
+	|\fontset{subheading}\STYheadingT{12}{14pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+	|\fontset{heading}\STYheadingT{18}{20pt}{subheading}{subheading}
+\endcode
+
+
+	We use Times Roman by default for body text, and Courier for
+	typewriter text.  Adobe's Symbol font is included, with font
+	nickname |\asy|; a family called |\asyfam| has already been
+	created by |pdcadobe.tex|.
+\code
+	|\ifx\bodyfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyfontname{ptmr} \fi
+	|\ifx\bodyttfontname\UNDEFINED \def\bodyttfontname{pcrr} \fi
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\STYbodyT{%
+	|    \@\m{rm}{\bodyfontname}\@\m{it}{\KBit\bodyfontname}%
+	|    \@\m{bf}{\KBbf\bodyfontname}\@\f{bi}{\KBbi\bodyfontname}%
+	|    \@\m{asy}{psyr}\m{mi}{cmmi}\m{sy}{cmsy}%
+	|    \@\f{mf}{logo10}\@\f{mfi}{logosl10}%
+	|    \@\f{tt}{\bodyttfontname}\@\f{tb}{\KBit\bodyttfontname}%
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+
+	Finally the alphabet-switching commands defined for Malvern
+	fonts are given dummy definitions.
+\code
+	|\let\sc=\relax  \let\mc=\relax  \let\csc=\relax
+\endcode
+
+%}}}   malvern
+	
+\common
+\subsec{Definitions common to all formats}
+
+\code
+\styonly
+	|\fontset{tiny}\STYbodyT{7}{9pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+	|\fontset{small}\STYbodyT{9}{11pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+	|\fontset{note}\STYbodyT{10}{12pt}{tiny}{tiny}
+	|\fontset{body}\STYbodyT{12}{14pt}{small}{tiny}
+\endcode
+
+	The text is set left-justified (ragged-right).  To make this
+	work, the fontdimens that control word spacing are set to force
+	interword spaces to all be the same width.
+\code
+	|\def\everyloadfont#1#2{\fontdimen3#1=0pt \fontdimen4#1=0pt}
+	|\rightskip=0pt plus 2em \tolerance=1000
+\smallbreak
+	|\bodyfonts
+	|{\tt \hyphenchar\font=-1 }
+\common
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  fonts
+%{{{  minimal section headings
+\section{Simple sectioning}
+
+\onlyone{X}
+	A `leaflet' is divided into short sections, which may contain
+	subsections (but usually will not).  There may well be more than
+	one section on a page.  
+
+	The section number is held in two count registers, and printed
+	(enclosed in |\n{|\dots|}|) with the macro |\thesecno|:
+
+\code
+	|\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\thesecno{%
+	|    \n{%
+	|        \number\secno
+	|        \ifnum\subsecno>0
+	|            .\number\subsecno
+	|        \fi
+	|    }%
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	The section and subsection commands are implemented
+	straightforwardly with macros from |pdcfmt2.tex|, since there is
+	no need for marks or fiddling with table-of-contents files.
+\code
+	|\def\section{
+	|    \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0
+	|    \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts\thesecno\enspace}{}
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\subsec{
+	|    \global\advance\subsecno1
+	|    \doheading\smallskipamount{\bodyfonts\thesecno\enspace}{}
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	The page header includes only the title of the file, which the
+	user sets with the command |\majorheadline{|\<text>|}|
+\code
+	|\newtoks\majorheadline 
+	|\expandafter\majorheadline	
+	|    \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}}
+\endcode
+	All those |\expandafter|s are to get the initial value in upper
+	case.
+
+	The flag |noheadline| signals that the headline is to be omitted
+	on this page (e.g., the title page).  The |twosided| flag is set
+	for two-sided binding.
+\code
+	|\newif\ifnoheadline \newif\iftwosided 
+\smallbreak
+	|\headline{%
+	|    \ifnoheadline
+	|        \hfil
+	|    \else\iftwosided
+	|        \ifodd\pageno
+	|            \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}%
+	|        \else
+	|            {\bf\folio}\quad \the\majorheadline\hfil
+	|        \fi
+	|    \else
+	|        \hfil \the\majorheadline \quad{\bf\folio}%
+	|    \fi\fi
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\footline{%
+	|    \ifnoheadline
+	|        \global\noheadlinefalse
+	|        \hfil{\bf\folio}\hfil
+	|    \else
+	|        \hfil
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+%}}}  minimal section headings
+%{{{  sectioning
+\section{Sectioning in PDCCMDOC documents}
+
+\onlyone{T}
+	Now a document is divided into {\it sections}, which are further
+	divided into so-called {\it subsecs} and {\it subsubsecs}.
+	(Division into subsubsecs should be done sparingly.)
+
+	The sections may be grouped into {\it parts}---or, to look at it
+	another way, parts are a larger division of the document than
+	sections, but sections are not numbered within part numbers.
+	Each |\part| command should be almost immediately followed by
+	|\section|.
+
+\subsec{Macros for section numbers}
+
+	The part and section numbers are kept in \TeX\ number registers,
+	with corresponding `|\the|-' macros to print the value
+	formatted.
+\code
+	|\newcount\partno
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\thepartno{%
+	|    \ifcase\partno O\or I\or II\or III\or IV\or V\else
+	|        \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\partno}%
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+	Formatted section and subsec numbers are generated by one macro
+	|\thesecno|.  It automatically omits (sub)subsec numbers if they
+	are zero.  The whole number is enclosed in |\n{|\dots|}| so that
+	the formatting of numbers may be customized.
+\code
+	|\newcount\secno \newcount\subsecno \newcount\subsubsecno
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\thesecno{%
+	|    \n{%
+	|        \number\secno
+	|        \ifnum\subsecno>0 
+	|            .\number\subsecno
+	|            \ifnum\subsubsecno>0
+	|        	.\number\subsubsecno
+	|            \fi
+	|        \fi
+	|    }%
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Parts}
+
+	The |\part| macro takes one argument, the title.  It sets a
+	token register |\majorheadline| which is printed on the left
+	page of two-sided documents.
+	
+	The |\majorheadline{|\<text>|}| command may be used immediately
+	after a |\part| command if the part title is not suitable to go
+	in the headline.  This should also be used at the start of the
+	document to the title of the document, if division into parts is
+	not used.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\majorheadline
+	|\expandafter\majorheadline	
+	|    \expandafter{\expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\jobname}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\part#1{%
+	|    \global\advance\partno1
+	|    \newpageheading{2\baselineskip}{\headingfonts}
+	|        {}{\thepartno.\quad#1}
+	|    \TOCwrite\TOCentrypart{\thepartno}{#1}
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Section headings}
+
+	Section headings will start on a new page if the current page is
+	almost finished.  The section heading is set across the full
+	width of the page, including the margin usually used for
+	tab-indexed headings.
+
+	To force the next section to start a new page, do
+	|\sectionpenalty-10000| immediately before it.  
+\code
+	|\newcount\sectionpenalty 
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\sectionheading#1{
+	|    \par
+	|    \vskip 0pt plus 0.3\vsize 
+	|    \penalty\sectionpenalty \sectionpenalty-200
+	|    \vskip 1\bigskipamount plus -0.3\vsize
+	|    \begingroup \advance\leftskip-\leftmargin
+	|        \parskip=0pt \parindent=0pt
+	|        \hyphenpenalty=10000 \exhyphenpenalty=500 
+	|        \interlinepenalty=100
+	|        \headingfonts \nointerlineskip
+	|        \hbox{\hskip-\leftmargin 
+	|        	\vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \leftmargin
+	|        	\vrule height 2pt depth 0pt width \hsize}
+%	|        \nobreak\medskip
+	|       #1\par
+	|        \nobreak\smallskip
+	|    \endgroup
+	|    \global\noindenttrue
+	|}
+\endcode
+	As well as generating a heading, the section macro generates
+	marks used for the page headings and a TOC entry.  The marks are
+	of the form in a way similar to that discussed in Chapter~23 of
+	the {\it\TeX book}.  More precisely, a mark is placed on either
+	side of the section heading of the form
+$$\hbox{\tt\arg{\<rhs>}\arg{\<lhs>}}$$ where \<rhs> is the section
+	number that belongs on the right-hand page, reflecting the
+	situation at the bottom of the page, whereas \<lhs> is what
+	belongs on following left-hand pages.
+\code
+	|\newtoks\sectiontoks
+	|\newif\ifsecno \secnotrue
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\section#1{
+	|    \ifsecno
+	|        \global\advance\secno1 \global\subsecno0 \global\subsubsecno0
+	|    \fi
+	|    \toks0={#1}
+	|    \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\ifsecno\S\thesecno\space\fi\the\toks0 }}
+	|    \edef\tmp{\ifsecno\noexpand\S\the\secno\space\fi}
+	|    \global\sectiontoks\expandafter{\tmp#1}
+	|    \sectionheading{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi #1}
+	|    \mark{{\the\sectiontoks}{\the\sectiontoks}}
+	|    \TOCwrite\TOCentrysection{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
+	|}
+\endcode
+	Subsecs and subsubsecs use the |\doheading| macro defined in
+	|pdcfmt.tex|.  They do not appear in page headings, but may
+	appear in the TOC.
+\code
+	|\def\subsec#1{%
+	|    \ifsecno \global\advance\subsecno1  \global\subsubsecno0 \fi
+	|    \doheading\medskipamount{\subheadingfonts}{}
+	|        {\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1}
+	|    \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\subsubsec#1{%
+	|    \ifsecno \global\advance\subsubsecno+1 \fi
+	|    \doheading\smallskipamount{\rm}{}{\ifsecno\thesecno\quad\fi#1}
+	|    \TOCwrite\TOCentrysubsubsec{\ifsecno\thesecno\fi}{#1}
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	The headline and footline are controlled by two flags.  The
+	command |\noheadlinetrue| suppresses the headline for this page
+	(e.g., a title page).  The |twosided| flag says whether the
+	document should be formatted for two-sided printing.
+\code
+	|\newif\ifnoheadline
+	|\newif\iftwosided
+\smallbreak
+	|\footline={%
+	|    \ifnoheadline 
+	|        \global\noheadlinefalse
+	|        \hfil\bodyfonts\n\folio\hfil 
+	|    \else
+	|        \hfil
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+	The headline varies according to whether it is a one-sided page,
+	a left-hand page or a right-hand page.  On a one-sided page, it
+	has the major headline (part or document title) at the left, and
+	the section title of the {\it first} section on the page on the
+	right with the folio.  On a left-hand page, there is the folio
+	and the major headline, and on a right-hand page there is the
+	section title for the {\it last} section on the page, and the
+	folio.
+\code
+	|\headline={%
+	|    \ifnoheadline
+	|        \hfil
+	|    \else
+	|        \bodyfonts 
+	|        \iftwosided
+	|            \ifodd\pageno
+	|        	\hfil 
+	|        	\expandafter\firstoftwo\botmark\quad
+	|        	{\bf\n\folio}%
+	|            \else
+	|        	{\bf\n\folio}\quad
+	|        	\the\majorheadline
+	|        	\hfil
+	|            \fi
+	|        \else
+	|            \the\majorheadline
+	|            \hfil 
+	|           \expandafter\secondoftwo\topmark\quad
+	|            {\bf\n\folio}%
+	|        \fi
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
+	|\def\secondoftwo#1{}
+\endcode
+%}}}  sectioning
+%{{{  table of contents
+\section{Table of contents intrinsics}
+
+	This section defines the macros used to generate a table of
+	contents.  The entries are written to a file \<jobname>|.toc| in
+	the current directory.  At the end of the manuscript this files
+	is closed and then read to generate the table of contents.
+
+	Macros special to the TOC-generating section have names starting
+	with `|\TOC|-'.
+\code
+	|\newwrite\TOCfile
+	|\openout\TOCfile=\jobname.toc
+\endcode
+
+	Entries in the TOC file are of the form 
+$$\hbox{\tt\cs{TOCentry}\<foo>\arg{\<secno>}\arg{\<title>}\arg{\<folio>}}$$
+	where |\TOCentry|\<foo> is a csname, \<secno> is some
+	automatically-generated section number like `|1.2|', \<title> is
+	the section title as supplied by the user, and \<folio> is the
+	folio for this page, in arabic or lower-case roman numeral form.
+
+	They are generated with calls to |\TOCwrite| like this
+$$\hbox{\tt\cs{TOCwrite}\cs{TOCentry}\<foo>\arg{\<secno>}\arg{\<title>}}$$
+	The \<secno> is evaluated when |\TOCwrite| is called, whereas
+	the \<title> is carefully written without being expanded so that
+	its expansion happens when the TOC file is read in.  The
+	\<folio> is automatically appended when it is written.
+\code
+	|\def\TOCwrite#1#2#3{%
+	|    \begingroup\def\n{\string\n}
+	|    \def\tmp{#3}%
+	|    \edef\tmp{\string#1{#2}{\expandafter\TOCtrim\meaning\tmp}}
+	|    \write\TOCfile\expandafter{\tmp{\folio}}\endgroup
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TOCtrim#1:->{}
+\endcode
+
+
+	Now we define all the `|\TOCentry|-' macros.  
+\code
+	|\def\TOCentrypart#1#2#3{
+	|    \smallskip
+	|    \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0\leftmargin
+	|    \moveleft\leftmargin\hbox to\dimen0{\strut\bf #1. #2\hfil}
+	|    \smallskip
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TOCentrysection#1#2#3{
+	|    \smallskip\noindent\llap{#1\kern1pc}%
+	|        {\bf \ignorespaces #2\quad\rm \n{#3}}\par
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TOCentrysubsec#1#2#3{
+	|    \ifvmode \noindent \else \quad \fi
+	|    {#1}~{\ignorespaces #2}
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\TOCentrysubsubsec#1#2#3{}
+\endcode
+%}}}  table of contents
+%{{{  front matter
+\section{Printing the front matter}
+
+	The front matter of the document---the title page, preface,
+	forword, etc.---must be printed {\it last}, with the table of
+	contents at the end of the front matter; this is so that the
+	table of contents may be accumulated during the \TeX ing of the
+	file.\footnote*{It has a benefit for people reading the document
+	with a browser: page~1 of the document is the first page of the
+	DVI file, which makes selecting a given page easy, and the table
+	of contents is at the very end, so the browsers `go to last
+	page' command can be used to find the table of contents
+	quickly.}
+     	The front matter starts with the command |\frontmatter| and may
+	contain |\section| commands.  Such sections will be unnumbered
+	and will not appear in the table of contents.
+	
+	For a short document, a separate title page is probably
+	excessive, and an abstract may be preferable to a preface.  In
+	this case the first page after |\frontmatter| could have the
+	title of the document (with author etc.)\ followed by an
+	abstract, any copyright information (or other small print), and
+	the contents (generated by |\endfrontmatter|).  In other words,
+	something like this:
+$$\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
+	|\frontmatter|\cr
+	\quad\it commands to print the title, etc.\cr
+	\quad|\abstract|\cr
+	\qquad\it the text of the abstract\cr
+	\quad|\endabstract|\cr
+	\quad\it copyright information, etc.\cr
+	|\endfrontmatter|\cr
+}$$
+ 	For a longer document, there will be a separate title page and
+	perhaps a preface.
+$$\halign{\indent#\hfil\cr
+	|\frontmatter|\cr
+	\quad|\titlepage|\cr
+	\qquad\it commands to print the title, etc.\cr
+	\quad|\splittitlepage|\cr
+	\qquad\it print copyright information, etc.\cr
+	\quad|\endtitlepage|\cr
+	\quad|\section{Preface}|\cr
+	\qquad\it text of preface, etc.\cr
+	|\endfrontmatter|\cr
+}$$ 
+ 	The macro |\splittitlepage| marks the division between the title
+	page (title recto, page~i) and the back of the title page (title
+	verso, page~ii), which is where copyright information goes.  On
+	a one-sided document, the copyright information belongs on the
+	title recto, because the title verso will be blank, so
+	|\splittitle| instead does |\vfill|.
+
+	Setting |\pageno| nagative makes it print in roman numerals.
+	Calling |\secnofalse| suppresses section numbering.  The first
+	page has no headline.
+\code
+	|\def\frontmatter{
+	|    \write\TOCfile{\string\endinput}
+	|    \write\TOCfile{\folio}
+	|    \closeout\TOCfile
+	|    \vfill\supereject
+	|    \ifvoid\partialpage\else \null\vfill\eject \fi
+	|    \beginthe{frontmatter}
+	|    \pageno=-1 \secnofalse \noheadlinetrue
+	|    \def\TOCwrite##1##2##3{}
+	|}
+\endcode
+	The front matter is finshed off with the contents list,
+	generated by |\endfrontmatter|.  This reads the TOC file, which
+	was closed at the end of the last page of the body of the
+	document.
+\code
+	|\def\endfrontmatter{
+	|    \section{Contents}
+	|    \input\jobname.toc
+	|    \vfill\supereject
+	|    \endthe{frontmatter}
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	Here's macros for generating the titlepage---it shoul;d enclose
+	commands to generate the title, author and publisher information
+	for the document.  If it is used, it goes immediately after
+	|\frontmatter|, so that the title page is page~i.
+\code
+	|\def\titlepage{
+	|    \vfill\eject
+	|    \beginthe{titlepage}
+	|    \noheadlinetrue
+	|    \def\splittitlepage{
+	|        \iftwosided \vfill\eject\null\vfill \else \vfill \fi
+	|    }
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endtitlepage{
+	|    \eject
+	|    \endthe{titlepage}
+	|}
+\endcode
+
+	This |abstract| environment doesn't do anything fancy.
+\code
+	|\def\abstract{
+	|    \smallskip 
+	|    \beginthe{abstract}
+	|        \setbox\parbox\hbox to \gridwd{\subheadingfonts Abstract\hfil}
+	|        \noindenttrue \bodyfonts
+	|}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\endabstract{
+	|        \smallskip
+	|    \endthe{abstract}
+	|}
+\endcode		
+%}}}  front matter
+	This concludes the code that is included only in documents with TOC.
+\common
+
+%{{{  abbreviations
+
+\section{abbrevs}
+
+
+	The definitions of |\pt| and |\mm| work only in maths mode.
+\code
+	|\def\pt{\,{\rm pt}}
+	|\def\mm{\,{\rm mm}}
+\smallbreak
+	|\def\MF{{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi META}\-%
+	|        {\ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \mfi \else \mf \fi FONT}}
+	|\def\MSDOS{\leavevmode\hbox{MS-DOS}}
+\endcode
+
+\subsec{Program names with small caps}
+
+	Some program names use small capitals in their names.  For
+	normal fonts there is no point trying to duplicate this, since
+	small capitals aren't common to all fonts.  But small capitals
+	come `for free' with Malvern, so we might as well use them.  The
+	following definitions apply to Malvern~A fonts.
+\code
+\maonly
+	|\def\PS{\csc{PostScript}}
+	|\def\La{L\negthinspace\flushtop{\char"C1 }}
+\cmonly
+	|\def\PS{PostScript}
+\common
+\endcode
+
+\font\sf=cmss10
+	Here's a redefinition of |\TeX|.  This adds a spacefactor 1000
+	to the end (so that \TeX\ doesn't apply its usual heuristic that
+	a full stop following a capoital {\it X} isn't a sentence end).
+	It also loosens up the logo, producing `\TeX' rather than the
+	usual `T\negthinspace\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-0.125emX'.  This
+	design is more forgiving of changes in font (for example, in
+	sanserif it makes `{\sf\TeX}' instead of `{\sf
+	T\negthinspace\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-0.125emX}').
+\code
+	|\def\TeX{T\kern-0.1em\lower0.5ex\hbox{E}X\spacefactor1000 }
+\endcode
+	
+	The macro |\dfn{...}| formats a defining instance of a word or
+	phrase (usually used the first time a new technical term is
+	introduced).  When generating an index with a command |\index|,
+	this also adds the phrase to the index.
+\code
+	|\begingroup\catcode`\|=12 \toks0={\endgroup
+	|    \def\dfn#1{\ifx\index\UNDEFINED\else\index{#1|INDdfn}\fi{\bi #1}}
+	|} \the\toks0
+\endcode
+
+	Here's a hack for using email-style emphasis using
+	`asterisking'.  Text enclosed in matching asterisks is
+	emphasized.
+\code
+	|\declareactivechar\* \def*#1*{{\it#1\/}}
+\endcode
+
+
+\begingroup\defverbatim\~
+	When documenting computer progams it is useful to be able to
+	present dialogues between the user and the computer, with the
+	user's commands distinguished by a slightly different font.
+	Here we define ~\|~\<text>~|~ so that it behaves like
+	~|~\<text>~|~ except that |\ttb| is used instead of |\tt|.  In
+	maths mode it is still equivalent to |\Vert|.
+\code
+	|\def\|{%
+	|    \relax\ifmmode
+	|        \Vert
+	|    \else
+	|        \begingroup
+	|        \ttb \setupverbatim 
+	|        \catcode`\|=13 \let|\endgroup
+	|    \fi
+	|}
+\endcode
+\endgroup
+%}}}  abbreviations
+%{{{  postamble
+\section{Finally}
+
+	The definitions common to all style files are read last, so that
+	they can take account of changes to |\baselineskip|.
+\code
+\Tstyonly
+	|\input pdcdoc.def
+\Xstyonly
+	|\input pdclft.def
+\common
+\endcode
+
+	And, at last, a file {\tt\<filename>.cfg} is read, if it exists. 
+\code	
+	|\def\inputifexists#1{%
+	|    \openin15=#1
+	|    \ifeof15 \else \input #1 \fi
+	|    \closein15
+	|}
+\styonly
+	\|\\inputifexists\{\filenamesanssuffix.cfg\}
+\common
+\endcode
+
+\endcodefile{cmX} \endcodefile{cmT} \endcodefile{maX} \endcodefile{maT}
+\endcodefile{psX} \endcodefile{psT} \endcodefile{X} \endcodefile{T}
+\bye
+%}}}  postamble	
+%}}} pdccmcode.dtx
+
+%Local variables:
+%fold-folded-p: t
+%fill-prefix: "	"
+%End:
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0bcb9be0459
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+#  I can't figure out how I'm supposed to use a builtin "install"
+#  program in a makefile given that every Unix has an incompatible version!
+
+#  This script shall behave similarly to GNU "install".
+
+version="1.1  Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-24>"
+
+echo=
+strip=:
+
+while test $# -gt 0; do
+	case $1 in
+	    -c) ;;
+	    -n|--no-create)
+		echo=echo ;;
+	    --g*=*)
+		group=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    -g|--g*)
+		group=$2; shift ;;
+	    -g*)
+		group=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    --o*=*)
+		owner=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    -o|--o*)
+		owner=$2; shift ;;
+	    -o*)
+		owner=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    --m*=*)
+		mode=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    -m|--m*)
+		mode=$2; shift ;;
+	    -m*)
+		mode=`expr $1 : '-.\(.*\)$'` ;;
+	    -s|--strip)
+		strip=strip ;;
+	    -h|--help)
+		cat <<@EOF
+$0 -- install files
+usage: 
+    $0 [ OPTION ]... FILE1 FILE2
+    $0 [ OPTION ]... FILE1...FILEn DIR
+    $0 --help | --version
+options:
+    -c	ignored
+    --group=GROUP --owner=USER --mode=MODE  -g GROUP -o USER -m MODE
+    --strip  -s
+@EOF
+		exit 0 ;;   
+	    -V|--version)
+		echo "PDCMAC install ($0) version $version"
+		exit 0 ;;
+	    -*)
+		echo >&2 $0: $1: not understood -- try $0 --help
+		exit 2 ;;
+	    *)
+		files="$files $lastfile"
+		lastfile=$1 ;;
+	esac
+	shift
+done
+
+#echo group=$group owner=$owner mode=$mode lastfile=$lastfile files=$files
+
+$echo cp -p $files $lastfile || exit 1
+if test -d "$lastfile"; then
+	$echo cd $lastfile
+else
+	files="$lastfile"
+fi
+
+if test -n "$group"; then
+	$echo chgrp $group $files || exit 1
+fi
+
+if test -n "$owner"; then
+	$echo chown $owner $files || exit 1
+fi
+
+if test -n "$mode"; then
+	$echo chmod $mode $files || exit 1
+fi
+$echo $strip $files
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4b405f35ace
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pinstall.1
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+.TH PINSTALL 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE"
+.SH NAME
+pinstall \- shellscript for copying programs into system directories,
+compatible with install
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.na
+.B pinstall
+[
+.B \-c
+] [
+.I options
+]
+.I file1
+.I file2
+.br
+.B pinstall
+[
+.B \-c
+] [
+.I options
+]
+.I file\|.\|.\|.
+.I dir
+.br
+.BR pinstall
+.B \-\-help
+|
+.B \-\-version
+.PP 
+.I options
+= [
+.B \-\-no\-create
+] [
+.BI \-\-group= groupname
+] [
+.BI \-\-owner= username
+] [
+.BI \-\-mode= mode
+] [
+.B \-\-strip 
+]
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.na 
+This documents the 
+.SM PDCMAC 
+version of
+.IR install (1),
+called
+.IR pinstall .
+It is only used if 
+.SM GNU
+.I install
+is not available.
+.PP
+This copies 
+.I file1
+(which must exist)
+to the name
+.IR file2 ,
+or
+the 
+.I files
+into the directory called
+.IR dir ,
+preserving the last-modified times
+(just like
+.BR "cp \-p" ).
+.PP
+This command is implemented as a shellscript.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.B \-c
+Ignored.
+.TP
+.BI \-\-group= "groupname, " "\-g " groupname
+.PD 0v
+.TP
+.BI \-\-owner= "username, " "\-o " username
+.TP
+.BI \-\-mode= "mode, " "\-m " mode
+.PD
+Set the group, owner or mode for the new files (using the same
+conventions as
+.IR chgrp (1),
+.IR chown (1),
+and
+.IR chmod (1)
+respectively).
+Only root can combine changes of mode and group.
+.TP
+.BR \-\-help ", " \-h
+Print a usage message and exit.
+.TP
+.BR \-\-no\-create ", " \-n
+Do not copy files; instead print the commands that would have been performed.
+.TP
+.BR \-\-strip ", " \-s
+Apply 
+.IR strip (1)
+to the files after copying them.
+.TP
+.BR \-\-version ", " \-V
+Print a version identification message and exit.
+.SH AUTHOR
+P. Damian Cugley
+.I damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+pmkdir(1), chgrp(1), chown(1), chmod(1), cp(1), strip(1), install(1)
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b0b5862cc3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+version="1.0 Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>"
+
+# pmkdir [ -m MODE | -g GROUP | -o OWNER | -n ] DIR 
+#  -- create a directory DIR, including any necessary
+#  intervening directories.
+# Also takes note of 3 enbvironment variables:
+#  GROUP -- group to give to new directories
+#  OWNER -- owner for new directories
+#  MODE -- mode for new directories
+# If called with the name of an existing directory, this will still
+#  change group, mode, owner (if they are set).
+
+me=`basename $0`
+
+while test $# -gt 0; do
+	case $1 in
+	    --m*=*)
+		MODE=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ; export MODE ;;
+	    -m|--m*)
+		MODE=$2 ; export MODE; shift ;;
+	    --g*=*)
+		GROUP=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ; export GROUP ;;
+	    -g|--g*)
+		GROUP=$2; export GROUP; shift ;;
+	    --o*=*)
+		OWNER=`expr $1 : '.*=\(.*\)$'` ; export OWNER ;;
+	    -o|--o*)
+		OWNER=$2; export OWNER; shift ;;
+	    -n*|--n*)
+		echo=echo ;;
+	    -h|--h*)
+		cat <<'@EOF'
+$me -- make directory and any parent directories necessary
+
+$me [--no-create] [--mode=MODE] [--group=GROUP] [--owner=OWNER] DIR...
+$me --help | --version
+
+MODE is a mode for the new directory(s); see chmod(1).
+GROUP and OWNER are the group and owner; see chown(1) and chgrp(1).
+
+The --no-create option means don't do anything, print the commands instead.
+
+If not specified on the command line, the environment variables MODE,
+GROUP and OWNER are used.  If there are no environment variables, the
+defaults used by mkdir(1) apply.
+@EOF
+		exit 0
+		;;
+	    -V|--v*)
+		echo $me for PDCMAC $version 
+		exit 0 ;;
+	    -*)
+		echo >&2 `basename $0`: $1: not understood
+		exit 2 ;;
+	    *)
+		p=`dirname $1`
+		test -d $p || $0 $p || exit 1
+		$echo mkdir $1 || exit 1
+		test -n "$OWNER" && { $echo chgrp $OWNER $1 || exit 1; }
+		test -n "$GROUP" && { $echo chgrp $GROUP $1 || exit 1; }
+		test -n "$MODE" && { $echo chmod $MODE $1 || exit 1; }
+		;;
+	esac
+	shift
+done
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.1 b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.1
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c9a5981cb21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/pdcmac/pmkdir.1
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+.TH PMKDIR 1 "Time-stamp: <pdc 1995-03-27>" "PDCMAC 1.0" "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE"
+.SH NAME
+pmkdir \- make a directory and possibly its parents as well
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.na
+.B pmkdir
+[
+.B \-\-no\-create
+] [
+.BI \-\-group= groupname
+] [
+.BI \-\-owner= username
+] [
+.BI \-\-mode= mode
+]
+.I dir\|.\|.\|.
+.br
+.BR pmkdir
+.B \-\-help
+|
+.B \-\-version
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.na 
+This documents the
+.SM PDCMAC
+version of
+.IR mkdirhier (1),
+called
+.IR pmkdir .
+.PP
+For each 
+.I dir
+this creates a directory with that file name.
+Unlike
+.IR mkdir (1),
+any intermediate directories required will also be
+created.
+.PP
+This command is implemented as a shellscript.
+.SH OPTIONS
+.TP
+.BI \-\-group= "groupname, " "\-g " groupname
+.PD 0v
+.TP
+.BI \-\-owner= "username, " "\-o " username
+.TP
+.BI \-\-mode= "mode, " "\-m " mode
+.PD
+Set the group, owner or mode for the new files (using the same
+conventions as
+.IR chgrp (1),
+.IR chown (1),
+and
+.IR chmod (1)
+respectively).
+Only root can combine changes of mode and group.
+.TP
+.BR \-\-help ", " \-h
+Print a usage message and exit.
+.TP
+.BR \-\-no\-create ", " \-n
+Do not copy files; instead print the commands that would have been performed.
+.TP
+.BR \-\-version ", " \-V
+Print a version identification message and exit.
+.SH ENVIRONMENT
+.TP
+.SM GROUP
+.PD 0v
+.TP
+.SM OWNER
+.TP
+.SM MODE
+.PD
+The values of these variables are used if the corresponding command-line
+options are omitted.
+.SH AUTHOR
+P. Damian Cugley
+.I damian.cugley@comlab.ox.ac.uk
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+pinstall(1), chgrp(1), chown(1), chmod(1), mkdir(1), mkdirhier(1)
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/plgraph/autopict.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/plgraph/autopict.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f6cc2fc7814
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/plgraph/autopict.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+%%
+%% docstrip install file for autopict.sty (only)
+%% based on autoload.ins in the LaTeX distribution.
+
+%%
+\def\batchfile{autopict.ins}
+\input docstrip
+
+\let\interactive\relax
+
+{\ifx\generate\undefined
+\Msg{**********************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
+\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{**********************************************}
+\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
+\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
+\batchmode
+\csname @@end\endcsname
+\fi}
+
+\keepsilent
+\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
+
+This is a generated file.
+
+Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996
+The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere
+in this file. 
+
+For further copyright information, and conditions for modification
+and distribution, see the file legal.txt, and any other copyright
+notices in this file.
+
+This file is part of the LaTeX2e system.
+----------------------------------------
+  This system is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+  For error reports concerning UNCHANGED versions of this file no
+  more than one year old, see bugs.txt.
+
+  Please do not request updates from us directly.  Primary
+  distribution is through the CTAN archives.
+
+
+IMPORTANT COPYRIGHT NOTICE:
+
+You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone.
+
+You are allowed to distribute this file under the condition that it
+is distributed together with all the files listed in manifest.txt.
+
+If you receive only some of these files from someone, complain!
+
+
+Permission is granted to copy this file to another file with a
+clearly different name and to customize the declarations in that
+copy to serve the needs of your installation, provided that you
+comply with the conditions in the file legal.txt.
+
+However, NO PERMISSION is granted to generate or to distribute a
+modified version of this file under its original name.
+ 
+You are NOT ALLOWED to change this file.
+
+
+MODIFICATION ADVICE:
+
+If you want to customize this file, it is best to make a copy of
+the source file(s) from which it was produced.  Use a different
+name for your copy(ies) and modify the copy(ies); this will ensure
+that your modifications do not get overwritten when you install a
+new release of the standard system.  You should also ensure that
+your modified source file does not generate any modified file with
+the same name as a standard file.
+
+You can then easily distribute your modifications by distributing
+the modified and renamed copy of the source file, taking care to
+observe the conditions in legal.txt; this will ensure that other
+users can safely use your modifications.
+
+You will also need to produce your own, suitably named, .ins file to
+control the generation of files from your source file; this file
+should contain your own preambles for the files it generates, not
+those in the standard .ins files.
+
+The names of the source files used are shown above.
+
+
+
+\endpreamble
+\usepreamble\mainpreamble
+
+\generate{\file{autopict.sty}{\from{ltpictur.dtx}{def}}}
+
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/READ.ME b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/READ.ME
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..848e523ce39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/READ.ME
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+About 5 years ago I developed  some TeX files for  economics working papers and journals.  My model at the time was AMSTeX. I use a variant of these files for my own working papers, but I've supplemented my files with various additional macros.  
+
+These files really aren't fit for public distribution but I've had so many requests for them that I will release them anyway.  One of these days I might find time to get back to this package and do it right.
+
+If I were starting over I would probably use LaTeX and bibtex, but perhaps it would make sense to wait for LaTeX 3.0.
+
+Have fun with the files.  Note that they are completely unsupported; don't ask me any questions about them.  However, if you make significant enhancements or bug fixes I would like to see them.
+
+                                        Hal.Varian@umich.edu
+                                        July 25, 1992
+
+-----------original readme file
+
+Here is release 1.0 of VerTeX.  Please note that there are two sets of
+"standard" TeX fonts, the "Computer Modern" (CM) versions and the "Almost
+Modern" (AM) versions.  Users are encouraged to switch to the final
+release of the CM fonts, rather than stick with the outmoded AM
+fonts.
+
+In VerTeX I have  \font loading statements for both the CM and the AM 
+fonts.  You should comment out the font definitions that you are not using. 
+The \font statements are at the start of vertex.tex, ppt.sty, etc.
+
+Good luck.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/files.lst b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/files.lst
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..350b50fbf44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/files.lst
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+!!!!READ !ME    Information about TeX fonts
+VERTEX   DOC    Documentation
+VERTEX   HST    History of revisions
+FILES    LST    This file
+USERS    LST    List of users on mailing list
+AER      STY    Armenian Economic Review
+ECNMET   STY    Economagica 
+JEP      STY    Journal of Economic Perspectives
+JET      STY    Journal of Economic Theorems
+JPE      STY    Journal of Polemical Economy
+PPT      STY    Preprint
+QJE      STY    Quartered Journal of Economics
+RESTUD   STY    Review of Economic Students
+FNTEST   TEX    Torture test for footnotes
+JEPCONT  TEX    Table of Contents for JEP
+TEST     TEX    Test file
+TWOCOL   TEX    Two columns (for AER.STY)
+VERTEST  TEX    Runs TEST.TEX through all of the styles
+VERTEX   TEX    Main set of TeX macros
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/users.lst b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/users.lst
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4aa97e300d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/users.lst
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+Professor
+Carl
+Carl
+
+Shapiro
+
+Woodrow Wilson School
+Princeton University
+Princeton, NJ 08540
+*
+Professor 
+Robert 
+Bob
+
+Wilson
+
+Graduate School of Business
+Stanford University
+Stanford, CA 94305
+*
+Professor 
+Chi-Fu 
+Chi-Fu 
+
+Huang
+
+Sloan School of Management
+MIT
+Cambridge, MA 02139
+*
+Professor 
+Barry 
+Barry 
+
+Nalebuff
+
+Department of Economics
+Princeton University
+Princeton, NJ 08540
+*
+Professor
+In-Koo
+In-Koo
+
+Chu
+
+Graduate School of Business
+University of Chicago
+Chicago, Illinois 60637
+*
+Professor
+Tom
+Tom
+
+Russell
+
+774 Cragmont Avenue
+Berkeley, CA 94707
+*
+Dr. 
+Lee
+Lee
+
+Lillard
+
+The Rand Corporation
+1700 Main Street, PO Box 2138
+Santa Monica, CA 90406-2138
+*
+Professor
+Joseph
+Joe
+
+Stiglitz
+
+Hoover Institute
+Stanford University
+Stanford, CA 94305
+*
+Professor
+Carl
+Carl
+
+Shapiro
+
+Woodrow Wilson School
+Princeton University
+Princeton, NJ 08540
+*
+Professor 
+Robert 
+Bob
+
+Wilson
+
+Graduate School of Business
+Stanford University
+Stanford, CA 94305
+*
+Professor 
+Chi-Fu 
+Chi-Fu 
+
+Huang
+
+Sloan School of Management
+MIT
+Cambridge, MA 02139
+*
+Professor 
+Barry 
+Barry 
+
+Nalebuff
+
+Department of Economics
+Princeton University
+Princeton, NJ 08540
+*
+Professor
+In-Koo
+In-Koo
+
+Chu
+
+Graduate School of Business
+University of Chicago
+Chicago, Illinois 60637
+*
+Professor
+Tom
+Tom
+
+Russell
+
+774 Cragmont Avenue
+Berkeley, CA 94707
+*
+Dr. 
+Lee
+Lee
+
+Lillard
+
+The Rand Corporation
+1700 Main Street, PO Box 2138
+Santa Monica, CA 90406-2138
+*
+Professor
+Joseph
+Joe
+
+Stiglitz
+
+Department of Economics
+Princeton University
+Princeton, NJ 08540
+*
+Professor
+Alan 
+Alan 
+
+Harrison
+
+Department of Economics
+McMaster University
+1280 Main Street West
+Hamilton, Ontario
+Canada, L8S 4M4
+*
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/vertex.hst b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/vertex.hst
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ae6873b92ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/plain/vertex/vertex.hst
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+********************VarTeX Revision History**************************
+
+As of October 1986, VarTeX should be considered to be in its
+pre-release, beta testing stage.  This file will record updates
+and fixes to VarTeX.
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+October 2, 1986
+
+\doublespace --  works, but footnotes aren't spaced quite right.
+\refs -- still need more \if statements
+footnote rule now defined in ppt.sty
+\thanks now works in ppt.sty
+qje.sty defined.
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+October 6, 1986
+
+\baselineskip is correct in footnotes now, except for long ones.
+\skipins is probably still wrong, but it will do for now.
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+October 15, 1986
+
+Cleaned up the footnote stuff mentioned above.  Should have correct
+spacing now in both single and double mode. 
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
+November 9, 1986
+
+Cleaned up some of the style formats.  For some reason \Romannumeral
+doesn't work in \DoCenteredSection.  Fixed several of the bibliographys
+in the style files.  aer.sty gives "\overfull vboxs", but the output looks
+good.
+
+Have Kari's endnote macro to do endnotes as inserts, but I have not yet
+implemented them.  That's the next thing to do.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+June 13, 1987
+
+Fixed problem with \big, due to failure to define \tenbig, \ninebig, etc.
+   on p. 415 of TeXbook.
+
+Made \tenpointbaselineskip equal to 12 points.
+
+Added \ProduceEndNotes to print footnotes at end of paper by using 
+the \insert macro.  (Thanks to Kari Gluski for suggesting this.)
+
+Fixed the footnotes to always be single spaced, even when paper is 
+doublespaced.
+
+Changed \enddocument to do nothing; its previous function is replaced
+by \ProduceEndNotes.
+
+The \thanks footnote in ppt.sty now looks nicer in doublespaced mode.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
+August 9, 1987
+
+Some fixes to ecnmet.sty
+Added \quote and \singlespace
+Change \bigbreak to \BigBreak to avoid more widows with \section and
+    \subsection
+Added \halign to \DoCoverAuthor to allow for multiple authors
\ No newline at end of file